Emerson Process Management Electric Co Whiteboard Accessories 3 9000 522 Users Manual 00522

3-9000-522 to the manual 5023104b-7e4a-48af-a858-6c4528d4e039

2015-02-06

: Emerson-Process-Management Emerson-Process-Management-Emerson-Process-Management-Emerson-Electric-Co-Whiteboard-Accessories-3-9000-522-Users-Manual-540160 emerson-process-management-emerson-process-management-emerson-electric-co-whiteboard-accessories-3-9000-522-users-manual-540160 emerson-process-management pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 516 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

MON2000
Software for Gas Chromatographs
User Manual
Applies to Both:
Daniel Danalyzer On-Line Gas Chromatographs
Rosemount Analytical Process Gas Chromatographs
Part Number 3-9000-522
Revision R
JULY 2010
MON2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Manual
NOTICE
DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC. AND ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL
(COLLECTIVELY, “SELLER”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR TECHNICAL OR EDITORIAL ERRORS IN
THIS MANUAL OR OMISSIONS FROM THIS MANUAL. SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THIS MANUAL AND, IN NO EVENT,
SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PRODUCTION, LOSS OF PROFITS, ETC.
PRODUCT NAMES USED HEREIN ARE FOR MANUFACTURER OR SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION
ONLY AND MAY BE TRADEMARKS/REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF THESE COMPANIES.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS PUBLICATION ARE PRESENTED FOR INFORMATIONAL PURPOSES
ONLY, AND WHILE EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THEIR ACCURACY, THEY
ARE NOT TO BE CONSTRUED AS WARRANTIES OR GUARANTEES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES DESCRIBED HEREIN OR THEIR USE OR
APPLICABILITY. WE RESERVE THE RIGHT TO MODIFY OR IMPROVE THE DESIGNS OR
SPECIFICATIONS OF SUCH PRODUCTS AT ANY TIME.
SELLER DOES NOT ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE SELECTION, USE OR MAINTENANCE
OF ANY PRODUCT. RESPONSIBILITY FOR PROPER SELECTION, USE AND MAINTENANCE OF
ANY SELLER PRODUCT REMAINS SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND END-USER.
DANIEL AND THE DANIEL LOGO ARE REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF DANIEL MEASUREMENT
AND CONTROL, INC. ROSEMOUNT AND THE ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL LOGO ARE
REGISTERED TRADEMARKS OF ROSEMOUNT ANALYTICAL. THE EMERSON LOGO IS A
TRADEMARK AND SERVICE MARK OF EMERSON ELECTRIC CO.
COPYRIGHT © 2010 BY DANIEL MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL, INC., HOUSTON, TEXAS,
U.S.A.
All rights reserved. No part of this work may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any
means - graphic, electronic, or mechanical — without first receiving the written permission of
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. Houston, Texas, U.S.A.
WARRANTY
1. LIMITED WARRANTY: Subject to the limitations contained in Section 2 herein and except as
otherwise expressly provided herein, Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. and Rosemount
Analytical, (collectively“Seller”) warrants that the firmware will execute the programming
instructions provided by Seller, and that the Goods manufactured or Services provided by Seller
will be free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use and care until the
expiration of the applicable warranty period. Goods are warranted for twelve (12) months from
the date of initial installation or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment by Seller,
whichever period expires first. Consumables and Services are warranted for a period of 90 days
from the date of shipment or completion of the Services. Products purchased by Seller from a
third party for resale to Buyer ("Resale Products") shall carry only the warranty extended by the
original manufacturer. Buyer agrees that Seller has no liability for Resale Products beyond making
a reasonable commercial effort to arrange for procurement and shipping of the Resale Products. If
Buyer discovers any warranty defects and notifies Seller thereof in writing during the applicable
warranty period, Seller shall, at its option, promptly correct any errors that are found by Seller in
the firmware or Services, or repair or replace F.O.B. point of manufacture that portion of the
Goods or firmware found by Seller to be defective, or refund the purchase price of the defective
portion of the Goods/Services. All replacements or repairs necessitated by inadequate
maintenance, normal wear and usage, unsuitable power sources, unsuitable environmental
conditions, accident, misuse, improper installation, modification, repair, storage or handling, or
any other cause not the fault of Seller are not covered by this limited warranty, and shall be at
Buyer's expense. Seller shall not be obligated to pay any costs or charges incurred by Buyer or
any other party except as may be agreed upon in writing in advance by an authorized Seller rep-
resentative. All costs of dismantling, reinstallation and freight and the time and expenses of
Seller's personnel for site travel and diagnosis under this warranty clause shall be borne by Buyer
unless accepted in writing by Seller. Goods repaired and parts replaced during the warranty
period shall be in warranty for the remainder of the original warranty period or ninety (90) days,
whichever is longer. This limited warranty is the only warranty made by Seller and can be
amended only in a writing signed by an authorized representative of Seller. Except as otherwise
expressly provided in the Agreement, THERE ARE NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, AS TO MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR ANY OTHER MATTER WITH RESPECT TO ANY OF THE GOODS OR SERVICES. It
is understood that corrosion or erosion of materials is not covered by our guarantee.
2. LIMITATION OF REMEDY AND LIABILITY: SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
CAUSED BY DELAY IN PERFORMANCE. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF
WARRANTY HEREUNDER SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR, CORRECTION, REPLACEMENT OR
REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE UNDER THE LIMITED WARRANTY CLAUSE IN SECTION 1
HEREIN. IN NO EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION
(WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, INFRINGEMENT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, OTHER
TORT OR OTHERWISE), SHALL SELLER'S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS CUSTOMERS
EXCEED THE PRICE TO BUYER OF THE SPECIFIC GOODS MANUFACTURED OR SERVICES
PROVIDED BY SELLER GIVING RISE TO THE CLAIM OR CAUSE OF ACTION. BUYER AGREES
THAT IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER'S LIABILITY TO BUYER AND/OR ITS CUSTOMERS EXTEND
TO INCLUDE INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES. THE TERM
"CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES" SHALL INCLUDE, BUT NOT BE LIMITED TO, LOSS OF
ANTICIPATED PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF REVENUE AND COST OF CAPITAL.
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
• Read all instructions prior to installing, operating, and servicing this product.
• Follow all warnings, cautions, and instructions marked on and supplied with this product.
• Inspect the equipment packing case and if damage exists, notify your local carrier for
liability.
• Open the packing list and carefully remove equipment and spare or replacement parts
from the case. Inspect all equipment for damage and missing parts.
• If items are damaged or missing, contact the manufacturer at 1 (713) 827-6314 for
instructions about receiving replacement parts.
• Install equipment as specified per the installation instructions and per applicable local and
national codes. All connections shall be made to proper electrical and pressure sources.
• Ensure that all equipment doors are closed and protective covers are in place, except
when maintenance is being performed by qualified persons, to prevent personal injury.
• Use of this product for any purpose other than its intended purpose may result in property
damage and/or serious injury or death.
• Before opening the flameproof enclosure in a flammable atmosphere, the electrical
circuits must be interrupted.
• Repairs must be performed using only authorized replacement parts as specified by the
manufacturer. Use of unauthorized parts can affect the product's performance and place
the safe operation of the product at risk.
• When installing or servicing ATEX-certified units, the ATEX approval applies only to
equipment without cable glands. When mounting the flameproof enclosures in a
hazardous area, only flameproof cable glands certified to IEC 60079-1 must be used.
• Technical assistance is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week by calling 1 (713) 827-
6314.
This page is intentionally left blank.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION 1.1 Description of Manual ....................................1-1
Section 1 – Introduction ................................1-1
Section 2 – Installation and Startup.................1-2
Section 3 – Getting Started............................1-2
Section 4 – Control Functions.........................1-2
Section 5 – Application Functions ...................1-3
Section 6 – Chromatogram Viewer..................1-3
Section 7 – Reports.......................................1-3
Section 8 – Logs...........................................1-3
Section 9 – Data Collection ............................1-4
Section 10 – Modbus Test .............................1-4
Appendix A, PC Config Report ........................1-5
Appendix B, Component Data Table ................1-5
Appendix C, Data Computations .....................1-5
Appendix D, Analog Output
Cal. 2350A GC .............................................1-5
Appendix E, Upgrade 2350A GC
S/W and 2350 EPROMS.................................1-5
Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC ...1-5
1.2 Description of Online Help ..............................1-6
1.3 Description of MON2000 ...............................1-6
INSTALLATION AND
SETUP
2.1 System Requirements ....................................2-1
2.2 Installing MON2000 ......................................2-3
2.3 Installing the CrypKey License Service for
MON2000 PLUS ...........................................2-4
2.4 Copying MON2000 to Disks ...........................2-4
2.5 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License ...........2-6
2.6 Uninstalling MON2000................................. 2-15
2.7 Starting MON2000......................................2-17
2.8 Performing Your First Logon .........................2-18
ii TABLE OF CONTENTS
MON2000
Installation and Setup JULY 2010
2.8.1 The Initial Logon ......................................... 2-18
2.8.2 Registering MON2000 ................................. 2-19
2.8.3 Update MON2000....................................... 2-21
2.9 Checklist for Setting Up MON2000 ............... 2-22
2.10 Communications ......................................... 2-22
2.10.1 Connect to the GC Unit ............................... 2-22
2.10.2 Disconnect from GC Unit ............................. 2-23
2.11 Customizing MON2000................................ 2-24
2.11.1 Configure Users .......................................... 2-24
2.11.2 Set Up GC Directory.................................... 2-27
2.11.3 Dial-up Connection ...................................... 2-30
2.11.4 Modem Initialization Strings/Setup................. 2-36
Black Box - Modem 325............................... 2-37
U.S. Robotics Sportster ............................... 2-38
GVC/MaxTech 28.8 Kbps Modem ................. 2-40
2.12 2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions ............. 2-41
2.13 Conversion Process ..................................... 2-43
2.14 BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION................... 2-49
2.15 2350A Options........................................... 2-52
2.15.1 The COM4A Board ...................................... 2-52
2.15.2 2350A Modem Installation ........................... 2-55
2.15.3 2350A Ethernet Installation.......................... 2-58
2.15.4 Ethernet TCP/IP Settings.............................. 2-62
2.15.5 MON2000 TCP/IP Settings........................... 2-64
2.16 CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM ......... 2-66
2.16.1 Hardware Setup.......................................... 2-66
2.16.2 Select Program Settings............................... 2-68
2.16.3 Generate PC Config Report........................... 2-70
TABLE OF CONTENTS iii
MON2000
JULY 2010 Getting Started
2.17 Downloading an Application .........................2-72
2.18 Upgrading Flash ..........................................2-75
2.19 Offline Edit of GC Application ....................... 2-76
2.19.1 File Selection .............................................. 2-77
2.19.2 Upload Application ......................................2-78
2.19.3 Upload BOS................................................2-81
GETTING STARTED 3.1 Logging On...................................................3-1
3.2 Logging Off ..................................................3-3
3.3 MON2000 User Interface ...............................3-3
3.3.1 Main Window ...............................................3-4
3.3.2 GC Status Bar...............................................3-5
3.3.3 View Menu...................................................3-8
3.3.4 ToolTips.......................................................3-8
3.3.5 Data Entry and Function Features....................3-8
3.3.6 Shortcut to Save or Print Data ........................3-9
3.4 Keyboard Shortcuts.......................................3-9
3.5 Procedures Guide ........................................ 3-11
3.6 Keylock Switch Control................................3-15
3.7 Configuring Your Printer...............................3-16
3.8 Using Online Help........................................3-18
3.9 Operating Modes for Model 700....................3-19
3.10 About MON2000 ........................................3-19
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4.1 Auto Sequence .............................................4-1
4.2 Single Stream ...............................................4-2
4.3 Halt .............................................................4-3
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS
MON2000
Application Functions JULY 2010
4.4 Calibration.................................................... 4-4
4.5 Baseline Run................................................. 4-5
4.6 Auto BTU Start Up and Valve Timing............... 4-7
4.6.1 Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run ................4-7
4.6.2 Starting a Valve Timing Run ......................... 4-12
4.7 GC Time .................................................... 4-13
4.7.1 View GC Time ............................................ 4-13
4.7.2 Set GC Time............................................... 4-14
4.8 Stop Now .................................................. 4-15
APPLICATION
FUNCTIONS
5.1 System ........................................................ 5-1
5.2 Component Data........................................... 5-6
5.2.1 Select Standard Component(s)...................... 5-10
5.2.2 Select Standard Values ................................ 5-11
5.2.3 Update Standard Component(s) .................... 5-11
5.2.4 View Raw Data........................................... 5-12
5.2.5 Sort Retention Time .................................... 5-14
5.3 Timed Events ............................................. 5-14
Timed Events Description............................. 5-14
Valve Events .............................................. 5-15
Integration Events ....................................... 5-15
Spectrum Gain Events ................................. 5-16
5.4 User Defined .............................................. 5-19
5.4.1 Numeric ..................................................... 5-19
5.4.2 Selection.................................................... 5-20
5.4.3 Text Strings ............................................... 5-20
5.5 Calculations ............................................... 5-21
5.5.1 Control ...................................................... 5-21
5.5.2 Averages ................................................... 5-23
TABLE OF CONTENTS v
MON2000
JULY 2010 Application Functions
5.5.3 User Defined ..............................................5-25
5.6 Limit Alarms ...............................................5-27
Limit Alarms Description .............................. 5-30
5.7 Discrete Alarms ..........................................5-31
5.7.1 Delayed Discrete Alarms .............................. 5-33
5.8 Streams ..................................................... 5-38
5.9 Analog Inputs .............................................5-44
5.10 Analog Outputs...........................................5-48
5.10.1 Analog Output Dialog Description..................5-48
5.10.2 Changing a Variable.....................................5-52
5.10.3 Changing the Bargraph.................................5-52
5.10.4 Performing a Manual Calibration....................5-53
5.10.5 Performing an Automated Calibration.............5-54
5.11 Discrete Inputs ...........................................5-56
5.12 Discrete Outputs .........................................5-57
5.13 Valves ....................................................... 5-58
5.14 Temperature Control....................................5-61
5.15 FID Configuration ........................................ 5-62
5.16 LOI Status Variables ....................................5-66
5.17 Serial Ports.................................................5-68
5.17.1 Serial Ports Configuration.............................5-71
5.18 GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations.........5-74
5.18.1 GC DB-9 Serial to External Modem DB-25 ...... 5-76
5.18.2 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB-25 .... 5-77
5.18.3 Com ID ......................................................5-78
5.18.4 Registers.................................................... 5-80
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS
MON2000
Chromatogram Viewer JULY 2010
5.18.5 Setting Optional Base Pressures.................... 5-86
5.18.6 Setting Optional Base Results ....................... 5-90
5.19 TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu.............. 5-94
CHROMATOGRAM
VIEWER
6.1 Chromatogram Viewer Function ...................... 6-1
6.2 Viewing a Live Chromatogram ........................6-2
6.2.1 From Online GC ............................................ 6-2
6.2.2 From GC Archive .......................................... 6-3
6.2.3 From File on Disk .......................................... 6-4
6.3 Removing a Chromatogram from View............. 6-8
6.4 Saving a Chromatogram to Disk...................... 6-8
6.5 Graph Functions............................................6-9
6.5.1 Editing the Chromatogram Graph ....................6-9
6.5.2 Changing Cursor Size .................................. 6-10
6.5.3 Printing the Chromatogram........................... 6-11
6.6 Chromatogram Functions ............................. 6-11
6.6.1 Editing the Chromatogram............................ 6-12
6.6.2 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer .................... 6-13
6.6.3 Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer ..... 6-15
6.6.4 Editing TEVs from Cursor ............................. 6-15
6.6.5 Viewing the Chromatogram Results............... 6-16
6.6.6 Entering a Description.................................. 6-18
6.6.7 Forcing a Calibration.................................... 6-19
6.6.8 Toggling TEVs and CGM Components ........... 6-19
6.7 Viewing Baseline Data ................................. 6-20
6.8 Viewing RAW Data ..................................... 6-21
6.9 Display Options .......................................... 6-21
TABLE OF CONTENTS vii
MON2000
JULY 2010 Reports
REPORTS 7.1 Report Display ..............................................7-1
7.1.1 View Report from Live Data............................7-1
7.1.2 View Report from File ....................................7-4
7.1.3 Print Report ..................................................7-6
7.1.4 Save Report to Disk.......................................7-6
7.1.5 Report Contents............................................7-8
Analysis Report.............................................7-9
Raw Data Report......................................... 7-11
Calibration Report ....................................... 7-12
Final Calibration Report ................................ 7-13
Average Reports ......................................... 7-14
Sample 24-Hour Average Report ................... 7-14
7.2 GC Report Request......................................7-15
7.3 GC Printer Control .......................................7-16
7.4 MON2000 Printer Control.............................7-18
7.5 Archive Data ..............................................7-20
7.5.1 View Data Model 500/Model 700..................7-21
7.5.2 Archive Export Data .................................... 7-24
7.5.3 Reset......................................................... 7-27
7.6 Trend Data .................................................7-28
7.6.1 Trend Data Model 700/2350A GCs .............. 7-28
7.6.2 View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A ..... 7-29
7.6.3 View Trend from File on Disk........................7-32
7.6.4 Edit Graph Display.......................................7-34
7.6.5 Changing Cursor Size...................................7-34
7.6.6 Describe Trend ...........................................7-35
7.6.7 Print Trend .................................................7-35
7.6.8 Save Trend.................................................7-36
7.6.9 Read Trend Archive .....................................7-36
7.6.10 Display Options...........................................7-37
viii TABLE OF CONTENTS
MON2000
Logs JULY 2010
LOGS 8.1 Maintenance Log...........................................8-1
8.2 Parameter List ..............................................8-3
8.3 Alarm Log .................................................... 8-6
8.4 Clear or Acknowledge Active Alarms ............... 8-9
8.5 Event Log .................................................... 8-9
MON2000 PLUS DATA
COLLECTION/AUTO-
POLLING
9.1 Overview ..................................................... 9-1
9.2 Data Collection Configuration ......................... 9-3
9.2.1 Create a New Polling Control File .................... 9-6
9.2.2 Open an Existing Polling Control File................ 9-7
9.2.3 Await Command ........................................... 9-9
9.2.4 Connect/Logon Command ............................ 9-10
9.2.5 Connect/No Logon Command ....................... 9-11
9.2.6 Delay (Seconds) Command........................... 9-11
9.2.7 Delay (Hours) Command .............................. 9-12
9.2.8 Disconnect Command.................................. 9-13
9.2.9 End Command ............................................ 9-13
9.2.10 Poll Command: Alarms................................. 9-14
9.2.11 Poll Command: Averages ............................. 9-16
9.2.12 Poll Command: CGM Archive........................ 9-19
9.2.13 Poll Command: CGM on Alarm...................... 9-21
9.2.14 Poll Command: Condition Start ..................... 9-21
9.2.15 Poll Command: Condition End....................... 9-23
9.2.16 Poll Command: Event Log ............................ 9-24
9.2.17 Poll Command: Maintenance Log .................. 9-26
9.2.18 Poll Command: Registers.............................. 9-28
9.2.19 Poll Command: Reports................................ 9-32
9.2.20 Repeat Command........................................ 9-34
9.2.21 Run Command............................................ 9-35
TABLE OF CONTENTS ix
MON2000
JULY 2010 Modbus Test
9.3 Data Collection ...........................................9-35
9.3.1 Start Auto-Sequencing................................. 9-36
9.3.2 Transaction Log ..........................................9-38
9.3.3 Auto-Sequencing Status...............................9-38
9.3.4 Status Log ................................................. 9-39
MODBUS TEST 10.1 Starting WinMB ..........................................10-1
10.2 Establishing Communications........................10-2
10.2.1 Comparison of Modbus Protocols .................. 10-3
10.2.2 Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000.......... 10-4
10.2.3 Set Up Port via WinMB ................................10-5
10.3 Getting Modbus Data...................................10-7
10.3.1 Use Single Data Type .................................. 10-9
10.3.2 Use Template (Mixed Data Types) ............... 10-10
10.4 Using Modbus Data ................................... 10-13
10.4.1 Set Log Parameters ................................... 10-14
10.4.2 Save Modbus Data .................................... 10-16
10.4.3 Assign Scale Ranges for User_Modbus......... 10-17
10.4.4 Print Modbus Data .................................... 10-17
10.5 Troubleshooting Communication Errors ........ 10-18
10.6 Using Modbus Test Online Help .................. 10-19
10.6.1 How to Access ......................................... 10-19
10.6.2 How to Navigate ....................................... 10-20
APPENDIX A, PC CONFIG
REPORT
A.1 How to Print................................................ A-1
A.2 Example Report............................................ A-2
APPENDIX B:
COMPONENT DATA
TABLE
APPENDIX C, DATA
COMPUTATIONS
C.1 Data Acquisition ...........................................C-1
x TABLE OF CONTENTS
MON2000
Appendix D, Analog Output Cal. For 2350A JULY 2010
C.2 Peak Detection .............................................C-2
C.3 Analysis Computations ..................................C-5
C.3.1 Conc. Analysis with Response Factor ..............C-5
Calibration....................................................C-5
Calc. in Mole Percent w/o Normalization ..........C-7
C.4 Post Analysis Computations ...........................C-9
C.4.1 Liquid Equivalent Computations ......................C-9
C.4.2 Heating Value Calculations .............................C-9
C.4.3 Multi-Level Calibration .................................C-17
C.4.4 Indirect Calibration .....................................C-18
APPENDIX D, ANALOG
OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
D.1 Calibrating by Volts .......................................D-1
D.2 Calibrating by Percentages .............................D-5
APPENDIX E, UPGRADE
2350A GC S/W AND
2350 EPROMS
E.1 Connect to GC and Halt Analysis .................... E-1
E.2 Offline Edit to Upload App. & Rename ............. E-1
E.3 Upgrade User-Defined Applications.................. E-3
E.4 Upgrade from Disk ........................................ E-3
E.4.1 Upgrade from GC Controller ........................... E-6
E.4.2 Configure GC Connection............................... E-9
E.5 Disconnect Power and Disassemble............... E-10
E.6 Replace EPROMS/Reset CPU ........................ E-12
E.7 Reassembly Procedures ............................... E-13
E.8 Set-Up and Programming ............................. E-14
E.8.1 Procedure .................................................. E-14
E.8.2 Reprogramming the DiskOnChip.................... E-16
E.8.3 GC Reassembly........................................... E-17
TABLE OF CONTENTS xi
MON2000
JULY 2010 Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC
E.9 Connect to GC for Upgraded App.................. E-18
E.10 Guide to Standard Application Files ............... E-19
E.10.1 Importance of Standard Application Files........ E-19
E.10.2 Standard Applications v1.50 and Later .......... E-20
E.10.3 Standard Applications Prior to v1.50 ............. E-22
APPENDIX F, MODBUS
REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F.1 Introduction – SIM_2251 & User_Modbus ........ F-1
F.1.1 Notes on User_Modbus .................................. F-1
F.1.2 Notes on SIM_2251 Modbus .......................... F-2
F.2 User_Modbus Register List ............................. F-3
F.2.1 SIM_2251 Modbus Register List...................... F-6
xii TABLE OF CONTENTS
MON2000
Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC JULY 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
INTRODUCTION 1-1
MON2000
_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 Description of Manual
INTRODUCTION
Welcome to the MON2000 User Manual
(P/N 3-9000-522), a user guide that
accompanies the MON2000 software produced
by Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., a
Division of Emerson Process Management.
Use this manual for installing the MON2000
and Modbus Test (WinMB) software programs,
getting started, checking various gas
chromatograph (GC) application settings, and
configuring and monitoring your GC system.
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF MANUAL
See the following section summaries or the
Table of Contents for more information.
Section 1 – Introduction
This section includes:
• summary listing of the manual sections
• description of the MON2000 User Guide
online help file
• description of the MON2000 software
program
1-2 INTRODUCTION
MON2000
Description of Manual JULY 2010
Section 2 – Installation and Startup
This section includes:
• short description of the MON2000 software
• minimum system requirements for
installing MON2000 on a 32-bit Microsoft®
Windows® platform
• installation and Startup instructions
• establishing communications and Logon
procedures
• instructions for customizing MON2000 and
setting up security
• instructions for downloading an application
and using the Offline Edit function to
change an application’s configuration
Section 3 – Getting Started
This section includes:
• instructions on how to log on and log off
• navigation instructions for MON2000
• listing of available procedures and keyboard
shortcuts
• access and navigation instructions for the
MON2000 User Guide online help file
Section 4 – Control Functions
This section includes:
• description of available Control functions
and detailed step procedures
INTRODUCTION 1-3
MON2000
_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 Description of Manual
Section 5 – Application Functions
This section includes:
• description of available GC Application
functions and detailed step procedures
Section 6 – Chromatogram Viewer
This section includes:
• description of available Chromatogram
Viewer functions and detailed step
procedures to view, save, and print
chromatograms
Section 7 – Reports
This section includes:
• descriptions of available reports and sample
outputs
• instructions on how to generate and print a
given report
Section 8 – Logs
This section includes:
• description of Maintenance, Alarm, and
Event logs
• description of the Parameter List
• step procedures for viewing, editing, and
clearing logs
1-4 INTRODUCTION
MON2000
Description of Manual JULY 2010
Section 9 – Data Collection
This section includes:
• descriptions of Data Collection and Auto-
Sequencing
• instructions on how to configure, generate
and run the Data Collection and Auto-
Sequencing function using MON2000 PLUS
Section 10 – Modbus Test
This section includes:
• short description of the WinMB software
• minimum system requirements for
installing WinMB on a 32-bit Microsoft®
Windows® platform
• installation and start up instructions
• description of available Modbus Test
functions and detailed step procedures
• description of the WinMB online help file
and navigation instructions
INTRODUCTION 1-5
MON2000
_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 Description of Manual
Appendix A, PC Config Report
This appendix provides a sample PC Config
Report for reference only.
Appendix B, Component Data Table
This appendix provides two sample Component
Data Tables for reference only.
Appendix C, Data Computations
This appendix discusses the various equations
and computations involved with acquisition
and analysis tasks.
Appendix D, Analog Output
Cal. 2350A GC
This appendix demonstrates how to calibrate
an analog output for a 2350A GC Controller,
using the MON2000 software.
Appendix E, Upgrade 2350A GC
S/W and 2350 EPROMS
This appendix describes how to upgrade the GC
software and the 2350 GC Controller EPROMS,
the 2350A WinSystems CPU,
P/C104 Bus, and DiskOnChip.
Appendix F, Modbus Reg. List for 2350A GC
This appendix explains the differences between
SIM_2251 and User_Modbus protocols, and
lists the corresponding Modbus registers used
by the 2350A GC Controller.
1-6 INTRODUCTION
MON2000
Description of Online Help JULY 2010
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ONLINE HELP
Use the User Guide online help file to quickly
access information regarding any MON2000
function. See Section 3.8 for more detailed
information.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF MON2000
MON2000 is a menu-driven, Windows-based
software program designed to operate the gas
chromatograph (GCs). MON2000 runs on an
IBM-compatible personal computer (PC) and
serves as an interface between you and the GC
unit. MON2000 can run on a Windows® 95,
Windows® 98, Windows® 2000, Windows® XP
or Windows® NT operating system.
MON2000, combined with the GC applica-
tion(s), offers a complete software package for
operating and monitoring one or more GC
systems from a single PC. MON2000 includes
security features to help prevent unauthorized
access to GC data or control. MON2000 also
includes, for trouble-shooting purposes, an
auxiliary program (WinMB) to selectively poll
the GC Modbus registers (see Section 10 for
more information).
GC functions that can be initiated or controlled
by MON2000 include:
• alarm parameters
• alarm and event processing
• analog scale adjustments
•analyses
• baseline runs
• calculation assignments and configurations
• calibrations
• component assignments and configurations
When configured for RS-485
multi-drop networking,
MON2000 can interface with
up to 32 GC units, either in a
stand-alone configuration or via
a network.
When configured for
Ethernet networking MON2000
can interface with a number of
GC Units limited only by the
number of available TCP/IP
addresses.
INTRODUCTION 1-7
MON2000
_________________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 Description of MON2000
•diagnostics
• event sequences
• halt operations
• stream assignments and sequences
• valve activations
• timing adjustments
Reports that can be generated by MON2000
per the GC application:
• 24-Hour Averages
•Analysis
• Calibration
• Final Calibration
• Hourly Averages
• Monthly Averages
• PC Configuration
•Raw Data
• Variable Averages
• Weekly Averages
Logs that are maintained by MON2000:
•Alarm Log
•Event Log
• Parameter List
• Maintenance Log
1-8 INTRODUCTION
MON2000
Description of MON2000 JULY 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 System Requirements
INSTALLATION AND SETUP
This section lists the system requirements to
run MON2000 and provides installation
procedures as well as initial logon instructions,
communications setup, and software
configuration.
2.1 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
To achieve maximum performance when
running the MON2000 software, ensure your
PC system contains the following hardware.
• PC with a 486/90MHz or higher processor
(Pentium/100MHz or higher recommended)
running either
Windows® 95 (service pack 1 or better) or later
equipment and Microsoft® Windows® operating
system.
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or later) is required to view
spreadsheets or reports saved in HTML format.
If running Windows® 95 with the 2350A optional Ethernet
card, the user must download Socket 2 from
www.microsoft.com/windows95/downloads to utilize
MON2000’s ethernet feature.
2-2 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
System Requirements JULY 2010
-Windows
® 98 version 1 or later
-Windows
® 2000 version 1 or later
-Windows
® XP version 1 or later (see note
for system requirements)
-Windows
® NT Server version 4 (service
pack 3 or later)
• 16 megabytes (MB) of RAM (32 MB or
higher recommended)
• 5 MB of free hard disk space
• Super VGA monitor with 800x600
resolution
• free serial port for remote/local connection
to gas chromatograph (for online operations)
• free parallel port for connection to printer
•Windows
® -compatible modem (for remote
connection only)
• Ethernet connection (when using Ethernet
networking)
Use the Settings>Control Panel>System/>General Page menu to check the system version
number.
For Windows® 95, the version number should be 4.00.950A/B or later.
For Windows® 98 or Windows® 2000, the version number should be 1 or later.
To use Windows® XP you need:
• Computer/Processor PC with 300 MHz or higher processor clock speed recommended;
• 233 MHz minimum required (single or dual processor system)
•*Intel
® Pentium®/CeleronTM family, or AMD-K6®/AMD AthlonTM/AMD DuronTM family,
or compatible processor recommended.
• Memory: 128 MB of RAM or higher recommended (64 MB minimum supported; may limit
performance and some features).
• Hard Disk Minimum: 1.5 GB of available hard disk space.
For Windows® NT4, the version number should be 4.00.1381 or later.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Installing MON2000
2.2 INSTALLING MON2000
To install MON2000, do the following:
1. Either place the MON2000 CD in your
CD-ROM drive or insert Installation Disk 1
into your floppy drive.
2. Launch Windows® Explorer® by either:
• Clicking the button (see the
taskbar) to access the Programs menu
option.
• Double-clicking the Windows® Explorer®
icon on your desktop.
3. Access either your CD-ROM drive or floppy
drive.
4. Double-click the file “setup.exe”.
5. The Installation Wizard begins. Follow the
instructions provided on each screen.
Upon successful installation, Windows®
automatically creates a MON2000 icon on
your desktop.
If you are upgrading MON2000, you must install the new
software with same directory as the current version.
2-4 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Installing the CrypKey License Service for MON2000 PLUS JULY 2010
2.3 INSTALLING THE CRYPKEY LICENSE SERVICE
FOR MON2000 PLUS
The CrypKey License Service must be installed
on all NT-based systems. If you try to run
MON2000 PLUS before installing the CrypKey
License Service, an error will result.
To install the CrypKey License Service, do the
following:
1. After installing MON2000 PLUS, the
program folder should display
automatically; if it doesn’t, open Windows®
Explorer® and access the MON2000 PLUS
program folder.
2. Double-click the SETUPEX.EXE file.
MON2000 PLUS can now be started. You have
30 days to evaluate the application. Once the
trial period expires, you must obtain a license
to continue to use MON2000 PLUS.
for more information, refer to the MON2000
PLUS Quick Start Guide (3-9000-743).
2.4 COPYING MON2000 TO DISKS
Use this procedure to copy the MON2000
installation files to 3 floppy disks for future
installation.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Copying MON2000 to Disks
1. Label 3 blank formatted 3.5-inch floppy
disks “MON2000 Install Disk 1”, “MON2000
Install Disk 2”, and “MON2000 Install Disk
3”.
2. Place the MON2000 CD in your CD-ROM
drive.
3. Launch Windows® Explorer®.
4. Ensure that the Show all files option in
Windows® Explorer® is selected.
(a) Use the View > Folder Options menu to
access the Folder Options dialog.
(b) Click the View tab.
(c) In the Advanced Settings pane, find the
gray folder icon labeled Hidden Files.
(d) Click the Show all files radio button.
(e) Click the button.
5. Use the Windows® Explorer® directory tree
to open the MON2000 Installation Files
folder on your CD.
6. Place the “MON2000 Install Disk 1” in your
floppy drive.
2-6 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010
7. Open the Disk1 folder on your CD.
8. Copy all files from the Disk1 folder to the
“MON2000 Install Disk 1” floppy.
9. Remove the “MON2000 Install Disk 1” from
your floppy drive.
10.Repeat Steps 5 through 8 to copy the Disk2
and Disk3 folders to your “MON2000 Install
Disk 2” and “MON2000 Install Disk 3”
floppy disks.
11.Remove the MON2000 CD from your
CD-ROM drive.
2.5 TRANSFERRING A MON2000 PLUS LICENSE
To physically transfer the license file from one
computer to the other you will need a
removeable storage medium such as a 3.5-inch
floppy disk or a USB flash drive. Also, there
must be a licensed version on MON2000 PLUS
installed on the source computer and an
unlicensed version of MON2000 PLUS on the
targeted computer.
1. On the target computer, if using a floppy
disk, insert it into the disk drive; if using a
flash drive, insert it in to a USB slot.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License
2. Start MON2000 on the target computer.
The License Configuration screen displays.
3. Select Transfer in from another
computer... from the License menu. The
2-8 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010
Transfer License In (Step 1 of 3) screen
displays.
4. Click Browse to select a disk path to the
removeable storage medium that holds the
license file. Click OK to accept your
selection.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License
5. Click Next. The Transfer License In (Step 2
of 3) screen displays.
6. Remove the removeable storage medium
from the targeted computer and insert it
into the source computer.
7. Launch MON2000 PLUS on the source
computer. When the startup screen
displays, press Enter. The License
2-10 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010
Configuration screen displays with the
message “Unlimited license”.
8. Select Transfer out to another
computer... from the License menu of the
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License
License Configuration screen. The Transfer
License Out (Step 1 of 2) screen displays.
9. Click Browse to select a disk path to the
removeable storage medium that holds the
license file. Click OK to accept your
selection.
2-12 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010
10.Click Next. The Transfer License Out (Step
2 of 2) screen displays.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License
11.Click Finish. MON2000 PLUS on the
source computer is no longer licensed.
12.Remove the removeable storage medium
from the source computer and reinsert it
into targeted computer.
2-14 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Transferring a MON2000 PLUS License JULY 2010
13.On the targeted computer, click Next on the
Transfer License In (Step 2 of 3) screen. The
Transfer License In (Step 3 of 3) screen
displays.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Uninstalling MON2000
14.Click Finish. The License Configuration
screen displays.
MON2000 PLUS is now licensed for unlimited
use on the targeted computer.
2.6 UNINSTALLING MON2000
To uninstall MON2000 using Windows® 95,
Windows® 98, Windows® 2000 or Windows®
NT,
1. Click the button (see the taskbar).
2-16 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Uninstalling MON2000 JULY 2010
2. Click Settings and then Control Panel. The
Control Panel dialog appears.
3. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs
icon.
4. The Add/Remove Program Properties dialog
appears.
5. Select MON2000 and click the
button.
If using Windows XP, click the Start button, then
Add/Remove Programs.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Starting MON2000
6. Windows® displays the following
confirmation dialog.
7. Click the button to continue.
Windows® deletes the program files only.
Any files shared by other programs or
created by the user are not deleted.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Add/Remove Program
Properties dialog.
2.7 STARTING MON2000
To start MON2000 after a successful
installation,
Use the Windows® Start menu (Start >
Programs >MON2000 menu) by clicking the
button.
Double-click the MON2000 icon automatically
created on your desktop during installation.
To start MON2000 directly from the executable
file, use the directory you specified when
installing MON2000. Note that c:\Program
You cannot access the MON2000 functions
until you are successfully logged on.
2-18 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Performing Your First Logon JULY 2010
Files\MON2000\MON2000 is the default
setting.
2.8 PERFORMING YOUR FIRST LOGON
2.8.1 The Initial Logon
Each new GC unit is shipped with one super
user named “Emerson”. After logon, ensure
that this user name appears in the Users list as
a super user (see Section 2.11.1).
To log on for the first time,
1. Start the MON2000 software program by
clicking the desktop icon or by using the
Windows® Start menu (see Section 2.7).
2. Click in the User Name data field.
3. Type emerson. Note that the user name is
not case-sensitive.
A PIN is not required for
the initial logon.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Registering MON2000
4. When you have successfully logged on, the
MON2000 main window appears.
2.8.2 Registering MON2000
After your have successfully performed your
initial logon (see Section 2.8.1), MON2000
automatically prompts you to register your
copy of MON2000 software. An active Internet
connection is required for registration.
Registering your MON2000 software allows
you to receive information about free updates
and related products. A direct link to the
Emerson Internet website is provided via the
File > Update MON2000 menu.
You may choose to postpone registration. You
can register at any time via the File > Register
MON2000 menu.
2-20 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Registering MON2000 JULY 2010
1. Use the File>Register MON2000 menu.
Follow the prompts in the Register
MON2000 dialog to input your name,
MON2000 serial number (located inside the
CD jewel case), and other relevant
information.
2. Click the button to continue.
3. Choose the desired registration method by
clicking the corresponding radio button.
4. Click the button.
You must have an active
internet connection to
register via the website.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-21
MON2000
JULY 2010 Update MON2000
2.8.3 Update MON2000
Provided there is an active internet connection
to the computer on which MON2000 is
installed, clicking the File>Update MON2000
submenu sends the user to the Emerson®
Chromatograph Controllers website
(www.emersonprocess.com/daniel/products/GC/
Controllers/Productdetail.htm).
Use the File>Update MON2000 menu to
download the latest versions of MON2000 and
the BOS software programs.
To download the latest versions of the software,
1. Use the computer on which MON2000 is
installed and connect to the Internet.
Minimize the Internet window.
2. From MON2000, select the File>Update
MON2000 menu. This opens the Emerson
Chromatograph Controllers website
(www.emersonprocess.com/daniel/products/
GC/Controllers/Productdetail.htm).
3. From the Emerson Chromatograph
Controller website, you can download the
latest MON2000 and BOS updates, view
and/or download catalogs, brochures,
equipment specification sheets, product
manuals, drawings, application notes, and
white papers. Other links to products and
services are also available.
Updating the software
requires a previously installed,
registered copy of MON2000.
2-22 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Checklist for Setting Up MON2000 JULY 2010
2.9 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP MON2000
To ensure optimum performance,
• Configure your system security (see
Section 2.11.1).
Verify that you have assigned a password to
the super user, and/or created a secure
system Admin account.
• Configure how MON2000 will save your
analytic and diagnostic information (see
Section 2.16.2).
• Establish communications between
MON2000 and the GC unit (see Section 2.10
and Section 5.17).
2.10 COMMUNICATIONS
MON2000 can communicate to the GC unit
locally via a serial port cable, Ethernet
connection, or remotely via a modem. If
performing a remote connection, ensure that
you have configured the PC modem first.
To configure the communication and serial port
settings for the GC unit, see Section 5.17.
2.10.1 Connect to the GC Unit
1. Use the File > Connect menu or click the
toolbar icon to access the Select GC for
Connect menu.
2. Double-click the desired GC unit.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-23
MON2000
JULY 2010 Disconnect from GC Unit
3. MON2000 appears the connection status
dialog while dialing the selected unit.
The messages “Reading dictionary”,
“Reading GC Application data”’ and “Logon”
appears in the status bar and an
information screen appears.
Once connected, the name of the GC unit
displays in the lower left hand corner of the
MON2000 main window.
2.10.2 Disconnect from GC Unit
Use this process to terminate an active PC
connection to a GC unit.
The menu-driven procedure for disconnecting
is completely optional. MON2000 intelligently
and automatically disconnects when you exit
MON2000 or connect to a second GC
Controller.
1. Use the File > Disconnect menu or click the
toolbar icon to access this function.
2. MON2000 automatically terminates all
open connections.
If another user is already
connected to the GC, the unit
will “lock out” the second user.
When a PC connection is
active, the GC Controller front
panel will indicate a “System
Lockout”. This status times out
after 10 minutes.
2-24 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Customizing MON2000 JULY 2010
A Terminating communications message
appears in the status bar.
If MON2000 does not detect an active
connection to terminate, an “Invalid
selection or not downloaded” message
appears.
2.11 CUSTOMIZING MON2000
Use the following functions to customize users,
the directory of GC applications, and PC
communications parameters.
2.11.1 Configure Users
Use this function to create new user accounts
or edit the existing account data. An extra level
of security is assigned to the File>Users
submenu. The File>Users submenu can only be
accessed by first entering a Password into a
dialog box titled 'Enter Administrator
Password'. After gaining access to the Users
dialog, the operator then has the ability to
create new user accounts or edit existing
account data. This feature is not available to
the 'Regular' and 'Read Only' user.
1. Use the File > Users menu to access this
function.
2. The Enter Administrator Password dialog
box appears.
Note that the default password admin is
not case sensitive. This password is used as
a security measure to deny unauthorized
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-25
MON2000
JULY 2010 Configure Users
users access to the MON2000 Users
submenu, which allows Super users to add,
edit, or change security levels.
Click the button. Then the Users
dialog appears.
3. Use the File>Change Administrator menu
to change the Administrator password.
The Change Administrator Password dialog
box appears.
Insert the old password, enter the new
password and confirm the change.
Then, click the button to apply
your changes.
2-26 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Configure Users JULY 2010
4. To configure a new user or edit existing user
parameters,
(a) Click the appropriate Name cell and type
the desired user name.
Note that the user name is not case-
sensitive but punctuation (e.g., commas
or spaces) is preserved.
(b) Click the appropriate Type cell and use
the provided combo box to select the
desired security level. Note that there
should be at least one Super user.
(c) Click the appropriate PIN cell and type
the desired PIN for this user. Note that
the PIN is limited to 12 numeric
characters.
If no PIN is entered, the user can log on
to the MON2000 software program or
the GC unit (via the front panel) with
the assigned user name – that is, no
password will be required.
5. To write user data to the online GC unit,
(a) Click the or press
the F2 key.
(b) MON2000 writes the data to the GC
Controller.
6. Click the button to apply your
changes and return to the main screen.
Click the button to exit and
return to the main screen without applying
your changes.
Super users can write changes
to the GC unit, configure
MON2000, and access the
Users function.
Regular and Read only users
can only view data.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-27
MON2000
JULY 2010 Set Up GC Directory
2.11.2 Set Up GC Directory
This function allows you to set up a directory
listing of all GC units MON2000 can control for
this application. From the GC Directory, you
can configure the PC serial port communication
parameters for a specific GC unit.
Data entered in the GC Directory is stored in
the “Gcdir.dat” file (...\GC\BIN\). The Station
Name is the user assigned name to a GC
location. As GC applications are installed,
MON2000 adds the application name to the GC
Directory.
The GC unit name shown in the GC Status Bar
of the MON2000 main window is entered via
the System dialog (see Section 5.1).
To edit the GC directory,
1. Use the File > GC Directory menu to access
this function.
2. The GC Directory dialog appears.
Do not delete any currently
used applications from the GC
Directory. If an entry is
inadvertently deleted, you
may need to reinstall the
application software for that
GC.
2-28 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Set Up GC Directory JULY 2010
3. Press the F1 key to open the MON2000
Application help file for detailed
information about these settings.
4. MON2000 is configured with two default
directories:
• Default 1: parameters are set for 9600
baud rate
5. Default 2: parameters are set for 19200
baud rate.
6. Click the appropriate Com ID cell and type
the Modbus communication identification
number (set by DIP switch positions on the
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-29
MON2000
JULY 2010 Set Up GC Directory
GC Controller system interface board) for
the GC unit.
To successfully connect to the GC unit, the
COM IDs specified via the File>GC
Directory and the Application>Serial Ports
dialogs must match. See Section 5.17.1 for
more information.
7. Click the Comments cell to enter any helpful
information regarding a particular GC unit,
such as location or purpose.
8. Use the dynamic pull-down menus to select
the desired PC Port, Baud Rate, Data Bits,
Stop Bits, Parity, and Handshaking
settings.
9. Use the provided cells to input RTS On
Delay, RTS Off Delay, and Extra Delay
values.
The Extra Delay field accepts numerical
values (0 to 9000 milliseconds) for
additional time to be added to the current
communication timeout delay.
10.Use the Protocol pull-down menu to select
the desired Modbus communications
protocol.
11.If you plan to connect remotely to the GC
unit via a modem or Ethernet connection,
use the Connection Type (Direct/Remote)
The following parameters support an auto-detect
setting: Baud Rate, Data Bits, Stop Bits, Parity,
Protocol.
Set any of these parameters to “?” (autodetect) and
MON2000 will conform to the settings used by the GC
unit.
2-30 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Dial-up Connection JULY 2010
pull-down menu for a “Direct Connect”
option or a previously configured modem.
2.11.3 Dial-up Connection
Use this command to run the Dial-up dialog to
configure the GC Controller modem. The
default properties from Windows® Control
Panel are used so you must ensure that the
modem connects at the GC Controller’s
configured baud rate. It may be necessary to
enter a modem initialization string.
To configure the modem and make a
connection,
1. Use the File>GC Directory menu, and the
GC Directory appears.
2. Click the Station Name data field and click
the Modem Properties button or press the
F2 button.
The Direct Connect option allows you to connect from the PC
to the GC Controller via a serial port, per its default settings.
If you select a modem, the modem property dialog appears,
allowing you to change its attributes.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-31
MON2000
JULY 2010 Dial-up Connection
3. The Modem Properties dialog appears and
the General Data Connection Modem
Preferences are activated.
The General Data default settings are:
Table 2-1 General Data Connection Preferences
Port Speed 19200
Data Protocol Disabled
Compression Disabled
Flow Control None
2-32 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Dial-up Connection JULY 2010
4. Click the Advanced tab to configure the
Hardware settings.
The Advanced Data default settings are:
5. Click the button to apply your
changes, or click the button to
discard the changes and return to the GC
Directory dialog.
Table 2-2 Advanced Data Connection Preferences
Data Bits 8
Parity None
Stop Bits 1
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-33
MON2000
JULY 2010 Dial-up Connection
6. Next, from the GC Directory dialog, scroll
over to configure the following parameters:
Table 2-3 GC Directory Dialog Default Settings
Heading Pull-down Menu Selection
PC Port COM1, COM2,COM3
Handshaking None
RTS On Delay 0
RTS On Delay 0
Extra Delay 0 (See note)
Connection Type
(Direct/Remote)
Direct Connection
Modem
Telephone Complete number
(Area Code) (XXX-XXXX)
Server Type -
IP Address
XXX.XX.XX.XXX
(10 digits)
Retries
• Modem
• IP Address
5
3
IC Multiplier 10
The Baud Rate, Data Bits, and Stop Bits parameters
were configured above.
2-34 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Dial-up Connection JULY 2010
The Extra Delay is enabled for Ethernet connections.
The default value is “0” and the default 30 seconds timeout is used. If
the value is changed to greater than “0”, the value is used as the
timeout. The entered value is multiplied by 10 inside MON2000,
therefore the maximum timeout is 100,000 ms or 100 seconds (ex: If
timeout value needs to be 15 seconds, the user should enter 1,500).
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-35
MON2000
JULY 2010 Dial-up Connection
7. Click the button to accept the
changes. While connecting, MON2000 dials
the number, attempts to connect via the
selected modem and displays progress
messages. A message box appears when a
connection has been made or if the attempt
to connect fails.
Once a connection has been established and
while MON2000 remains connected via the
modem, the Connect button is disabled and
the Disconnect button is enabled.
If the connection fails at any time,
MON2000 displays a message in the GC
Status bar that it has been disconnected.
You can end the connection from the
File>Disconnect menu, by clicking the
disconnect icon on the MON2000 toolbar, or
by exiting MON2000.
When you start MON2000 after the
parameters are established, you can connect
to the GC via the File>Connect menu or by
clicking the Connection icon on the
MON2000 toolbar.
If you are using the Modbus RTU protocol, the values for baud
rate, data bits, stop bits, and parity must match the settings
you configured in the Modem Properties dialog.
These values are required to correctly calculate character
timing.
2-36 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Modem Initialization Strings/Setup JULY 2010
2.11.4 Modem Initialization Strings/Setup
This section provides “examples” of modem
initialization strings and setups that have been
tested and proven operable. This string of text
characters, known as 'AT commands', has
special meaning to the PC modem and is used
by the modem for every telephone connection
made to a selected GC unit.
To edit or enter a modem initialization string,
use the button and use the Control
Panel > Modems > General > Properties >
Connection > Advanced to access the Advanced
Modem Connection Settings dialog. Enter the
modem initialization string in the Extra
Settings field.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-37
MON2000
JULY 2010 Modem Initialization Strings/Setup
By default, MON2000 provides a modem
initialization string that serves the purpose for
most Hayes-compatible modems. Therefore, in
most cases, you need not enter a different
string.
However, for some modems, you may want to
consult the following pages which document
initialization strings and modem setups that
have been field-tested.
Black Box - Modem 325
During development of the GC Controller, a
Black Box Modem 325 was used to test modem
communications with the GC unit. For that test
and that modem, the modem initialization was
set as follows:
\N0\C0\Q0 (where 0 = zero)
The default initialization string that MON2000 provides is
sent to the PC modem first. Then the custom initialization
string you provide is sent. In this manner, MON2000 sets the
modem parameters that it requires, while you can customize
the modem's operation to respond to special conditions.
Once the optimum modem initialization string has been
determined, it should need no further revision unless a
different brand or model of modem is installed.
2-38 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Modem Initialization Strings/Setup JULY 2010
Interpretation of the AT commands for that
particular modem was as follows:
• \N0 = normal mode; no error control; data
is buffered (versus ‘direct mode,’ ‘reliable
mode, ’or ‘auto reliable mode’)
• \C0 = disable auto reliable buffer (versus
‘buffer data for 4 seconds or 200 characters’)
• \Q0 = disable flow control (versus ‘enable
XON/XOFF flow control,’ ‘enable unilateral
CTS flow control,’ or ‘enable bilateral CTS/
RTS flow control’)
U.S. Robotics Sportster
The following setup for U.S. Robotics Sportster
28.8 Kbps external FAX-modems was verified
at the GC assembly and checkout lab:
• At the GC Controller, the modem DIP
switches were set to 5 and 8 UP, the rest
DOWN.
• At the PC, the modem DIP switches were
set to 2, 4, 6, and 7 UP, the rest DOWN.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-39
MON2000
JULY 2010 Modem Initialization Strings/Setup
With these switch settings, initialization string
&F was required. See Table 2-4 for further
explanation of these switch settings and the
parameters they control.
Table 2-4 DIP Switch Settings for U.S. Robotics Sportster Modem
Switch Function At GC At PC
1 UP (off) – Normal DTR; computer must provide
DTR signal for modem to accept commands.
DOWN (on) – Modem ignores DTR.
2 UP (off) – Verbal (word) results.
DOWN (on) – Numeric results.
3 UP (off) – Suppress result codes.
DOWN (on) – Enable result codes.
4 UP (off) – Display keyboard commands.
DOWN (on) – Suppress echo.
5 UP (off) – Modem answers on first ring or higher.
DOWN (on) – Disable auto answer.
6 UP (off) – Modem sends carrier detect (CD) signal
on connect, and drops CD on disconnect.
DOWN (on) – CD always on.
7 UP (off) – For power-on and ATZ reset, the Y or Y1
configuration is used from user-defined nonvolatile
memory (NVRAM).
DOWN (on) – For power-on and ATZ reset, the
generic template, &F0, is used from read only
memory (ROM).
8 UP (off) – Disable AT command set recognition.
DOWN (on) – Enable AT command set recognition.
2-40 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Modem Initialization Strings/Setup JULY 2010
GVC/MaxTech 28.8 Kbps Modem
The following setup for GVC 28.8 Kbps
external Voice/Data/FAX modems was verified
at Daniel Canada. At the GC Controller:
Or
AT&F5 Factory default with v.42bis flow control
disabled (must be first).
ATB8 9600 baud
ATB11 19200 baud
AT&D0 Modem ignores DTR (not necessary if using a
cable that incorporates the DTR signal from
the Controller).
ATM0 Turn OFF speaker.
ATS0=n n is number of rings for auto answer (e.g.,
ATS0=1, ATS0=2, etc.).
AT&C0 Force carrier detect high
AT%C0 Turn OFF compression.
AT&W0 Write to stored profile “0” (zero).
AT&Y0 Use stored profile “0” (zero) when turned on.
To make these settings for the modem at the GC Controller,
you will need to use a terminal program (such as ProComm o
other commercial modem software) to input the “AT”
commands to the modem before connecting it to the GC
Controller.
If compression is turned ON with AT%C1,
or OFF with AT%C0, then the modem at
other end should match.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-41
MON2000
JULY 2010 2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions
At the PC, use &F5%C1M0 which indicates
a factory default with v.42bis flow control
disabled / compression ON / speaker OFF.
2.12 2350 TO 2350A RETROFIT INSTRUCTIONS
The 2350A GC Controller CPU assembly has
been designed to include all digital I/O and
COM3 and COM4 serial ports. This eliminates
the requirement (and additional cost) for an I/O
assembly or DSPI/O assembly.
In addition, BOS is now resident in the
DiskOnChip, instead of an EPROM set. The
DiskOnChip provides additional expanded
memory for archiving data, instead of having to
purchase a memory expansion board assembly.
The BOS file in the DiskOnChip may be
upgraded in the field through MON2000.
Optional boards may be plugged directly into
the PC/104 Bus (connectors J19 and J20) on the
CPU board assembly. The COM4A board
provides four additional serial ports (COM5
through COM8). A modem board and/or
Ethernet board may be also be plugged directly
into the PC/104 Bus for additional
communications requirements.
2-42 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
2350 to 2350A Retrofit Instructions JULY 2010
The PC/104 Bus is designed to allow any
combination of option boards to be installed in
any order, with the exception of the CSA
approved Radicom modem board which must be
the top board in the assembly. (see Figure 2-1).
Figure 2-1 2350A Controller Card Cage Assembly
If you are using the CSA approved Radicom modem;
ensure that it is the top card in the card cage assembly.
The connection configuration of the Radicom modem
requires installation at the top of the assembly.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-43
MON2000
JULY 2010 Conversion Process
2.13 CONVERSION PROCESS
Use the following process to retrofit a 2350 GC
Controller to a 2350A GC Controller.
1. At the GC Controller site, remove the
Controller enclosure's front panel.
(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
2. Locate the GC Controller's Terminal Board
for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is attached to
the GC Controller's card cage assembly,
facing the enclosure's front panel. (In the
rack mount Controller, the TB faces
outward toward the rear of the enclosure.)
3. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the power supply
switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe all safety precautions
when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.
2-44 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Conversion Process JULY 2010
4. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
5. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
6. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
7. Remove all cables connected to the System
Interface Board (P/N 3-2350-005,
P/N 3-2350-022, or P/N 3-2350-023).
8. Remove the I/O48 Board assembly (drawing
P/N BE-12973) and cables from the top slot
of the Cage Card Assembly. This board is
not used on the 2350A GC Controller.
9. Remove the CPU Board assembly (P/N CE-
19281) and cables from the second slot of
the card cage assembly. This board is not
used on the 2350A GC Controller.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-45
MON2000
JULY 2010 Conversion Process
10.Remove the DSPI/O board assembly
(drawing P/N CE-12976) and cables from
the third slot of the card cage assembly.
This board is not used on the 2350A GC
Controller.
11.Remove any other optional boards, such as
memory expansion boards and associated
cables. These parts are not used on the
2350A GC Controller.
12.Leave the Analog Board assembly (drawing
P/N BE-18044) with attached cable in the
card cage. This board is used on the 2350A
basic configuration.
13.Change the fuse in the in-line fuse holder
from 1 amp to the 2.5 amp, Slo-Blo fuse
provided. The fuse is located in the cable (P/
N 2-3-2350-069) between the power supply
and the System Interface Board.
14.Ensure that DIP Switches 6, 7, and 8 of S1
are all in the "OFF" position. If the 2350A is
powered up with S8 in the OFF position, it
will delete the current application
(commonly called a "Cold Start").
15.To inspect or change the GC Controller's
COM ID setup at the GC Controller site,
locate the DIP switch as described in the
following steps.
16.For the explosion-proof Controller, the front
panel is secured by 16 screws. Remove those
screws first.
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the power
supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe all safety
precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.
2-46 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Conversion Process JULY 2010
(a) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage. The DIP switch is located
on the lower left side of the front panel
(see Figure G-2).
Figure 2-2 Explosion-Proof Controller Dip Switch
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-47
MON2000
JULY 2010 Conversion Process
17.For rack mount and panel mount
Controllers, use a flat head screw driver to
remove the access panel on the right side of
the card cage assembly (see Figure 2-3).
Figure 2-3 Right Side View Rack and Panel Mount Units
18.Inspect or change the DIP switch settings as
necessary.
(a) See Table 2-5 as a guide.
(b) Make sure you record in the GC
Controller's maintenance records any
changes you make to the switch settings.
• Switches "1" through "5" form a 5-bit
binary number for setting the Modbus
slave address (also known as COM ID or
Device ID.)
• Switch number "1" is the least
significant bit, and switch number "5" is
the most significant bit.
Switch to ON = 1
Switch to OFF = 0
2-48 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Conversion Process JULY 2010
• Switch "6" is a spare for future use.
Switches "7" and "8" are set as needed
for the presence of an optional LOI
(Local Operator Interface) connected via
COM8 When the COM4A Board is
installed. If the COM4A Board is not
installed, the LOI is connected via
COM4.
Table 2-5 Dip Switch Settings Switch Positions
COM ID 123 45
1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF
7ONONONOFFOFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
RAM CLEAR
Dip Switch Setting Positions
8
Clears RAM when unit is powered down ON
Keeps RAM data when unit is powered down OFF
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-49
MON2000
JULY 2010 BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION
2.14 BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION
At this point, install, if any, all mounting
hardware and optional PC/104 boards onto the
2350A CPU Board.
1. Install the 2350A CPU (P/N 3-2350-090)
into slot 3 of the card cage assembly.
2. Install cables on the CPU Board in the
following sequence:
(a) Digital I/O cable (P/N 3-2350-081) from
CPU J7 to the System Interface Board
J2.
(b) Digital I/O cable (P/N 3-2350-080) from
CPU J4 to the System Interface Board
J3.
(c) COM1, COM2, and the printer cable (P/
N 3-2350-083) from CPU J1 to the
System Interface Board J4, J9, and J11.
(d) COM3 and COM4 can be configured two
different ways. To configure a system
WITHOUT a keyboard and display,
connect cable (P/N 3-2350-084) from
CPU J6 to the System Interface Board
J8 and J10. This provides access to
COM3 on J10 and COM4 on J11 of the
Field Termination board. The serial port
setup in the MON2000 Software for
COM4 must be selected as a PC port.
(e) For a system WITH a keyboard and
display, connect cable (P/N 3-2350-087)
from CPU J6 to the System Interface J8
and J12. This provides access to COM3
on J10 and COM4 is dedicated for use as
a serial interface to the keyboard and
display. COM4 will not be available at
J11 of the Field Termination board.
2-50 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION JULY 2010
The serial port setup in the MON2000
Software for COM4 must be selected as
Front Panel (see Figure 2-4). If all four
serial ports are required for
communications on a system with
keyboard and display, an optional
COM4A Board must be installed and a
COM7 and COM8 cable (P/N 3-2350-086)
connected (see Figure 2-5). The serial
port setup in the MON2000 Software for
COM8 must be configured as Front
Panel. See Figure G-4b.
(f) Reinstall the Analog cable to J6 on the
System Interface Board.
(g) Place the "Unit Updated to 2350A" label,
included with the upgrade kit, on the
instruction decal located on the inside,
right wall of the explosion-proof units or
on the card cage of the rack or panel
mount units.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-51
MON2000
JULY 2010 BASIC 2350A CONFIGURATION
Figure 2-4 Serial Port 4 with COM4A Board
Figure 2-5 Serial Port 8 with COM4A Board
2-52 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
2350A Options JULY 2010
2.15 2350A OPTIONS
The following board configurations are optional
for the Model 500 GC with 2350A Controller.
2.15.1 The COM4A Board
1. To add four additional communications
ports at the GC Controller site, remove the
Controller enclosure's front panel.
(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
2. Locate the GC Controller's Terminal Board
for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is attached to
the GC Controller's Card Cage Assembly,
facing the enclosure's front panel. (In the
rack mount Controller, the TB faces
outward toward the rear of the enclosure.)
3. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the power
supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe all safety
precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-53
MON2000
JULY 2010 The COM4A Board
4. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
5. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
6. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
(a) Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on
the System Interface Board, then
disconnect all CPU cables from the
System Interface Board.
(b) Remove the CPU assembly and install
the COM4A Board, with associated
mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC/
104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly.
(c) Connect COM5 (P22) and COM6 (P23)
on the Field Termination board via cable
(P/N 3-2350-085) to J6 on COM4A.
(d) Connect COM7 (P24) on the Field
Termination board and COM8 via cable
(P/N 3-2350-086) to J3 on COM4A.
(e) Install the CPU assembly into the third
slot of card cage. Connect the CPU cables
as detailed in Section 6.3 Basic 2350A
Configuration.
(f) Install the DB9 connector from COM5 to
P22 on the Field Termination board with
jackpost assemblies.
(g) Install the DB9 connector from COM6 to
P23 on the Field Termination board with
jackpost assemblies.
(h) Install the DB9 connector from COM7 to
P24 on the Field Termination board with
jackpost assemblies.
2-54 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
The COM4A Board JULY 2010
(i) Install the ten position connector from
COM8 to J12 on the System Interface
Board.
(j) Connect the Analog cable to J6 on the
System Interface Board.
With COM4A Boards installed, Serial Port 8 is
usually assigned via MON2000 Applica-
tion>Serial Ports menu. Select Front Panel
from the Usage pull-down menu (see Figure 2-6
and Figure 2-7).
Figure 2-6 Serial Port 4 with COM4A Board
Figure 2-7 Serial Port 8 with COM4A Board
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-55
MON2000
JULY 2010 2350A Modem Installation
2.15.2 2350A Modem Installation
To install the Internal Modem for the 2350A
GC Controller, follow these steps:
1. To add a modem, at the GC Controller site,
remove the Controller enclosure's front
panel.
(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
2. Locate the GC Controller's Terminal Board
for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is attached to
the GC Controller's Card Cage Assembly,
facing the enclosure's front panel. (In the
rack mount Controller, the TB faces
outward toward the rear of the enclosure.)
3. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.
4. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
Refer to P/N 3-9000-537 2350A GC Hardware manual
for COM settings and pinouts.
2-56 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
2350A Modem Installation JULY 2010
5. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
6. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
(a) Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on
the System Interface Board, then
disconnect all CPU cables from the
System Interface Board.
(b) Remove the CPU assembly and install
the COM4A Board, with associated
mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC/
104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly.
Figure 2-8 Modem Piggy-backed on CPU Board
If an option board is already plugged into the PC/104 bus
on the CPU, the modem and mounting hardware will be
installed into the PC/104 connector on the option board.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-57
MON2000
JULY 2010 2350A Modem Installation
(c) Plug one end of the modem extension
cable (P/N 3-2350-075) into J1 of the
modem assembly. The in-line jack on the
remaining end of the modem extension
cable attaches to the lower left inside
wall of the card cage shield (after the
CPU assembly is reinstalled and all
cables reconnected to the System
Interface board). No software setup is
required for this board.
7. To use an existing Modem (1414):
(a) For operation with the 2350A CPU, set
the Standard 1414 Modem jumpers per
the following table:
(b) On the 2350A WinSystems CPU, set J21,
pin 13-14.
Table 2-6 1414 (Standard) Modem Jumper Settings
Jumper Pin
J4/J5 Open
J6 3-5, 4-6
J7 7-8
J9 Open
2-58 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
2350A Ethernet Installation JULY 2010
2.15.3 2350A Ethernet Installation
To add an ethernet assembly:
1. To add an ethernet card at the GC
Controller site, remove the Controller
enclosure's front panel.
(a) For the explosion-proof Controller, the
front panel is secured by 16 screws.
Remove those screws first.
(b) Then carefully lower the front panel on
its bottom hinges. The front panel is
heavy, so make sure it does not drop and
cause damage.
(c) For the rack mount Controller, the rear
of the enclosure is open; it allows access
for most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
(d) Locate the GC Controller's Terminal
Board for Field Wiring (TB). The TB is
attached to the GC Controller's Card
Cage Assembly, facing the enclosure's
front panel. (In the rack mount
Controller, the TB faces outward toward
the rear of the enclosure.)
2. Loosen the six screws that secure the TB.
Then unplug the TB from its connections at
the back, top of the board.
3. Lower the TB down and out of the way, held
in place by its ground straps at the bottom
of the board. This exposes the Card Cage
Assembly.
4. Loosen the four screws that secure the Card
Cage Assembly to the chassis. Then remove
the Card Cage Assembly away from its
chassis mount so that it is easy to work on.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-59
MON2000
JULY 2010 2350A Ethernet Installation
5. Locate the System Interface and Driver
board. It is mounted to the top of the Card
Cage Assembly.
(a) Disconnect the Analog cable from J6 on
the System Interface Board, then
disconnect all CPU cables from the
System Interface Board.
(b) Remove the CPU assembly and install
the COM4A Board, with associated
mounting hardware to J19 and J20 PC/
104 Bus connector on the CPU assembly.
(c) Plug one end of the Ethernet extension
cable (P/N 3-2350-088) into J5 of the
Ethernet assembly.
6. The in-line jack on the remaining end of the
Ethernet extension cable attaches to the
lower left inside wall of the card cage shield,
after the CPU assembly is reinstalled and
all cables reconnected to the System
Interface board (see Table 2-7 and Table 2-8
below).
If an option board is already plugged into the PC/104 bus
on the CPU, the ethernet card and mounting hardware
will be installed into the PC/104 connector on the option
board.
If you are using the CSA approved Radicom modem;
ensure that it is the top card in the card cage assembly.
The connection configuration of the Radicom modem
requires installation at the top of the assembly.
2-60 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
2350A Ethernet Installation JULY 2010
No software setup is required for this board.
(a) If the 2350A BOS version is v1.84 or
later, ensure that J6 Jumper on pins 13-
14 of J1 has been removed.
(see Figure 2-9 and Figure 2-10).
7. If a modem is installed, remove the phone
cord.
8. Install the Ethernet card and set the
jumpers as shown below.
Table 2-7 System Interface Board Cable Connections
Connection Ribbon Cable
J5 and J6 Analog I/O
J8 Com3
J10 Com4
J4 Printer
J11 Com2
J2 and J3 Digital I/O
J12 Front Panel and Keyboard
(if installed)
Table 2-8 CPU Board Cable Connections
Connection Ribbon Cable
J1 Com1, Com2, and Printer
J4 and J7 Digital I/O
J6 Com3 and Com4
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-61
MON2000
JULY 2010 2350A Ethernet Installation
Figure 2-9 Ethernet Jumper Configuration BOS v1.82 and Earlier
Figure 2-10 Ethernet Jumper Configuration BOS v1.84 and Later
2-62 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Ethernet TCP/IP Settings JULY 2010
2.15.4 Ethernet TCP/IP Settings
If you plan to connect via an Ethernet
connection, use the following instructions.
To configure the Ethernet TCP/IP settings for
the 2350A GC Controller:
1. Obtain the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Gateway addresses (numbers) for the
Target 2350A GC Controller from your
supervisor or Information Technology
Department.
2. Use the Application > TCP/IP menu to
access this function.
3. The TCP/IP dialog appears.
4. Go to the Use DHCP/Specify an IP Address
field and select Specify an IP Address.
5. In the IP Address field, enter the IP Address
(number) obtained from your Supervisor or
the Information Technology Department.
If the controller has never been configured for Ethernet
communications, logon to the Model 500 GC using either the
Direct Connect option, or connect remotely via a Modem.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-63
MON2000
JULY 2010 Ethernet TCP/IP Settings
6. In the Subnet Mask field, enter the subnet
mask address (number) obtained from your
Supervisor or the Information Technology
Department.
7. In the Gateway Address field, enter the
Gateway Address (number) obtained from
your Supervisor or the Information
Technology Department.
8. Click the button to apply all
changes.
9. Disconnect from the controller, using the
toolbar icon or by using the File>Disconnect
menu.
2-64 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
MON2000 TCP/IP Settings JULY 2010
2.15.5 MON2000 TCP/IP Settings
To configure the Ethernet TCP/IP settings for
the MON2000,
1. From the File menu, select GC Directory.
2. Ensure that an Ethernet location has been
created or an existing location modified and
that an Ethernet card installed in the PC
has been selected in the field labeled
Connection Type (Direct/Remote).
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-65
MON2000
JULY 2010 MON2000 TCP/IP Settings
3. Enter the same 'IP Address' into the Server
Name/IP Address field of the GC Directory
that was previously entered in the GC
Controller (see Section 2.11.2).
4. Set the number of retries to three.
Click the button to apply your
changes.
2-66 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM JULY 2010
2.16 CONNECT VIA GC EXTERNAL MODEM
2.16.1 HARDWARE SETUP
1. Halt any ongoing analysis runs.
Use the Control > Halt menu to access this
function.
2. Disconnect AC power from the GC
Controller.
3. For the explosion-proof Controller, remove
the cover from the GC Controller housing to
expose the GC Controller Terminal Board
for field wiring.
For the rack mount Controller, the rear of
the enclosure is open; it allows access for
most field wiring procedures without
removing the enclosure.
Ensure you have a pre-existing PC connection to the GC
unit before installing the external modem. If the GC unit is
already on location, do this via another remote operator
connection, or, onsite, via use of a portable PC and serial
cable. Ideally, configure the GC unit and install the
external modem prior to placement at the remote location.
Note: You cannot set the Serial Ports parameters from the
GC unit front panel.)
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH POSSIBLE
Before removing the unit cover from the GC Controller, make certain the
power supply switch is OFF and the AC power cord is disconnected. Observe
all safety precautions when you are working in a hazardous environment.
Failure to observe all safety precautions could result in serious injury or death.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-67
MON2000
JULY 2010 Hardware Setup
4. Connect a custom-made serial line cable (for
RS-232 serial transmission) from the serial
port of the external modem to an available
serial port on the GC Controller Terminal
Board for field wiring.
• Make note of the serial port number you
choose for connection. You will need this
information later to make appropriate
software settings.
• Use an RS-232 serial cable no longer
than 50 feet. Longer distances may
result in spurious loss or corruption of
transmitted data.
•See Section 5.17, for details of GC
Controller serial port connectivity (i.e.,
port locations, pinouts, connector types,
gender, cabling, etc.).
5. Connect a telephone line (from wall phone
jack, if available) to the phone jack for the
external modem.
6. Set external modem for Auto Answer (see
external modem user manual).
Special hardware modifications may be needed when
operating an external GC modem from the GC serial ports 3 or
4 (COM3 or COM4), as follows:
• DE-20782 (see drawing addendum of Model 500 Gas
Chromatograph System Hardware Reference Manual,
P/N 3-9000-537).
• Transient protection modules M7 and/or M4, located on the
back side of the GC Controller Terminal Board for field
wiring, may need replacement with the transient protection
modules for RS-232 signals (P/N 3-2350-027). Note that
M4 serves COM3 and M7 serves COM4.
2-68 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Select Program Settings JULY 2010
2.16.2 Select Program Settings
This function allows you to configure where
database, GC applications, and Modbus Test
program files are stored.
1. Use the File > Program Settings menu to
access this function.
2. The Program Settings dialog appears.
3. To use a Chromatogram file extension other
than the default (e.g. .CGM) or to select the
location of saved data, GC database, and GC
application files,
• click in the Chromatogram file extension
data field and type the desired file
extension
• click in the appropriate data field and
type the desired directory,
Or
• click the button and use the
directory tree to select the desired
location
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-69
MON2000
JULY 2010 Select Program Settings
4. Use the provided check boxes to turn the
following settings on/off. Note that the
default settings are ON.
5. Click the button to apply your
changes and return to the main screen.
Click the button to exit and
return to the main screen without applying
your changes.
Table 2-9 Optional Program Settings
Setting Function
Editing replaces existing text
in tables
If enabled, replaces selected table cell
entry with user input.
If disabled, appends user input to end of
the selected table cell entry.
Prompt to confirm discard
changes
Display confirmation dialog before
exiting a dialog that contains changed
data.
Prompt to confirm save
changes
Display confirmation dialog before saving
changed data.
Synchronize GC Controller’s
time to PC on download, etc.
Program the GC Controller clock to
match the PC clock upon download.
Tab from spreadsheet to next
control
Move from field to field and button to
button (rather than from cell to cell
within a spreadsheet or tabular display).
Enable display in PPM If enabled, percentages less than 0.99%
are displayed in PPM (parts per million)
rather than as a percentage.
2-70 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Generate PC Config Report JULY 2010
2.16.3 Generate PC Config Report
This function allows you to generate or print
out a report of the currently active GC
application control settings. See Appendix A for
a sample print-out of a PC Config Report.
To view a PC Config Report already saved to
disk, see Section 7.1.2.
1. Use the File > PC Config Report menu to
access this function. The PC Config Report
dialog appears.
2. Click the check boxes (see Select column) to
choose the data you want included in the
configuration report.
Click the button or press the F2
key to select all options.
Click the button or press F3 to
deselect (i.e., clear) all checked options.
Output data for the PC Config
Report depends on the GC
Controller and its application.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-71
MON2000
JULY 2010 Generate PC Config Report
3. Use the Output radio buttons to either save
the report to disk, print the report with or
without form feeds, or display the report via
the report viewer (see Section 7.1).
The File option will open the Save As dialog,
with CONFIG.TXT as the default file name.
The Printer (with form feeds) option will
print the report, with form feeds, to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
The Printer (without form feeds) option will
print the report, without form feeds, to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
The Screen option will launch the report
viewer (see Section 7.1).
4. Click the button or press the F4
key to generate your customized PC Config
Report.
A progress bar appears, indicating the
completion status.
If you want to use the
standard Windows®
Print dialog to select a
printer, deselect the Use
default printer option.
If you are online with the GC Controller, a PC Config
Report that includes all options can require up to 20
minutes to generate and save. Printing a full report can
take longer.
If you press the ESC key, MON2000 will stop after the
current option is completed.
2-72 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Downloading an Application JULY 2010
2.17 DOWNLOADING AN APPLICATION
This function allows the MON2000 operator to
download applications to GC Controllers. GC
applications with the .APP extension can only
be down loaded to 2350A GC Controllers and
Model 700 units. The Download feature is NOT
available if the keylock switch is closed.
At the end of the download process, MON2000
displays the Set GC Time dialog, which allows
you to accept or change the GC Controller's
date and time.
Only download an application when performing
an initial startup, downloading a new GC
application, or after the GC unit has been out of
service. You must first connect to the GC to use
the Download function.
1. Use the File > Download menu to access the
Select GC Application File To Download
dialog.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-73
MON2000
JULY 2010 Downloading an Application
2. Click the desired .app file. The file name
appears in the File name data field.
3. Click the button to download the
selected application file to the connected GC
unit.
Click the button to exit and
return to the main window.
4. MON2000 reads the time at the GC
Controller and the Set Time dialog appears
appears for you to edit or accept (see
Section 4.7.2 for more information).
5. A progress bar appears, indicating the
completion status. See Table 2-10 for a
listing of the automatically enabled function
keys.
GC application files contain all control settings and
application program functions (see Section 5) specific
to a particular GC Controller.
For 2350A GC Controllers and the Model 700
controller, application files (.app files) are normally
stored in the \GC\APP directory.
2-74 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Downloading an Application JULY 2010
Table 2-10 Main Menu Function Keys Enabled by Download
Key Function Description
F1 Help Access context-sensitive online help.
F2 Start Auto Sequence Initialize the Auto-Sequencing function.
This function is also available via the
Control > Auto Sequence menu.
F3 Halt Stop a function at the end of the current
cycle. This function is also available via the
Control > Halt menu.
F5 Edit TEVs Display the Timed Event Tables. This
function is also available via the Application
> Timed Events menu.
F6 Edit CDTs Display the Component Data Tables. This
function is also available via the Application
> Component Data menu.
F7 View Current CGM Display chromatogram of the stream
currently being analyzed. This function is
also available via the Chromatogram menu.
F8 View Last CGM Display chromatogram stored in the GC
unit. This function is also available via the
Chromatogram menu.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-75
MON2000
JULY 2010 Upgrading Flash
2.18 UPGRADING FLASH
Use this function to download a BOS file to a
connected GC Controller.
Only download a BOS file when upgrading the
GC firmware or after the GC unit has been out
of service. You must first connect to the GC to
use the Upgrade Flash function.
1. Use the File > Upgrade Flash menu to
access the Select BOS File To Download
dialog.
2. Click the desired BOS file. The file name
appears in the File name data field.
3. Click the button to download the
selected BOS file to the connected GC unit.
Click the button to exit and
return to the main window.
2-76 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Offline Edit of GC Application JULY 2010
2.19 OFFLINE EDIT OF GC APPLICATION
Use this function to edit a GC application file
that is saved on disk or has been downloaded
(and is currently on, or being used by, the GC
unit).
When selecting Offline Edit, you can choose
either:
• File Selection – Allows you to edit a GC
application file stored on disk.
• Upload Application – Allows you to upload
the current GC application data from the
GC Controller and save to file for future
editing.
• Upload BOS - Allows you to upload the
current BOS (i.e., firmware) file from the
GC Controller to save for future download.
See the following sections for detailed
instructions.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-77
MON2000
JULY 2010 File Selection
2.19.1 File Selection
This function allows you to edit a GC
application file stored on disk.
1. Use the File > Offline Edit > File Selection
menu to access this function.
The Open GC Application File dialog
appears.
Using the directory tree, select the desired
application file.
2. Click the button.
3. Edit this file by using the MON2000
Application functions (see Section 5 for
more information).
The GC application files
(.APP) are normally stored
in the \GC\App directory.
2-78 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Upload Application JULY 2010
Note that the application file name is
displayed in the GC status dialog and the
File Edit mode (i.e., Offline Edit) is
displayed in main screen titlebar.
When you have finished editing this file,
you can download it to the GC Controller
(see Section 2.17) or save for future use.
2.19.2 Upload Application
This function allows you to upload the
application from an online GC Controller to a
disk file and edit that file.
When connected to the GC, this function allows
you to upload the current GC application data
from the GC Controller and save to file for
future editing. When the application upload is
complete the connection will be terminated
(i.e., disconnected).
1. Establish a connection to the GC.
2. Use the File > Offline Edit > Upload
Application menu to access this function.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-79
MON2000
JULY 2010 Upload Application
3. The Save Uploaded GC Application File
menu appears.
Use this dialog to choose the directory and
file name or create a special file name for
this particular application upload. Click the
button.
4. MON2000 displays the message “Uploading
C:\GC\APP\2350A.app” in the progress
status bar.
MON2000 continues with the upload
process and displays the message,
“Uploading Segment 1 (through segment
15)” in the status bar and a progress bar
appears.
Once all of the segments are uploaded and
the application file (.app) has been saved,
2-80 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Upload Application JULY 2010
MON2000 prompts you to save the
parameters file.
5. The Save Parameter File dialog appears.
Use this dialog to choose the directory
location and file name or create your own
parameter file name. Click the
button to continue.
6. MON2000 saves the parameter data to the
selected directory. When the upload is
complete, your connection to the GC unit is
automatically terminated.
7. You are now viewing the uploaded
application file off-line.
You can edit this application by using the
MON2000 Application functions (see
Section 5 for more information).
Note that the application file name is
displayed in the GC status dialog and the
File Edit mode is displayed in the main
screen titlebar.
When you have finished editing this file,
you can download it to the GC Controller
(see Section 2.17) or save for future use.
INSTALLATION AND SETUP 2-81
MON2000
JULY 2010 Upload BOS
2.19.3 Upload BOS
When connected to the GC, this function allows
you to upload the current BOS (i.e., firmware)
file from the GC Controller to save for future
download (see Section 2.18).
1. Use the File > Offline Edit > Upload BOS
menu to access this function.
2. The Save Uploaded GC BOS File dialog
appears.
By default, GC BOS files are
stored in C:\GC\APP folder.
2-82 INSTALLATION AND SETUP
MON2000
Upload BOS JULY 2010
3. Use this dialog to choose the directory
location and file name or create a file name
for this particular upload. Click the
button to continue.
The message:
“Uploading C:\GC\APP\2350A.bos”
appears in the status bar and a progress bar
appears.
4. MON2000 begins to upload the BOS to the
selected file. When the upload is complete,
normal MON2000 operations resume.
MON2000 will not perform
a BOS upload during an
analysis run. You must halt
the analysis first (see
Section 4.3) or wait until
the GC is idle.
A BOS upload usually takes
10 minutes to complete.
GETTING STARTED 3-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Logging On
3
GETTING STARTED
This section shows you how to get started with
the MON2000 software, covering such
functions as logging on, navigation, and
configuring your PC printer for MON2000.
3.1 LOGGING ON
To log on,
1. Start the MON2000 software program by
clicking the desktop icon or using the
Windows® Start menu (see Section 2.7).
2. Click the User Name data field and type
your assigned user name (up to 12
characters). Note that the user name is not
case-sensitive and can include characters
such as “*”, “-”, “.”, etc.
3-2 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Logging On JULY 2010
3. If required, click the User PIN data field
and type your assigned PIN.
4. When you have successfully logged on, the
MON2000 main window appears.
If you enter an incorrect user name or user PIN,
a error message appears:
Click the button to exit and return
to the Logon dialog.
GETTING STARTED 3-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Logging Off
3.2 LOGGING OFF
To log off,
1. Disconnect from the GC unit (see
Section 2.10.2).
2. Exit the MON2000 program by
•using the File > Exit menu
• pressing the ESC key
• clicking the button
3.3 MON2000 USER INTERFACE
Use the following sections to familiarize
yourself with the MON2000 user interface.
Ensure that you exit the
MON2000 program and
shut down Windows before
powering off the PC.
3-4 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Main Window JULY 2010
3.3.1 Main Window
The MON2000 main window typically looks
like this:
Use the available menus, icons (see toolbar
area and Section 3.3.4), and function keys (see
Section 3.4) to access the desired functions.
menu bar
toolbar
GC Status bar
MON2000 Status bar
titlebar, with connection data
view area
GETTING STARTED 3-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Status Bar
3.3.2 GC Status Bar
The status bar appears across the bottom of the
application window. To display or hide the
status bar, click the Status Bar command using
the View menu (ALT + V, G).
Access this menu command from the View
menu (ALT+ V, S) to display and hide the GC
Status Bar, which displays the following:
• GC - name of the GC currently online
• Alarm status (Unacknowledged)
• Detector number
• Mode (e.g., analysis; Calibration mode or
Analysis mode)
• Streams - number current streams
• Next - next stream number to run)
• Anly - analysis cycle
• Run - run time
• Date - current date is displayed
• Time - current time is displayed
The left area of the status bar describes actions
of menu items as you use the mouse pointer
over the menu selection. This area similarly
shows messages that describe the actions of
toolbar buttons as you press and hold them.
After viewing the description of the toolbar
button command and you do not wish execute
the command, move the mouse pointer away
from the toolbar command, then release the
mouse button.
3-6 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
GC Status Bar JULY 2010
The right areas of the status bar indicate which
of the following keys are activated:
Indicator Description
CAP the Caps Lock
key is ON.
NUM the Num Lock
key is ON
SCRL the Scroll Lock
key is ON
Your connection status is also displayed in the titlebar.
If “Online Edit” appears, then MON2000 is connected to
the GC and is recognizing the existing application.
If “Connected” appears, then MON2000 is connected to
the GC but does not recognize the existing application.
If no connection data is displayed, there is no connection.
GETTING STARTED 3-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Status Bar
The GC Status bar consists of:
Item Description
GC GC unit to which MON2000 is currently
connected
A status flag indicates an active alarm, an
unacknowledged alarm, or the File Edit mode
(offline editing).
Det # detector monitoring the alarm status of the
currently connected GC
A GC unit can have up to 2 detectors.
Mode mode of the Detector
Typical modes are:
•Idle
• Auto Cal
•Auto Base
•Auto Anly
•FCal
Stream current stream being analyzed
Next next sample stream to be analyzed
Anly analysis time
Cycle total cycle time (seconds), selected before
starting another analysis
Run time (seconds) elapsed since current cycle
began
Date/Time date and time, per PC clock
3-8 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
View Menu JULY 2010
3.3.3 View Menu
Use the View menu to toggle (i.e., switch ON or
OFF) which main window component you wish
to view. See Section 3.3.1 for an identification
and definition of each component.
3.3.4 ToolTips
To view a ToolTip, move the mouse cursor to
the Toolbar icon you want identified. MON2000
displays the ToolTip for five seconds.
3.3.5 Data Entry and Function Features
Use the data boxes, buttons, check boxes, and
toggles to input data or to choose options and
activate features.
click push-buttons
to activate features
scroll to access additional settings
type input
in data fields
click check box to
turn setting ON or OFF
click radio button
to select option
use dynamic pull-down
menus to select option
GETTING STARTED 3-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Shortcut to Save or Print Data
3.3.6 Shortcut to Save or Print Data
From any active dialog, right-click the
displayed data to access this menu.
Choose the Save Sheet option to save data to
disk or the Print Sheet option to queue data to
your PC printer. MON2000 prints the report to
your configured printer (see Section 3.7).
3.4 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
MON2000 supports keystrokes as well as a
standard PC mouse interface. Use a mouse to
perform point-and-click operations.
Refer to the following table for common
keyboard shortcuts. See Table 3-2 for function
keys that can be used after an application has
been downloaded to the GC Controller.
Microsoft Internet Explorer
5.0 (or later) is required to
view a spreadsheet file
saved in HTML format.
Table 3-1 Frequently Used Keystrokes
Keystroke Action
ARROW
keys
Move cursor:
• left or right in a data field
• up or down in a menu or combo box
• up or down (column), left or right (row) through displayed data entries
DELETE • Delete the character after cursor.
• Delete selected rows from a table or return row values to the default settings.
ENTER • Add a blank item or row to selected table.
• Activate the default control element (e.g., the OK button) in current window.
ESC Exit application or active window without saving data.
F1 Access context-sensitive help topic.
INSERT • Toggle between insert and type-over mode in selected cell.
• Insert a new row above the highlighted row.
SHIFT+TAB Move to previous control element (e.g., button) or data field in window; see TAB
description.
3-10 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Keyboard Shortcuts JULY 2010
SPACE Toggle settings (via radio buttons or check boxes).
TAB Move to next control element (e.g., button) in window; use File > Program
Settings (see Section 2.16.2) to use TAB key to move to next data field.
Table 3-2 Application-Specific Function Keys
Function
Key Action
F2 Start Auto Sequence
Starts the Auto-Sequencing function (see Section 4.1).
F3 Halt
Halts the GC program (e.g., an analysis run) at the end of the current cycle (see
Section 4.3).
F5 Edit TEVs
Displays the Timed Event Table (TEV) per specified stream (see Section 5.3).
F6 Edit CDTs
Displays the Component Data Table (CDT) per specified stream (see
Section 5.2).
F7 View Current CGM
Displays the chromatogram for the sample stream being analyzed (see
Section 6.1).
F8 View Last GC CGM
Displays any chromatogram stored in the GC Controller (see Section 6.1).
Table 3-1 Frequently Used Keystrokes (Continued)
Keystroke Action
These keystrokes are available from the
main menu only. Function key definitions
will change per the active dialog/function.
GETTING STARTED 3-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Procedures Guide
3.5 PROCEDURES GUIDE
Use the following table to look up the related
manual section and menu (and keystroke) for a
given procedure.
Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure
Task or Data Item Section(s) Menu [Keystroke]
24-Hour Average, component(s)
measured
5.5.2 Application > Calculations > Averages
alarms, related components 5.2
5.6
5.7
5.12
Application > Component Data
[F6]
Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Discrete Outputs
alarms, stream number(s) programmed 5.6 Application > Limit Alarms
Analysis Report (on/off) 7.3
7.4
Reports > GC Printer Control
Reports > MON2000 Printer Control
analysis time 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
auto-calibration (on/off) 5.8 Application > Streams
Auto-Calibration Interval 5.8 Application > Streams
Auto-Calibration Start Time 5.8 Application > Streams
autocal time 5.8 Application > Streams
Baseline 5.8 Application > Streams, Baseline Values [F2]
base pressure used for calculations 5.8 Application > Streams
BTU-dry (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
calibration concentration 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
calibration cycle time 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
calibration runs, number averaged 5.8 Application > Streams
calibration runs, number of 5.8 Application > Streams
calibration stream number 5.8 Application > Streams
communications baud rate, at GC 5.17 Application > Serial Ports
3-12 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Procedures Guide JULY 2010
communications baud rate, at PC 2.11.3 File > (COM ID)
component code and name 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
component full scale (for output) 5.1
5.10
Application > System
(CGM Analog Output Config and Baseline
Offset)
Application > Analog Outputs
component(s) programmed for input 5.9
5.11
Application > Analog Inputs
Application > Discrete Inputs
component(s) programmed for output 5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12
Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs
component, retention time 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
component zero (for output) 5.10 Application > Analog Outputs
Compressibility (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
current date 4.7 Control > GC Time
current time 4.7 Control > GC Time
cycle time 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
delete alarms 5.6
8.3
Application > Limit Alarms
Log > Alarm Log
delete component from component list 5.2 Application > Component Data
[F6], [DELETE]
delete inhibit, integration, peak width 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
delete output(s) 5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12
Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs
edit numeric value 5.4.1 Application > User Defined > Numeric
edit select values 5.4.2 Application > User Defined > Selection
edit text strings 5.4.3 Application > User Defined > Text Strings
Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure (Continued)
Task or Data Item Section(s) Menu [Keystroke]
GETTING STARTED 3-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Procedures Guide
existing alarm(s) 8.3 Log > Alarm Log
full-scale value (for input) 5.9 Application > Analog Inputs
GPM liquid equivalent (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
height or area measurement method 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
High Alarm 5.6 Application > Limit Alarms
(Analyzer) I.D. 2.11.2
5.1
File > GC Directory
Application > System
inhibit on-off times 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
input(s) being used 5.9
5.11
Application > Analog Inputs
Application > Discrete Inputs
integration on-off times 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
Low Alarm 5.6 Application > Limit Alarms
Mole percent (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
Normalization (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
outputs being used 5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12
Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs
Peak Width, on time 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
Ratio (on/off) 5.5.3 Application > Calculations > User Defined
Ratio Denominator 5.5.3 Application > Calculations > User Defined
Ratio, stream number(s) 5.5.3 Application > Calculations > User Defined
Relative Density (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
Response Factor 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
Response Factor, percent deviation 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
Retention Time, percent deviation 5.2 Application > Component Data [F6]
Rolling Average (on/off) 5.5.2 Application > Calculations > Averages
Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure (Continued)
Task or Data Item Section(s) Menu [Keystroke]
3-14 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Procedures Guide JULY 2010
Rolling Average, component for 5.5.2 Application > Calculations > Averages
Rolling Average, number of analyses 5.5.2 Application > Calculations > Averages
Rolling Average, stream number(s) 5.5.2 Application > Calculations > Averages
Spectrum Gain 5.3 Application > Timed Events [F5]
stream number(s) (for output) 5.6
5.7
5.10
5.12
Application > Limit Alarms
Application > Discrete Alarms
Application > Analog Outputs
Application > Discrete Outputs
stream sequences skipped, number 5.1
5.8
Application > System
Application > Streams
streams analyzed, number 5.1
5.8
Application > System
Application > Streams
streams analyzed, sequence 5.1
5.8
Application > System
Application > Streams
Valve on/off times 5.3 Application > Timed Events
[F5]
Weight Percent (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
Wobbe value (on/off) 5.5.1 Application > Calculations > Control
Zero value (for input) 5.9 Application > Analog Inputs
Table 3-3 Menu and Manual Section per MON2000 Procedure (Continued)
Task or Data Item Section(s) Menu [Keystroke]
GETTING STARTED 3-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Keylock Switch Control
3.6 KEYLOCK SWITCH CONTROL
If your GC unit has the keylock control
enabled, you will not be able to write changes
or new data to the GC Controller. The following
error dialog will display.
To see which Modbus registers are affected by
the keylock control, view the Communications
section of the PC Config Report via the Report
Viewer (see Appendix A for instructions and an
example).
When closed ('on'), the GC keylock switch
protects many of the GC Controller's
parameters from being changed using
MON2000.
Most of the dialog boxes in the Application’s
menu allows you to view data but does not
allow you to save changes when the keylock
switch is closed. Several items in the Reports
and Control menus are unavailable when the
keylock switch is closed. The Users dialog
cannot be downloaded to the GC Controller
when the keylock switch is closed. A GC
application cannot be downloaded to the GC
Controller when the keylock switch is closed.
Since most of the GC Controller's parameters
are protected by the keylock switch, it is easiest
to list the operations that are available when
the keylock switch is closed. The following
operations are available when the keylock
switch is closed:
The keylock switch affects
only online operations, i.e.
those that are performed while
connected to a GC Controller.
The keylock switch feature is
only available on controllers
with BOS version 1.6 and
later. The GC Controller
parameters protected by the
keylock switch may vary
slightly from version to
version.
3-16 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Configuring Your Printer JULY 2010
The stream sequences can be changed in the
System dialog box. (GC applications version
1.7 and above.)
• Automatic calibration in the Analog
Outputs dialog box
• Report display
• GC report request (GC applications version
1.7 and above)
• MON2000 printer control (GC applications
version 1.7 and above)
• View archive data
• Trend data
• Maintenance Log editing (GC applications
version 1.7 and above)
• Alarms (except clear/ack all active alarms)
•Event log
• Chromatogram viewer (including forced
calibration using archived chromatograms)
• Start Auto-Sequencing
• Start single stream
• Halt analysis
• Start calibration
• View and set GC time (GC applications
version 1.7 and above)
3.7 CONFIGURING YOUR PRINTER
Use this function to configure the settings for
the printer connected to your PC. This
configuration will apply to any print job queued
from MON2000.
The settings available depend on the printer
type. Refer to the manufacture’s user manual
for more information.
1. Use the File > Print Setup menu to access
this function.
GETTING STARTED 3-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Configuring Your Printer
2. The Printer Setup dialog appears.
3. Use the provided data fields, radio buttons,
check and combo boxes to select the desired
settings.
Click the button to configure
more advanced settings.
Refer to the printer operator manual for
more information.
4. Click the button to queue the
printer.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
Your configuration will be
cleared (i.e., the settings will
return to the default values)
when you exit MON2000.
3-18 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
Using Online Help JULY 2010
3.8 USING ONLINE HELP
Currently, the online help feature contains all
user information and instructions for each
MON2000 function as well as the MON2000
system.
To access the MON2000 Application Help file,
•Press the F1 key at any time to view help
topics that discuss the currently active
dialog or function.
•Use the Help > Help Topics menu to view
the help contents dialog.
Use the scroll bars and arrows to display more
of a topic. You can also resize and/or move the
topic dialog for better viewing convenience.
When applicable, a topic will contain links to
other related topics, notes, and helpful popups.
Use these links as you need.
GETTING STARTED 3-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Operating Modes for Model 700
3.9 OPERATING MODES FOR MODEL 700
The Model 700 GC supports four different
operating modes. Each mode allows the GC to
analyze data from a given number of detectors,
streams, and methods. See Table 3-4 for more
information.
3.10 ABOUT MON2000
To verify information such as the software
version number, copyright date, and the call/
query ratio.
1. Use the Help > About MON2000 menu to
access this dialog.
Table 3-4 Operating Modes for Model 700
Mode ID
Number
Detectors
Supported
Streams
Supported
Methods
Supported
0111
1211
2222
3212
3-20 GETTING STARTED
MON2000
About MON2000 JULY 2010
2. MON2000 appears the About MON2000
dialog.
The Call/Query Ratio estimates the quality
of your serial communications. If this ratio
is less than or equal to 0.5, then the
connection is problematic. The maximum
value of 1 indicates a good connection.
The TAPI version represents the Telephony
API software MON2000 accesses for dial-up
(i.e., remote) communications.
3. Click the button to exit and
return to the main window.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Auto Sequence
4
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
The options in the Control pull-down menu
allow you to initiate various operating modes of
the gas chromatograph (GC) unit.
4.1 AUTO SEQUENCE
Use this function to start continuous GC
analysis runs that follow a predefined stream
sequence. At the initial startup, the current
stream (in the stream sequence) is the first
stream analyzed. See Section 5.8 for detailed
instructions on configuring the predefined
sequence.
1. Use the Control > Auto Sequence menu or
press the F2 key to access this function.
2. The Start Auto Sequence dialog appears.
3. Click the Purge check box to set the purging
option. Note that the default setting is ON.
Purging allows sample gas to flow through
the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis.
4. Click the button to continue.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5. The Auto Sequence GC Analysis begins (if
you selected the Purge Stream option,
MON2000 performs this 60-second task
first).
Use the Report Display
option in the Reports menu
to view the results of the
Auto Sequence function.
4-2 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Single Stream JULY 2010
Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function.
To change the operating parameters, such
as the Timed Event Tables (TEVs) and
Component Data Tables (CDTs), See
Section 4 for information about Application
functions.
4.2 SINGLE STREAM
Use this function to start continuous GC
analysis run(s) on a single stream.
1. Use the Control > Single Stream menu to
access this function.
2. The Start Single Stream Analysis dialog
appears.
3. Select the desired stream from the Stream
menu.
4. Click the Purge check box to set the purging
option. Note that the default setting is ON.
Purging allows sample gas to flow through
the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis.
5. Click the Continuous operation check box to
perform repetitive analysis runs. Note that
the default setting is ON.
Deselect this option if you want to perform
only one analysis run.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Halt
6. Click the button to accept your
selections and continue.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
7. The Single Stream GC Analysis begins (if
you selected the Purge Stream option,
MON2000 performs this 60-second task
first).
Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function.
4.3 HALT
Use this function to stop the current operation
mode at the end of the run in progress.
1. Use the Control > Halt menu or press the F3
key to access this function.
2. MON2000 prompts you to confirm your
selection.
Click the button to proceed.
Click the button to abort and return
to the main window.
3. After the current run finishes, the function
stops and “Idle” appears in the status bar.
Use the Report Display
option in the Reports menu
to view the results of the
Single Stream function.
4-4 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Calibration JULY 2010
4.4 CALIBRATION
Use this function to calibrate the GC unit.
Calibration runs are determined by the CDT
and Streams settings. See Section 5.2 and
Section 5.8 for detailed instructions on how to
edit these settings.
1. Use the Control > Calibration menu to
access this function.
2. The Start Calibration dialog appears.
MON2000 displays the stream to be used
for the calibration.
To select which stream is used for
calibration, See Section 5.8.
3. Click the Purge check box to set the purging
option. Note that the default setting is ON.
If the GC unit is in Auto Sequence mode,
calibration will not start until 2 or more
analysis runs have been completed. This delay
is required to complete the current analysis
and the analysis of the stream currently
purging through the valve.
See Section 7.1 to select
report parameters.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Baseline Run
Purging allows sample gas to flow through
the sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis.
4. Select the desired calibration type.
(a) Click the Manual radio button to
perform a manual calibration.
The CDT for the selected stream(s) will
not be updated with raw data that are
outside the acceptable deviations (as
listed on the CDT). For more
information, See Section 5.2.
(b) Click the Forced radio button to perform
a manual calibration.
The CDT for the selected stream(s) will
be updated with raw data that are
outside the acceptable deviations (as
listed on the CDT). For more
information, See Section 5.2.
5. Click the button to accept your
selections and continue.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
6. The Calibration begins.
Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function.
4.5 BASELINE RUN
Use this function to initiate a single GC
baseline run, to assess chromatogram peaks
caused by the GC valve action alone. A baseline
run is a calibration-like run during which no
calibration or sample gas is injected (i.e., the
valve is not fired).
For either choice, only VAR
(variable) components on
the CDT are updated. See
Section 5.2 for details.
Use the Report Display option
in the Reports menu to view
the results of the Calibration
function.
4-6 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Baseline Run JULY 2010
1. Use the Control > Baseline Run menu to
access this function.
2. The Start Baseline Run dialog appears.
MON2000 displays the stream to be used
for the baseline run.
To select which stream is used for the
baseline calibration, See Section 5.8.
3. Click the button to continue.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
Use the status bar to monitor the progress
of this function. Use the Report Display
option in the Reports menu to view the
results of the Baseline Run function?
If the GC unit is in Auto Sequence mode, MON2000
prompts that the continuous analysis must be stopped.
Halt the analysis (See Section 4.3) and wait for an Idle
status. Then continue initiating the baseline run.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Auto BTU Start Up and Valve Timing
4.6 AUTO BTU START UP AND VALVE TIMING
The Auto BTU Start Up process, which takes
about an hour to complete, automatically
performs the following sequence of tasks:
1. Sets the timing for each valve.
2. Matches all the component peaks.
3. Adjusts the timed events based on peak
integration times.
4. Runs a calibration.
5. Checks the range and order of response
factors.
6. Adjusts the retention time deviations to
avoid peak overlapping.
You can also initiate a valve timing run, which
is the first step of the Auto BTU Start Up
process, independently of that process. See
“Starting a Valve Timing Run” on page 12 for
more information.
4.6.1 Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run
To launch the Auto BTU Start Up process, do
the following:
1. If the GC is currently performing an
analysis, select Halt from the Control menu
to put the GC in Idle mode after the current
analysis run.
4-8 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run JULY 2010
2. Select Valve Timing from the Control menu.
The Valve Timing window displays.
MON2000 displays in the Stream field the
calibration stream(s) to be used for the Auto
BTU Start Up run.
3. Select the Auto BTU Start Up checkbox.
4. To use the default Component Data and
Timed Event tables, select the Default CDT/
TEV checkbox.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run
When the Default CDT/TEV checkbox is
selected, the Valve # and CDT Component
fields are read-only.
5. To use the GC’s existing CDT/TEV tables,
select the Configured CDT/TEV checkbox.
You can enter a valve number in the Valve #
field and select the component number from
the drop-down list of the CDT Component
field in the table below the checkboxes. The
list of components are from the CDT of the
corresponding calibration stream.
It is strongly recommended that you use the Default
CDT/TEV.
neo-Pentane is not available in the CDT Component
drop-down list.
4-10 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run JULY 2010
6. To allow sample gas to flow through the
sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis, click the Purge
stream for 60 seconds check box.
7. Click OK to begin the Auto BTU Start Up
process. When the process starts, the GC
Status window indicates that the GC is in
Vlv Timing mode.
If the Auto BTU Start Up run fails, an
alarm will be triggered and displayed in the
Alarm Log.
It is strongly recommended that you check the Purge
stream for 60 seconds check box.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Initiating an Auto BTU Start Up Run
The following six potential system alarms can be
triggered during the Auto BTU Start Up process:
•Valve Timing 1 Failure: Triggered if the timing for
valve 1 cannot be determined after a ten second
change of VALVE OFF time.
•Valve Timing 2 Failure: Triggered if the timing for
valve 2 cannot be determined after a ten second
change of VALVE OFF time.
•Valve Timing 3 Failure: Triggered if the timing for
valve 3 cannot be determined after a ten second
change of VALVE OFF time.
•Auto BTU RT Failure - Missing Peaks: Triggered if
not all the peaks are found after running the
calibration stream to match all component peaks.
•Auto BTU Response Factor Failure: Triggered if all
of the response factors are not within +/- 50% of
the default values after the calibration runs.
•Auto BTU Calib Failure - RF Order: Triggered if the
response factors are not in the proper order after
the calibration runs.
A triggered alarm will be posted in the Alarm Log.
See Section 8.3 for detailed instructions on reading
Alarm Logs.
4-12 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Starting a Valve Timing Run JULY 2010
4.6.2 Starting a Valve Timing Run
1. Select Valve Timing from the Control menu.
The Start Valve Timing Run dialog appears.
2. If the Auto BTU Start Up checkbox is
selected, uncheck it. The valve timing
feature is now enabled.
3. MON2000 displays in the Stream field the
calibration stream(s) to be used for the
valve timing run.
4. To allow sample gas to flow through the
sample loop for 60 seconds prior to
beginning the first analysis, click the Purge
stream for 60 seconds check box..
If the GC is in Auto Sequence mode, halt the analysis
(See Section 4.3) and then return to the Valve Timing
window.
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Time
5. You can enter a valve number in the Valve #
field and select the component number from
the drop-down list of the CDT Component
field in the table below the checkboxes. The
list of components are from the CDT of the
corresponding calibration stream.
6. Click the button to accept your
selections and to continue.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
7. The Valve Timing run begins.
If no change was made to a valve’s timing,
the following message will be posted in the
Alarm Log: “Valve Timing N Failure”,
where N is the ID number for the valve. See
Section 8.3 for detailed instructions on
reading Alarm Logs. If all valves are
successfully optimized, no messages will be
recorded.
4.7 GC TIME
Use the GC Time function to view and, if
necessary, set the system date and time used
by the GC Controller.
4.7.1 View GC Time
To view the system date and time used by the
GC, do the following:
1. Use the Control > GC Time > View menu to
select the View option.
4-14 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Set GC Time JULY 2010
2. The following MON2000 dialog appears.
3. Click the button to exit this dialog
and return to the main window.
4.7.2 Set GC Time
To set the system date and time used by the
GC,
1. Use the Control > GC Time > Set menu to
select the Set option.
2. The Set GC Time dialog appears MON2000
indicates whether the GC Controller is on
daylight saving or standard time, which
depends on the configured system
parameters.
3. Use the provided pull-down arrow to access
an interactive calendar.
Click the left/right arrows to view the
previous or future months.
Click the desired day for the date. Note that
a blue oval appears on the selected day.
4. Select which part of the time (hour, minute,
or seconds) you wish to change. Use the
CONTROL FUNCTIONS 4-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Stop Now
provided scroll arrows to increase or
decrease the highlighted value.
5. Click the button or press the
enter key to write the selected date/time to
the GC Controller.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
4.8 STOP NOW
Use this function to immediately stop all
analysis runs.
1. Use the Control > Stop Now menu to access
this function.
2. MON2000 prompts you to confirm your
selection.
Click the button to proceed.
Click the button to abort and return
to the main window.
This function forces the system to the Idle mode. If
Stop Now is performed while an analysis is in
progress, the components will continue to elute from
the columns per the Idle mode. All resultant data will
be lost.
Do not perform a Stop Now unless absolutely
necessary. Whenever possible, use the Halt function.
4-16 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Stop Now JULY 2010
3. Any GC function in progress is stopped. The
Mode field in the status bar displays ‘Idle’.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 System
5
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
The options in the Application pull-down menu
allow you to manipulate or edit the control
settings that exist for particular gas
chromatograph (GC) application functions. You
can edit an application while online with the
GC Controller or when using the Offline Edit
function (see Section 2.19 for information on
Offline Edit; see Section 2.17 to download an
application first).
5.1 SYSTEM
Use this function to define or edit the GC
stream sequence, unit name, and system
description. You can also use this function to
activate Metric Base Condition for calculations
based on metric units.
The System dialog also includes a series of non-
editable fields for reference or trouble shooting.
See Table 5-1 for a summary of the items
provided by the System dialog, along with the
related functions and editing status.
1. Use the Application > System menu to
access this function.
5-2 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
System JULY 2010
2. The System dialog appears.
Click and edit any value presented in the
white cells.
Note that the Daylight Savings Time option,
when set to “Override,” will make the GC
Controller ignore the time change from
Standard to Daylight Savings (i.e.,
Standard Time will remain).
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 System
Table 5-1 Description of Items in System Dialog
Item Function Edit
Stream Sequence Defines the order of stream analysis for Detector 1.
Stream Sequence 2 Defines the order of stream analysis for Detector 2;
only available with selected hardware.
Note that this item is not available in all GC applica-
tions.
Aux. Stream Sequence Defines the auxiliary order of stream analysis for
Detector 1. Can be used to run an alternative stream
sequence when a Discrete Input is set (see Section 5.11
for detailed instructions).
Note that this item is not available in all GC applica-
tions.
Aux. Stream Sequence 2 Additional alternative stream sequence provided for
second detector in dual detector applications.
Auxiliary order of stream analysis for Detector 2. Can
be used to run an alternative stream sequence when a
Discrete Input is set (see Section 5.11 for detailed
instructions).
Note that this item is not available in all GC applica-
tions.
Analyzer Name Defines the GC unit name that appears in the status
bar of the main window when connected to the GC Con-
troller. Can contain up to 12 characters.
Unit Type Identifies GC unit type (i.e., model number).
System Description A field to record miscellaneous reference
information to further identify the system. Can contain
up to 28 characters.
Chromatogram Buffer Size Provides number of bytes used to store a
chromatogram.
Max Peaks Provides maximum number of peaks (application-spe-
cific).
5-4 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
System JULY 2010
Number of Valves Identifies number of chromatographic valves
(application-specific).
Daylight Savings Time Allows the GC Controller to adjust automatically for
DST. “Normal” enables automatic DST adjustment
(United States). “Override” disables automatic DST
adjustment.
CGM Analog Output Displays chromatogram trace signals for strip chart
generation from Detectors 1 and/or 2, trace 1 only.
Identifies the analog output number.
If this field is set to 0, then no analog output will
produce the CGM signal.
CGM Baseline Offset A fixed offset (percent of full scale) added to the CGM
analog output to allow the user to conveniently position
the chromatogram on a strip chart recorder. Displays
chromatogram trace signals for strip chart generation
from Detectors 1 and/or 2. Identifies the baseline offset.
CFG Baseline Number Identifies the Standard GC Application software from
which this GC application or configuration was
developed (i.e., the number of the standard configura-
tion file that was used to generate the current applica-
tion).
Metric Base Condition Enables (metric) or disables (off) whether MON2000
displays the GC Control Calculation in metric units.
See Section 5.5.1 for details.
Table 5-1 Description of Items in System Dialog (Continued)
Item Function Edit
When assigning a CGM Analog Output, also check the
Analog Outputs dialog (see Section 5.10). A CGM
Analog Output setting that uses a previously assigned
analog output number will produce erratic CGM trace
output, possibly with incorrect scaling.
Do not assign this item analog output number 1 if the
connected GC unit supports bargraph output
(see Section 5.10.3 for details).
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 System
Max Archive Averages maximum number of averages (1-254)
Max Archive Avg. Records maximum number of archive records per average
without an extended memory card (1-128)
Application Revision (non-edit) - revision level of the current application
Application Base Name (non-edit) - base name of the application
Archive Days (non-edit) – maximum number of days that archive
records are kept (1-400)
BOS Revision (non-edit) – revision level of the BOS
Table 5-1 Description of Items in System Dialog (Continued)
Item Function Edit
5-6 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Component Data JULY 2010
5.2 COMPONENT DATA
Use this function to view and/or edit the
Component Data Tables (CDTs) for a given GC
application.
1. Use the Application > Component Data
menu or press the F6 key to access this
function.
2. The Component Data Tables menu appears,
listing the CDTs available per associated
stream(s).
Choose the desired CDT.
3. Click the button to accept your
selection. The Component Data Table dialog
appears.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
The number of available CDTs depends on the GC unit
configuration.
The standard GC application contains 4 CDTs. MON2000
can operate GC applications with up to 5 CDTs.
To assign a CDT to a stream, see Section 5.8.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Component Data
4. View or edit data. Double-click a given table
cell or use one of the edit function buttons to
make your changes.
Some table cells will change into pull-down
menus when selected. Choose your data
from the pull-down menu provided.
Note that a red component name indicates a
standard component. A black component
name indicates that this component has
been edited or defined by the user.
For more information on the editing
functions available, see Section 5.2.1
through Section 5.2.4.
For descriptions of the standard data
presented in a CDT, see Table 5-2.
5. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
To add a new component,
move the cursor to the last
table cell (last row, last
column) and press ENTER.
5-8 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Component Data JULY 2010
Table 5-2 Description of Standard Parameters in a CDT
Item Function Edit
Number (#) component number
An index number that acts as an identification
label when used in other menus/dialogs (e.g., Limit
Alarms, Analog Outputs). Up to 20 components
can be defined per data table.
Component names assigned to the various components
displayed
Components can be selected from the standard
list, by pressing the F2 key (see Section 5.2.1), or
entered by the user. Up to 15 characters can be
used for the component name.
USR/STD whether the component data is standard or user-
defined
If the component was added by the Select
Standard Component function (see Section 5.2.1)
and no changes were made to the component data,
STD displays. If the component was added
manually by the user or modified, USR displays.
Detector ID component detector number
Retention Time time in seconds that apex of the component peak
will appear
Range = 0 to 6000 seconds
Response Factor equal to the raw data of component peak divided
by component concentration
The maximum value is 1.0E+38.
Ensure that the component retention times do
not exceed the analysis time, as defined by the
TEV Table (see Section 5.3). MON2000 does not
automatically prevent the user from defining
excessive component retention times.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Component Data
Fixed/Variable whether a component response factor is fixed or
variable
A fixed response factor will not be updated during
calibration.
Calibration Concentration component concentration in calibration gas
To enter a PPM, type “Xp”; e.g., “4.0p” will appear
as “4.0 ppm”. Values above 90 PPM are converted
to percentages.
Analysis Method used to determine component raw data value
Use the pull-down menu to select either area,
height, fixed, or the appropriate analog input
(used with auxiliary analyzer).
RT Percent Dev. maximum acceptable percentage of deviation of
the new retention time from the current retention
time
RT Secs. Dev. maximum acceptable deviation time, in seconds, of
the new retention time from the current retention
time
RT Update Method determines when component retention time will be
updated
Select Analysis to update after each run.
Select Calib to update only during final calibration
run.
Resp. Factor % Dev. maximum acceptable percent deviation between
the new response factor and the current response
factor
Total Concentration total concentration of all components
Table 5-2 Description of Standard Parameters in a CDT (Continued)
Item Function Edit
5-10 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Select Standard Component(s) JULY 2010
5.2.1 Select Standard Component(s)
To select standard component(s) to be used by
the displayed CDT,
1. Select the Component cell where you want
the new component.
2. Click the button or press the
F2 key to access the Standard Components
menu.
3. The Standard Components menu appears.
4. Double-click the selected component to add
it to the CDT. The component is
automatically inserted into the selected
table cell.
Click the button or press the ESC key to
abort and return to the Component Data
Table dialog.
See Table 5-2 an asterisk (*) in the column heading indicates a column that contains
standard component values. If any of these values is modified, the corresponding
component becomes non-standard (i.e., user-defined). It is not recommended that you
edit a standard component value.
To add a new row to the
CDT, click the last cell in the
last row and press the
ENTER key.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Select Standard Values
5.2.2 Select Standard Values
To read the values for the standard
components, click the button or
press the F3 key to access the Standard
Components dialog.
Click the button to return to the
CDT.
5.2.3 Update Standard Component(s)
Click the or press the F5 key to
upgrade the Standard Components list of this
CDT to match the MON2000 Standard
Component menu.
Note that this function updates the standard
component list for the current CDT. MON2000
displays a confirmation dialog when a standard
component is changed.
Typically, this function
should only be performed
when the MON2000
software is upgraded.
User-defined components
are not affected by this
update.
5-12 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
View Raw Data JULY 2010
5.2.4 View Raw Data
To view the raw data for the displayed CDT,
1. Select the desired row from the currently
displayed CDT.
2. Click the button or press the
F4 key to access the Raw Data dialog.
3. The Stream Selection dialog appears.
Double-click the desired stream or click the
button to exit. Only the streams
associated with this CDT will display in the
list menu.
4. The Raw Data dialog appears, listing the
peak raw data from the last run of the
stream represented by the CDT.
5. The MON2000 operator can now copy the
Retention Time from the Raw Data screen
to the CDT as follows:
(a) Before pulling up the Raw Data screen,
click Component #1 of the CDT.
(b) Click the Raw Data button or press the
(F4) key to access the Raw Data screen.
(c) Press the ENTER key to copy the
Retention Time (the next component's
When first displayed during a
session, the Select Stream
dialog highlights the stream
that has the most recent raw
data. Thereafter, the
previously selected stream is
highlighted.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Raw Data
RT is automatically targeted by
MON2000). Then, press the DOWN
ARROW key to advance to the next 'Raw
Data' value.
(d) Repeat Step (c) until all Retention Times
have been copied to the CDT.
6. Click the button to clear the Raw
Data screen.
Following is an example of a Raw Data
Table.
Table 5-3 Raw Data Table
Description Method
Baseline Resolved 1
Fused 2
Last of Fused Group 3
Tangent Skimmed 4
Resolved Rider Peak 5
Fused Rider 6
Last of Fused Rider 7
Tailing Peak 8
Forward Horizontal 20
Backward Horizontal 40
Baseline Forced at Valley 60
Inhibit On 100
Forced Integrate On 200
Forced Integrate End 300
Plateau Detect 400
Summation 500
Some methods are a
combination of the above
types, e.g. 103 is LAST OF
FUSED GROUP (3) and
INHIBIT ON (100).
5-14 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Sort Retention Time JULY 2010
5.2.5 Sort Retention Time
To sort the components listed in the displayed
CDT by their retention times,
1. Click the button or press the
F6 key to access this function.
2. MON2000 automatically sorts the
components.
5.3 TIMED EVENTS
Use this function to view and/or edit the GC
Timed Events Tables (TEVs) assigned to and
used by particular gas streams.
Timed Events Description•
• Analysis Time - Input total analysis time.
LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
• Cycle Time - Input total cycle time. LIMITS:
0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
• Off During Baseline (per sample valve) -
toggle check boxes to select which valve(s)
remain off during a baseline run
MON2000 sorts
components by the
corresponding detector
number first, then by the
Retention Time.
Sorting the CDT components by retention time
may affect one or more of the following:
• Analog Outputs
•Averages
• Bargraphs
• Limit Alarms
• User Defined Calculations
See Section 6.6.2 for details about editing
from the Chromatogram > Chromatogram
Viewer menu.
The Cycle Time must be at
least 10 seconds greater
than the Analysis Time.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Timed Events
Valve Events
• Type - use the pull-down menu to select
between valve number (Valve #), discrete
output channel number (DO #), and stream
switch (Strm Sw); additional selections
SSO1, SSO2, Bleed1, Bleed2, Block1 and
Block2 are available for the Model 700 GC
applications
• Valve/DO # (for valves and discrete outputs
only) - input the valve number or discrete
output channel number. Use the provided
combo box to select valve number by name
• State (for all types except for stream switch)
- use the pull-down menu to toggle ON\OFF
• Time - input the time that the event is to
occur. LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
Integration Events
• Type - use the pull-down menu to select
between Inhibit, Integrate, Auto Zero, Slope
Sensitivity, Peak Width, Single Baseline,
FID Gain, Summation, or Fused Override
• Value - For peak width or slope sensitivity,
input the number of points to be used.
LIMITS: Peak Width and Slope Sensitivity,
1 to 99
• For FID gain, use the pull-down menu to
toggle Low\High.
• For Single Baseline, use the pull-down
menu to toggle OFF\BGN (Begin-
ning)\END.
• Except for AutoZero, for all others use the
pull-down menu to toggle ON\OFF. Auto
Zero does not have 'Value' field.
• Det - enter the appropriate detector number
that the event will effect. Valid range is '1'
or '2'
• Time - input the time that the event is to
occur. LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
5-16 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Timed Events JULY 2010
Spectrum Gain Events
• Detector # - use the pull-down menu to
select between detectors #1 and #2
• Gain - input the gain value for that detector.
LIMITS: 0 to 24
• Time - input the time that the event is to
occur. LIMITS: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds
To access the Timed events feature,
1. Use the Application > Timed Events menu
or press the F5 key to access this function.
2. The Timed Event Tables menu displays,
listing the TEVs available per associated
stream(s).
Choose the desired TEV.
The number of available TEVs depends on the GC
unit configuration.
The standard GC application contains four TEVs.
MON2000 can operate GC Applications with up
to five TEVs.
To assign a TEV to a stream, use the Streams
function (see Section 5.8).
See Section 6.6 for editing
TEVs from CGM Viewer.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Timed Events
3. Click the button to accept your
selection. The Timed Events Table dialog
appears.
Click the button to abort and
MON2000 returns you to the main window.
4. View or edit data.
Use the check boxes to toggle the listed
sample valves ON or OFF.
Double-click a given table cell or use one of
the edit function buttons to make your
changes. Some table cells will change into
pull-down menus when selected. Choose
your data from the pull-down menu
provided.
To add a new timed event, move the cursor
to the last table cell (last row, last column)
and press the ENTER key.
5-18 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Timed Events JULY 2010
5. To sort data based on time, click the
button for the corresponding table.
6. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
If you configure duplicate TEVs (i.e., 2 or more
TEVs contain the same parameter settings), an
error dialog will display but your data will be saved.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 User Defined
5.4 USER DEFINED
The user-defined functions allow you to edit a
user-defined operator entry for an application-
specific variable. These variables may be used
in reports, calculations, and/or for controlling
the GC operations; however, user-defined
variables are not used by all applications.
5.4.1 Numeric
Use this function to edit values for defined
initialized variables. The User Defined
Numerics dialog defines the names, types, and
values for all application-specific numeric
variables.
1. Use the Application > User Defined >
Numerics menu to access this function.
2. The User-Defined Numerics dialog appears.
Double-click the desired Value cell and type
the new number.
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5-20 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Selection JULY 2010
5.4.2 Selection
Use this function to edit values for defined
selection variables. The User Defined
Selections dialog defines the names and values
for all application-specific selection variables.
1. Use the Application > User Defined >
Selection menu to access this function.
2. The User-Defined Selections dialog appears.
Double-click the desired Option cell and use
the provided pull-down menu to select the
new setting.
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.4.3 Text Strings
Use this function to edit text strings for defined
string variables that may be used in reports.
The User Defined Text Strings dialog defines
the symbol name, size, and assigned text string
for all application-specific text variables.
1. Use the Application > User Defined > Text
Strings menu to access this function.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-21
MON2000
JULY 2010 Calculations
2. The User-Defined Text Strings dialog
appears.
Double-click the desired String cell and type
the new text.
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.5 CALCULATIONS
These options allow you to activate and define
how the output of standard or user-defined
chromatograph analysis data is used in various
calculations.
5.5.1 Control
Use this function to designate, by streams, the
standard calculations (e.g., mole percent, liquid
volume, gas density, Wobbe index, etc.) that
should be performed from the GC analysis
data. Calculations are enabled or disabled for
each sample stream.
1. Use the Application > Calculations >
Control menu to access this function.
String length (i.e., how many
characters you can enter) is
limited to the number cited in
the Size cell.
5-22 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Control JULY 2010
2. The Control Calculations dialog appears.
Click the check boxes to toggle a calculation
ON or OFF for a given stream.
Scroll towards the end of the list to set
metric calculations.
Before enabling a metric calculation, ensure
that you also enable the Metric Base
Conditions setting in the Systems dialog
(see Section 5.1).
3. Click the button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
You can use the arrow
keys to move from one
Stream cell to another, and
press the space bar to
toggle the calculation.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-23
MON2000
JULY 2010 Averages
5.5.2 Averages
Use this function to designate, by streams and
components, averages of standard calculations
MON2000 should perform.
1. Use the Application > Calculations >
Averages menu to access this function.
2. The Averages Calculations dialog appears.
Double-click the desired cell and either type
the new data or use the provided pull-down
menu to select the new setting.
When changing the reset time, note the
following:
Average Setting Used
Hourly Reset Time
24-Hour Day, Reset Time
Weekly Weekday
Monthly Day, Reset Time
5-24 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Averages JULY 2010
To set a custom time interval per
calculation, set the Type to Variable and
enter the desired interval length in the
Hours cell. A setting of “0” means an
average calculation will be performed for
each analysis run of that stream.
Note that this custom Hours setting
overrides the Reset Time setting.
3. Use the provided pull-down menu to add a
new variable to the list.
4. To view an archive of averages for a given
variable, select the desired variable and
click the button or press the F5
key.
The Archive Data dialog for that variable
appears.
Any GC analysis variable with defined
alarm limits cannot be averaged or archived
while in an active alarm state (see
Section 5.6 for more information on Limit
Alarms).
To disable this feature, use the Control
Calculations function to set Avg Limit
Alarm Test to OFF (see Section 5.5.1).
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-25
MON2000
JULY 2010 User Defined
To save this archive to disk, right-click the
archive table and select the Save Sheet
option from the pop-up menu.
5. To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F7 key. This feature also increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from Stream 2 to
Stream 8), per the GC application.
6. To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F8 key. This feature also increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
“Ammonia” to “Benzene”), per the GC
application.
7. To copy the Restart setting from a
highlighted row and apply it to the next
row, click the button or press
the F9 key.
8. Click the button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.5.3 User Defined
Use this function to create and edit customized
calculations on GC analysis data. MON2000
will allow up to 20 user-defined calculations.
1. Use the Application > Calculations > User
Defined menu to access this function.
An error message displays
when the last available stream
or component is reached.
5-26 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
User Defined JULY 2010
2. The User-Defined Calculations dialog
appears.
3. Click the calculation name you wish to edit,
or click in the next available blank Label
cell. The Label field accepts 15 characters.
4. Click the button to edit or
create the calculation function. The Edit
User-Defined Calculation dialog appears.
Your user-defined calculation
becomes a variable that can be
used when:
• calculating averages
• assigning alarm limits
• calculating analog outputs
• generating bargraphs and
reports
• creating other user-defined
calculations
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-27
MON2000
JULY 2010 Limit Alarms
(a) To change the calculation function, click
the appropriate cell and use the pull-
down menu to choose the desired
operator.
To change or add a variable name, use
the Variables pull-down menu.
To select a stream or component, click
the appropriate cell and use the pull-
down menu to choose the desired stream/
component.
Enter any constant values in the Value 1
and Value 2 cells.
(b) Click the button to accept
your changes and return to the User-
Defined Calculation dialog.
Click the button to abort and
return to the User-Defined Calculation
dialog.
5. Click the button to accept your
new or edited calculation and return to the
main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.6 LIMIT ALARMS
Use this function to set threshold limits for GC
analysis data. When a limit is exceeded, an
alarm is activated and logged. See Section 8.3
for information on Alarm Logs.
Note that Modbus Registers assigned to alarms
are application-specific.
The calculation completes
each step from top to
bottom.
5-28 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Limit Alarms JULY 2010
1. Use the Application > Limit Alarms menu
to access this function.
2. The Limit Alarms dialog appears.
3. To change the assigned variable, stream or
component, click the appropriate cell and
use the provided pull-down menu.
Note that you must first select a variable
before entering the related data.
4. To assign the discrete hardware output that
will be set when the alarm is active, click in
the appropriate cell and use the provided
pull-down menu.
Output values range from “1” to “N”, per the
discrete hardware output identification
number and the GC application. A discrete
You can add a new variable
only if an available row is
blank. The number of
allowed limit alarms is fixed
by the GC application.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-29
MON2000
JULY 2010 Limit Alarms
output of “0 - Not used” indicates that no
output is set.
To set discrete outputs, see Section 5.12.
5. To change the alarm type, click the
appropriate cell and use the provided pull-
down menu.
6. Input the desired high/low limits in the
appropriate cells.
7. To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F5 key. This feature increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from “Stream 2” to
“Stream 8”), per the GC application.
Type Purpose
All use all 4 limits (both Low and both High)
High use only High and High-High limits
Low use only Low and Low-Low limits
A discrete output can be used to monitor one or
more inputs.
If you are using discrete outputs to reflect the status
of discrete inputs, ensure that the output
assignments set here coordinate with those set in
the Discrete Alarms dialog (see Section 5.7).
An error message displays
when the last available
stream or component is
reached.
5-30 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Limit Alarms JULY 2010
8. To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F6 key. This feature increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
“Ammonia” to “Benzene”), per the GC
application.
9. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
Limit Alarms Description
• Variable - selected variable assigned to the
limit alarm
• Stream - stream number assigned to the
variable or the channel number if an analog
input or analog output
• Component - component name and number
assigned to the variable
• Discrete Output - number of the discrete
hardware output that will be set when the
alarm is active; zero indicates no discrete
output will be set
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-31
MON2000
JULY 2010 Discrete Alarms
• Type - High uses only the high and the high-
high limits, Low uses only the low and the
low-low limits, and All uses both low and
both high limits
5.7 DISCRETE ALARMS
Use this function to assign discrete hardware
inputs, used to set alarms, to one of the
available discrete hardware outputs.
For more information on discrete outputs, see
Section 5.12.
1. Use the Application > Discrete Alarms menu
to access this function.
Type Purpose
Low-Low If the variable value falls below this
limit, the low-low limit alarm is acti-
vated. This alarm is for extreme situa-
tions
Low If the variable value falls below this
limit, the low limit alarm is activated.
High If the variable value rises above this
limit, the high limit alarm is activated.
High-High If the variable value rises above this
limit, the high-high limit alarm is acti-
vated. This alarm is for extreme situa-
tions.
5-32 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Discrete Alarms JULY 2010
2. The Discrete Alarms dialog appears.
3. Use the provided Discrete Input pull-down
menu to select the identification number of
the discrete hardware input to be used for
alarm purposes.
Input values can range from “1” to “N”, per
the discrete hardware output identification
number and the GC application. A discrete
input of “0 - Not used” indicates that no
input has been assigned.
To configure discrete inputs, see
Section 5.11.
4. Use the provided Discrete Output pull-down
menu to select the identification number of
All alarms from digital
inputs with assignments
other than “0” are recorded
in the Alarm Log.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-33
MON2000
JULY 2010 Delayed Discrete Alarms
the discrete hardware output to be used for
alarm purposes.
Output values can range from “1” to “N”, per
the discrete hardware output identification
number and the GC application. A discrete
output of “0 - Not used” indicates that no
output has been assigned. To configure
discrete outputs, see Section 5.12.
5.7.1 Delayed Discrete Alarms
A delayed discrete alarm can be set to trigger a
discrete alarm and activate the appropriate
discrete output if a previously specified discrete
input has been closed for a user-defined
amount of time.
A discrete output can be used to monitor one or
more inputs.
If you are using discrete outputs to reflect the
status of GC analysis data alarms, ensure that the
output assignments set here coordinate with those
set in the Limit Alarms dialog (see Section 5.6).
5-34 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Delayed Discrete Alarms JULY 2010
For example, if discrete input #1 is closed for 60
seconds, discrete alarm #1 will be activated,
which will in turn activate discrete output #3.
MON2000 will display an active alarm in the
bottom row of the GC column of the GC Status
Bar. MON2000 will also copy the alarm
description in the Alarm Text column to the
appropriate Alarm screens.
The delayed discrete alarm feature is only
available with the following apps installed:
• 700_Mode0_v192 or later;
• 700_DewUS_v184 or later;
• 700_Mode1_v193 or later;
• 2350A_Mode0_v183 or later;
• 2350A_Mode1_v184 or later.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-35
MON2000
JULY 2010 Delayed Discrete Alarms
To set up a discrete alarm, do the following:
1. Select Applications > User Defined >
Selection.... The User-Defined Selections
window displays.
2. Locate the Delyd_alm variable under the
Name column and set its Option to ON and
click OK.
Note that setting the Option to OFF
disables the delayed discrete alarm feature.
3. Select Applications > Discrete Alarms....
The Discrete Alarms window displays.
5-36 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Delayed Discrete Alarms JULY 2010
4. For the appropriate alarm, select the
discrete output that should be activated if
the associated discrete input is closed.
By default, discrete outputs #1, #2, and #3
can be selected.
To make discrete output #4 available for
selection, do the following:
(a) Select Applications > User Defined >
Selection.... The User-Defined Selections
window displays.
(b) Set EnableComAlarm to Disable.
(c) Select Applications > Discrete Outputs....
The Discrete Outputs window displays.
(d) Set the Switch field for discrete output
#4 to Auto.
To make discrete output #5 available for
selection, do the following:
(a) Select Applications > User Defined >
Selection.... The User-Defined Selections
window displays.
(b) Set EnableCalMan to Disable.
(c) Select Applications > Discrete Outputs....
The Discrete Outputs window displays.
(d) Set the Switch field for discrete output
#5 to Auto.
5. Enter the appropriate alarm text in the
Alarm Text column, if desired. This text
will be copied to the appropriate alarm
screens if the discrete alarm is triggered.
6. Click OK to accept your changes.
All discrete inputs should be set to “0 - Not used”.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-37
MON2000
JULY 2010 Delayed Discrete Alarms
7. Select Applications > User Defined >
Numeric.... The User-Defined Numerics
window displays.
8. The following variables apply to the delayed
discrete alarm:
•delay_alm_da: Defines which discrete
alarm will be activated.
•delay_alm_di: Defines which discrete
input will be used to initiate the delayed
discrete alarm.
•delay_time: Defines the time, in
seconds, between the moment the
discrete input is closed and the delayed
discrete alarm is activated. Range is 0 to
500 seconds. Default value is 60
seconds.
Although there are five discrete inputs available, closing
Discrete Input #4 will result in an active Analyzer Failure
alarm that will cause the GC to go to idle if Discrete
Input #4 remains closed up to the end of the current
analysis.
Discrete Input #5 can be used if the run_Aux_Seq option
in the 'User-Defined Selections window is set to OFF.
5-38 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Streams JULY 2010
5.8 STREAMS
This function allows you to:
• assign CDTs and TEVs to a particular
stream
• designate a stream for analysis or
calibration (or none)
• control automatic calibration parameters,
such as the total number of runs, runs to be
averaged, starting times, and time between
automatic calibrations and baseline runs
• define baseline pressure and temperature
conditions that are applicable to calculated
GC analysis data, such as compressibility
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-39
MON2000
JULY 2010 Streams
To use the Streams function,
1. Use the Application > Streams menu to
access this function.
2. The Streams dialog appears.
3. To edit the settings displayed, click the
appropriate cell, use the provided pull-down
menus, or to choose the check boxes to
enable or disable the automatic calibration
and baseline calibration.
See the following tables for details.
5-40 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Streams JULY 2010
The standard settings include:
Table 5-4 Description of Standard Stream Settings
Std Setting Description
<Number> number label assigned by MON2000
This number correlates with the stream
switch. A maximum of 12 streams can be con-
trolled by MON2000 and a standard GC appli-
cation.
Name text string label to identify a stream (12
character maximum)
Use how stream is used
Settings include: calibration (CAL); analysis
(ANL); not used (NOT)
Det detector used by this stream
Control of the detector is application-specific.
For example,
• for Model 700/2350A, Modes 0 and 1, the
Det col is “DET1” and read-only
• for Model 700/2350A, Mode 2, the Det col is
editable
• for Model 700/2350A, Mode 3, the Det col is
“DUAL” and read-only
CD
CD2
CDT associated with this stream (see
Section 5.2)
CDT 2 For the Model 700/2350A Modes 2 and
3, an additional CD column displays.
TE
TE2
TEV associated with this stream (see
Section 5.3)
TEV 2 For the Model 700/2350A Modes 2 and
3, an additional TE column displays.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-41
MON2000
JULY 2010 Streams
For calibration (CAL) streams, you can
edit the following control parameters:
Table 5-5 Description of Calibration Stream Settings
Cal Setting Description
Tot number of runs made for each calibration
Range: 1 to 10
Avg number of last calibration runs to
average
E.g., if 5 calibration runs are performed
and Avg is set to “3”, then the last 3 runs
are used to average the calibration
results.
Start time the first automatic calibration is to
be performed
Int number of hours between automatic
calibrations
5-42 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Streams JULY 2010
You can edit the following parameters for a
defined stream used in GC calculations.
These parameters are also used for post-
analysis calculations that use stream-
specific base pressure and temperature
values. Note that these parameters are not
applicable for every application.
Auto Cal
Auto Base
enable/disable the automatic calibration
and baseline run (first check box sets the
automatic calibration; second check box
sets the baseline run)
If the automatic baseline run is enabled,
the GC performs an additional calibra-
tion run (before the calibration runs to be
averaged) without the calibration gas.
This run evaluates peaks caused by the
GC valve action alone; any peak areas
found are subtracted from the subse-
quent analyses. To view or print the
baseline run results, see Step 4.
Table 5-5 Description of Calibration Stream Settings (Continued)
Cal Setting Description
For the automatic calibration to work,
at least one stream switch (valve
event Strm Sw) must be included in
the corresponding TEV
(see Section 5.3).
Disabling the Auto Base setting will
delete existing CDT baseline data for
the associated stream.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-43
MON2000
JULY 2010 Streams
.
Only the base pressure can be edited. The
base temperature is a constant 6 oF (15 oC)
for all calculations.
4. To view or print the baseline run results,
click the button or press
the F2 key. The Baseline Values dialog
appears.
5. Click the button to return to the
main window.
Table 5-6 Description of GC Calculation Parameters
Par Setting Description
PSIA
BAR
base temperature in PSIA or bar units
deg F
deg C
base temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
or Celsius
Opt Pres 1
Opt Pres 2
Opt Pres 3
If compressibility is activated for a par-
ticular stream (Calculation Control
function, (see Section 5.5.1), up to 3
optional pressures can be defined to
calculate additional post-analysis data.
To change the displayed system
units, see Section 5.1 for details.
If a stream is not used,
you cannot access
baseline data for that
stream.
5-44 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Analog Inputs JULY 2010
5.9 ANALOG INPUTS
This function allows you to:
• assign identifying labels
• assign scale ranges
• calibrate analog inputs for zero and full
scale values
Electrical current signals ranging from 4 to
20mA ( %) are accepted as analog inputs.
To use the Analog Inputs function,
1. Use the Application > Analog Inputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Analog Inputs dialog appears.
To edit the settings displayed, click the
appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
10±
The 2350A GC Controller and
the Model 700 unit supports
up to four AI channels.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-45
MON2000
JULY 2010 Analog Inputs
See the following table for details or refer to
Step 3 for a more automated process.
Table 5-7 Description of Analog Input Settings
Setting Description
Channel channel number assigned
Number of available analog inputs is
dependent upon the GC Controller
model.
Label name used to identify the analog input
(12 characters maximum)
Zero Scale value used as the zero scale when con-
verting the analog input value
Full Scale value used as the full scale when convert-
ing the analog input value
Fixed/Variable analog input operation mode
FXD = fixed
VAR = variable
If the operation mode is fixed, the analog
input is set to the number entered for the
Fixed Value.
Fixed Value analog input value used during fixed
operation
Current Value current readout values of the analog
inputs (values reflect scale assignments)
GC
GRI
PAZ
Gain Ratio Index (GRI) and Preamp Zero
(PAZ) readouts from the GC preampli-
fier’s 4 stages; use as a troubleshooting
aid
Normal preamp stage (gain) operating
ranges for Models 500, 700 and 1000 GC
units are shown in Table 5-8 below.
Zero Scale Calib
Adjustment mA
calibrated analog inputs for known zero
scale electrical current levels
MON2000 accepts a Zero
Scale calibration value that
is higher than the Full Scale
value.
A higher Zero Scale value
can be useful in applications
that require an inverse
display, or record of analog
signal levels.
5-46 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Analog Inputs JULY 2010
3. To perform an automated input calibration,
(a) Select the desired channel by clicking
anywhere in that row.
(b) Set the analog input signal to either its
minimum level or the anticipated Zero
Value.
(c) Set the anticipated Full Value.
(d) Click the button or press
the F3 key.
You can abort this process at any time by
clicking the button.
Full Scale Calib
Adjustment mA
calibrated analog inputs for known full
scale electrical current levels
Table 5-7 Description of Analog Input Settings (Continued)
Setting Description
Table 5-8 Gain Operating Ranges for Models 500, 700 and 1000 GCs
GC GRI PAZ
(12-bit AD)
Value
(12-bit AD)
PAZ
(16-bit AD)
Value
(16-bit AD)
1 0.0 to 0.0 600 to 800 0 to 4095 4800 to 6400 -32767 to 32767
2 0.8 to 1.1 600 to 800 0 to 4095 4800 to 6400 -32767 to 32767
3 0.8 to 1.1 600 to 800 0 to 4095 4800 to 6400 -32767 to 32767
4 0.8 to 1.1 1150 to 1500 0 to 4095 9200 to 12000 -32767 to 32767
This step may require adjusting a rheostat, or
another controlling device, at the source of
the analog input signal.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-47
MON2000
JULY 2010 Analog Inputs
4. The Zero Scale Adjustment dialog appears.
Click the button to continue.
MON2000 accepts a Zero Scale calibration
value that is higher than the Full Scale
value. A higher Zero Scale value can be
useful in the applications that require an
inverse display, or record, of analog signal
levels. 2350A GC Controllers and Model 700
units support up to 4 Analog channels.
5. The Full Scale Adjustment dialog appears.
Adjust the Analog Input to its Full Scale
value.
Click the button to continue.
6. MON2000 verifies that the recorded values
are acceptable. A confirmation dialog
displays.
Click the button to accept your
changes.
Click the button to cancel and return
to the Analog Input dialog.
5-48 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Analog Outputs JULY 2010
7. To perform a GRI (Gain Ratio Index)
calculation, click the button or
press the F4 key.
A GRI calculation confirms the GC
Controller preamp operation. It can be
performed after a preamp calibration has
been completed, or as a trouble shooting
procedure.
8. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
This function allows you to:
• assign variables to Analog Outputs
• assign scale ranges
• calibrate analog outputs for zero and full
scale values
5.10.1 Analog Output Dialog Description
To use the Analog Outputs function,
1. Use the Application > Analog Outputs menu
to access this function.
Ensure that you halt any
ongoing analysis runs
(see Section 4.3) before
performing a GRI
calculation.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-49
MON2000
JULY 2010 Analog Output Dialog Description
2. The Analog Outputs dialog appears.
To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
When assigning analog outputs, first check the
CGM Analog Output Config field in the System
dialog (see Section 5.1).
An analog output assignment that uses the
same analog output number as the CGM
setting will produce erratic CGM trace output,
possibly with incorrect scaling.
5-50 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Analog Output Dialog Description JULY 2010
See the following table for details.
Table 5-9 Description of Analog Output Settings
Setting Description
<Number> number assigned to Analog Output
Number of available analog outputs is
dependent upon the GC Controller model.
Variable type of GC analysis data on which to base
signal level of analog output
Stream stream number assigned to the variable or
the channel number if referencing an
analog output
Component name of component monitored by this
output
Current Value current readout values of the analog output
(values reflect scale assignments)
Zero Scale value used to represent the minimum value
(4mA) when scaling the analog output
value
Full Scale value used to represent the maximum
value (20mA) when scaling the analog
output value
Fixed/Var analog output operation mode
Fixed = fixed
Var = variable
If the operation mode is fixed, the analog
output is set to the number entered for the
Fixed Value.
If the GC unit includes a Daniel Analog
Expansion Module (AEM), P/N 1-0500-
001, reserve analog output number 1
(first row) for the variable Bargraph.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-51
MON2000
JULY 2010 Analog Output Dialog Description
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
Fixed Value analog output value used during fixed
operation
Zero Adjustment value used to correct Zero Scale
Full Adjustment value used to correct Full Scale
Table 5-9 Description of Analog Output Settings (Continued)
Setting Description
When defining a new analog
output, perform a calibration
first to obtain accurate Zero
and Full Adjustment values
(see Section 5.10.4 or
Section 5.10.5).
5-52 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Changing a Variable JULY 2010
5.10.2 Changing a Variable
To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired variable
to select it.
5.10.3 Changing the Bargraph
Use this function to designate which AEM
output analog signals can be used to drive the
bargaph device inputs. Each of the 16 available
AEM output signals can be assigned to
represent various GC analysis data variables.
To edit the variables and corresponding
settings displayed by the bargraph,
1. Click the button or press the
F5 key.
2. The Bargraph dialog appears.
To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus. See Section
5.10.1 for more details.
Multiple streams can be
entered by separating the
stream numbers with
commas (e.g., 2,3).
Bargraph results will be
produced for each stream.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-53
MON2000
JULY 2010 Performing a Manual Calibration
3. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.
4. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the Analog Outputs
dialog.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Analog Outputs dialog.
5.10.4 Performing a Manual Calibration
To manually calibrate an analog output,
1. Select the desired analog output by clicking
anywhere in the corresponding row.
2. Set the Zero Scale and Full Scale values as
desired.
3. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Fixed”.
4. Set Fixed Value equal to the Zero Scale
value.
5. Set Zero Adjustment and Full Adjustment to
“0.0”.
6. Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
7. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog. Wait
until the Current Value of the analog output
is equal to the Zero Scale value (see Step 2).
8. Record the value, in engineering units, read
by the receiving device (e.g., a voltmeter).
9. Set Fixed Value equal to the Full Scale
value (see Step 2).
Setting both adjustment values
to “0.0” disables the scale
adjustment.
See Appendix D for an
alternative calibration method
for analog outputs.
Appendix D includes an
example of calibrating an
output scale of 0 to 1200.
5-54 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Performing an Automated Calibration JULY 2010
10.Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
11.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog. Wait
until the Current Value of the analog output
is equal to the Full Scale value (see Step 2).
12.Record the value, in engineering units, read
by the receiving device (e.g., a voltmeter).
13.Set Zero Adjustment to the value recorded
in Step 8.
14.Set Full Adjustment to the value recorded in
Step 12.
15.Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Var”.
16.Click the button to complete the
calibration and return to the main window.
5.10.5 Performing an Automated Calibration
To perform an automated analog output
calibration,
1. Select the desired analog output by clicking
anywhere in the corresponding row.
2. Click the button or press the
F8 key.
You can abort this process at any time by
clicking the button.
3. The Zero Scale Adjustment dialog appears.
Input the appropriate value and click the
button.
To determine the
uncalibrated Zero Scale and
Full Scale analog output
levels, see Section 5.10.1.
To prevent scale adjustment,
set both adjustment values to
zero (0.0).
See Appendix D for additional
instructions on calibrating
analog outputs. Appendix D also
includes a calibration example
for an output scale of 0 to
1200.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-55
MON2000
JULY 2010 Performing an Automated Calibration
4. The Full Scale Adjustment dialog appears.
Input the appropriate value and click the
button.
5. If the values entered are within tolerance,
data in the zero and full adjustment
columns is updated. Otherwise, MON2000
displays an error message.
5-56 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Discrete Inputs JULY 2010
5.11 DISCRETE INPUTS
Use this function to assign labels to the GC
discrete inputs and control their operational
modes. The number of discrete inputs available
depends on the GC application.
1. Use the Application > Discrete Inputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Discrete Inputs dialog appears.
To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
See the following table for details.
Table 5-10 Description of Discrete Input Settings
Setting Description
Channel channel number assigned
Label name used to identify the discrete input
(12 characters maximum)
Switch sets operational mode for this discrete
input
Auto = value is determined by application
Off = value is set to OFF
On = value is set to ON
Current Value current state of the discrete input
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-57
MON2000
JULY 2010 Discrete Outputs
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.12 DISCRETE OUTPUTS
Use this function to assign labels to the GC
discrete outputs and control their operational
modes. The number of discrete outputs
available depends on the GC application.
1. Use the Application > Discrete Outputs
menu to access this function.
2. The Discrete Outputs dialog appears.
To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
Signals routed to discrete
outputs are assigned via the
Limit Alarm and Discrete
Alarm functions (see
Section 5.6 and Section
5.7).
5-58 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Valves JULY 2010
See the following table for details.
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.13 VALVES
This function allows you to:
• assign identifying labels
• monitor valve operation
• control the operation modes
The number of discrete outputs available
depends on the GC application.
To use the Valve function,
1. Use the Application > Valves menu to access
this function.
Table 5-11 Description of Discrete Output Settings
Setting Description
Channel channel number assigned
Label name used to identify the discrete output (12 characters maximum)
Switch sets operational mode for this discrete output
Auto = value is determined by application
Off = value is set to OFF
On = value is set to ON
Current Value current state of the discrete output
On Time
Off Time
time the digital output will be turned ON/OFF (MON2000 clock
based on user PC system clock)
If the ON/OFF times are the same, the timing feature has no effect.
2350A GC Controllers support
up to 12 Stream valves and 5
Analyzer valves, for a total of
17 valves.
Model 700 controllers support
up to Analytical Valves (AV-1 to
AV-5 and S-1 to S-8 Stream
valves
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-59
MON2000
JULY 2010 Valves
2. The Valves dialog appears, per GC type.
To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
Valves dialog for Model 700 GC Valves dialog for 2350A GCs
5-60 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Valves JULY 2010
See the following table for details.
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
Table 5-12 Description of Valve Settings
Setting Description
Channel channel number assigned
Label name used to identify the valve (12 characters maximum)
Switch sets operational mode for this valve
Auto = valve operation is determined by the GC application
Off = valve is set to OFF
On = valve is set to ON
Usage
(Model 700 and
Model 500 GCs with
2350A Controllers)
sets which digital output from the Timed Events function
(see Section 5.3) is assigned to this valve
Each Usage option is created per the following example:
1-AV1 - where the digit “1” is taken from the valve number set by the
Valve/DO# option (see Timed Events, see Section 5.3), and the name
“AV1” is taken from Label set in this Valve dialog.
Current Value current state of the valve
By default, the 2350A GC stream valves are shown first and are
labeled S1 - S12 followed by the analytical valves (AV1 - AV5). Model
700 GCs analytical valves are shown first and are labeled AV1 - AV5
followed by the stream valves (S1 - S8).
The same Usage assignment cannot be used for multiple valves,
unless these valves are set to “Unused”.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-61
MON2000
JULY 2010 Temperature Control
5.14 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Use the Temperature Control function for
monitoring the Temperature of the Oven
(Detector/s and Columns) and the Stream
Switching block to determine when the
Model 700 is thermally stable. The bottom row
labeled Temperature (C) displays the current
temperatures.
The settings and values are shown in the
following figure and table. The settings and
values are preset at the factory and are based
on the specific customer application. These
values should not be changed unless
recommended by Daniel Customer Service
Personnel, or it is a factory application
requirement.
1. Use the Application>Temperature Control
menu to access this function.
2. The Temperature Control dialog displays.
5-62 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
FID Configuration JULY 2010
3. Use the pull down menu to select the
appropriate mode setting (e.g. AUTOMATIC,
MANUAL, or OUT OF SERVICE). Ensure that
the temperature is constant for the Oven
(i.e. Multivalve System block and column
module kit) and the SSS.
4. Click the OK button to apply the changes or
click the Cancel button to discard your
changes and return to the MON2000 Main
window.
5.15 FID CONFIGURATION
Use this function to view the status
information about the Model 700 Gas Chro-
matograph’s Preamplifier Assembly, as well as
to modify certain FID parameters.
To access the FID Configuration window,
MON2000 must be connected to a GC that has
its serial port #4 configured to use ‘ADC700’.
Column Function Factory Default Setting
Column 1 Detector/s or Block Temperature 80o C (176.0o F)
Column 2 Column Temperature 80o C (176.0o F)
Column 3 Sample Stream Block Temperature 40o C (104.0o F)
Column 4 (Spare) Future Use
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-63
MON2000
JULY 2010 FID Configuration
1. Use the Application > FID Configuration
menu to access this function. The FID
Configuration window appears.
Information concerning the current status
of the FID Preamplifier Assembly displays
in the upper left corner.
2. To modify FID parameters, do the following:
(a) Halt the analysis.
5-64 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
FID Configuration JULY 2010
(b) Click Modify. The blue background of
the parameter fields will turn white,
indicating that they are now modifiable.
The parameters that you can configure
are:
• FID ignition - Select Manual if you wish
to control the ignition of the FID
(default); select Auto to let the GC
control the ignition of the FID.
• Number of ignition attempts - Indicates
the number of times the GC will try to
light the flame. If an 'Auto' FID ignition
sequence fails to light the flame after the
specified number of attempts, the GC
will close the hydrogen valve, switch the
FID ignition parameter to Manual, and
set an active alarm.
• Wait time between tries.
• Igniter on duration.
• Flame On sense temperature.
• Flame Out sense temperature.
• Electrometer gain - Your choices are
High and Low (default).
(c) Click Save to accept the changes or
Cancel to reject them.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-65
MON2000
JULY 2010 FID Configuration
3. If Flame status is OFF, due to a power
failure or maintenance, for example, you
can restart the flame by doing the following:
(a) Click H2 Open. The H2 valve status
parameter displayed in the FID PreAmp
Status table changes to OPEN.
(b) Click Light flame. The Flame status
parameter displayed in the FID PreAmp
Status table will change to ON when the
FID internal temperature exceeds the
value set in the Flame On sense
temperature field.
If FID ignition is set to Auto, the GC will
automatically restart the flame if it goes
out.
4. To enable or disable digital filtering, do the
following:
(a) Right-click on the FID Configuration
window. The FID Advanced
Configuration window appears.
5-66 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
LOI Status Variables JULY 2010
(b) Click Modify to make the appropriate
selection from the Digital filtering drop-
down list.
(c) Click Save to accept the change, or
Cancel to reject the change.
(d) Click Close to leave the FID Advanced
Configuration window.
5. To reset the FID counts parameter, click
Autozero FID.
5.16 LOI STATUS VARIABLES
Use this function to select and configure up to
25 GC parameters that you would like to
monitor using the LOI’s Display mode (refer to
the Model 700 Gas Chromatograph System
Reference Manual for more information about
this mode).
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-67
MON2000
JULY 2010 LOI Status Variables
1. Use the Application > LOI Status Variables
menu to access this function. The LOI
Status Variables window appears.
2. If Include Mole Percents for current stream
is checked, which is the default, the
maximum number of variable you can select
is five; if Include Mole Percents for current
stream is not checked, you can choose up to
25 variables.
3. To select a new variable, click on the
appropriate drop-down list under the
Variable column.
4. Select a stream from the drop-down list in
the Stream column. If you want to use the
current stream, select ‘0’ in this column.
To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F7 key. This feature also increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from Stream 2 to
Stream 8), per the GC application.
5. Select a component from the drop-down list
in the Component column. If you do not
want to use a component, select ‘0’ in this
column.
To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
5-68 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Serial Ports JULY 2010
the F8 key. This feature also increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
“Ammonia” to “Benzene”), per the GC
application.
6. Enter a value in the Precision column that
indicates the number of decimal places to
display for this particular variable. For
component concentrations, the range of
possible Precision values is between 2 and
6. For all other variables, the range of
possible values is between 0 and 6.
5.17 SERIAL PORTS
Use this function to configure and manipulate
the serial port communication parameters the
GC Controller uses to connect with MON2000.
1. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access this function.
2. The Serial Ports dialog appears.
The Mode column applies only to the following
CPU boards:
• 2350A CPU board (P/N 2-3-2350-190)
• Model 700 CPU board (P/N 2-3-0700-036)
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-69
MON2000
JULY 2010 Serial Ports
To edit the settings displayed, double-click
the appropriate cell or click and use the
provided pull-down menus.
See the following table and individual
sections for details.
For proper communications, these parameters,
which are continuously downloaded to the GC,
must be identical to the parameters set in the
MON2000 GC Directory.
Table 5-13 Description of Serial Port Settings
Setting Description
Port Serial port number for GC Controller.
The Model 700 and Model 500 with 2350A Controller (with the PC/104 COM 4A
board installed) the controller supports 8 ports (9 ports with the modem).
With the Multifunction board installed, COM3 is the assigned port.
Usage Defines port usage – such as a slave config-uration (i.e.,User_Modbus,
SIM_2251), PC communication port, a Report, or Serial Port – as well as the
general type of serial communications protocol.
To accommodate installations that use Modbus registers and the SIM_2251
protocol along with a data acquisition system, MON2000 enables you to arrange
data values for a more effective polling.
Note that the contents of all SIM_2251 Modbus registers are predefined, and
the values for component variables are predetermined. However, a cross-index
to these predefined assignments can be developed.
With the Multifunction board installed, COM3 is the assigned port.
5-70 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Serial Ports JULY 2010
Baud Rate Baud rate setting.
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400.
For high performing PCs, set the baud rate to 19200. If you experience a com-
munications failure at this rate, set the baud rate to 9600. Baud rate settings
less than 9600 may result in real-time delivery that is unacceptably slow.
Data Bits Number of data bits.
Range: 7, 8.
Default: 8.
Stop Bits Number of stop bits.
Range: 1, 2.
Default: 1.
Parity Parity check method.
Range: None, Even, Odd.
Default: None.
Handshake Handshaking method.
Range: None, RTS-CTS, XON-XOFF.
Default: None.
RTS On Delay in milliseconds between RTS activation and the start of data transmis-
sion .
NOTE: If used, it may be necessary to set an extra delay in the GC Directory,
accessed via the File>GC Directory menu.
Range: 0 to 5000.
RTS Off Delay in milliseconds between RTS termination and the end of data transmis-
sion.
Range: 0 to 5000.
Protocol Transmission protocol.
Range: ASCII, RTU
Default: ASCII
Table 5-13 Description of Serial Port Settings (Continued)
Setting Description
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-71
MON2000
JULY 2010 Serial Ports Configuration
Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
5.17.1 Serial Ports Configuration
Each GC Controller port number is listed in the
Port column of the Serial Ports dialog. The
number of available ports is hardware-specific.
Com ID Modbus slave address.
To use the address defined by the GC Controller DIP switches, set to 0.
Read/Write Read/write setting
Range: R (Read only), W (Write only), RW (Read and write).
This parameter only functions with slave ports.
Mode Only applies to 2350A CPU board (P/N 2-3-2350-190) or Model 700 CPU board
(P/N 2-3-0700-036).
Sets the communication protocol directly, instead of through jumper settings.
Range: RS232, RS422, RS485.
Table 5-13 Description of Serial Port Settings (Continued)
Setting Description
5-72 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Serial Ports Configuration JULY 2010
These ports can be configured with the Usage
settings to accommodate any one of the
following end-connection devices:
• PC – direct serial line connection to the PC,
a serial line connection to an external or
internal modem or an ethernet connection
• Report – direct serial line connection to a
printer
• User_Modbus or SIM_2251 – connection to
a Data Collection System (DCS) or a multi-
drop serial data highway network
Specific configurations of these ports may also
include settings for serial interface protocols
(i.e., RS-232, RS-485, or RS-422).
These protocols can either be set from the
Serial Ports window, or they can be configured
through jumper settings that are located on the
The optional internal modem installed on a Model 700
or Model 500 uses COM9 only, except when a
keyboard and display are installed. The optional internal
modem would then use COM8 onl
y
.
For proper communications, these parameters, which
are continuously downloaded to the GC, must be
identical to the parameters set in the MON2000 GC
Directory.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-73
MON2000
JULY 2010 Serial Ports Configuration
CPU board. See the appropriate GC hardware
manual for instructions and drawings.
The serial interface protocol RS-232 will service
most end-connection devices (i.e., PC and
Report). DCS connections use either RS-485 or
RS-422 protocols although, in some cases, the
RS-232 protocol can be used.
To access this function,
1. From the Application>Serial Ports menu,
select the Usage column and use the pull-
down menu to select the appropriate
configuration.
Communications between the GC and a DCS or multi-drop
serial data highway can be established with Modbus
protocol. For this, the Usage setting should be either
User_Modbus or SIM_2251.
In any Modbus host-slave configuration, there must be
one Host to which any one of the GCs can respond as a
Slave. Thus, the controller could be connected to a
maximum of 4 different serial data networks.
5-74 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations JULY 2010
5.18 GC SERIAL PORT AND CABLE
CONFIGURATIONS
This section provides more detailed
information about the serial port connections of
the 2350A GC Controller. It identifies serial
port pin assignments and diagrams for
designing RS-232 serial cables necessary for
your application.
GC serial ports are found on the GC Controller
Terminal Board for field wiring, and the
connection points for external devices are as
follows:
External modem connections can be made to
any of the four serial ports. However, a possible
exception exists for Serial Port 4: the internal
modem for the Model 500 with the 2350A
Controller, if installed, uses Serial Port 4.
Table 5-14 Serial Ports on GC Terminal Board
Port DB-9 Plug Phoenix Plug
1 (COM1) P2 J5
2 (COM2) P3 J6
3 (COM3) n/a J10
4 (COM4) n/a J11
The Mode column applies only to the following
CPU boards:
• 2350A CPU board (P/N 2-3-2350-190)
• Model 700 CPU board (P/N 2-3-0700-036)
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-75
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Serial Port and Cable Configurations
Phoenix plug (bare-wire) connections are
available to all four serial ports. Pin-outs are
identical for all four serial port Phoenix plugs
and jacks. Each Phoenix plug / jack (male)
combination allows bare-wire connection and
uses 9 pins as illustrated:
Figure 5-1 Phoenix Connector Pinout for J5, J6, J10, J11
DB-9 plug connections available for serial ports
1 and 2 only. Two of the serial ports, as noted in
Table 5-14, permit connection to an external
modem via a DB-9 plug.
5-76 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
GC DB-9 Serial to External Modem DB-25 JULY 2010
Both of the GC Controller DB-9 jacks are
female and have identical pin assignments.
Figure 5-2 DB-9 Connector and Pinout, P2 and P3
5.18.1 GC DB-9 Serial to External Modem DB-25
To make an RS-232 serial connection between
one of the DB-9 serial ports of the GC, and an
external modem with DB-25 serial port, you
will need to manufacture a cable. The cable will
need DB-9, male, and DB-25, male, plug cable
ends as illustrated in Figure 5-3.
The DB-9 jack on the GC serial port is wired to
appear like a Data Communications
Equipment (DCE). Therefore, you use a custom
A DB-9 male pin numbering
scheme is also illustrated,
but for reference purposes
only.
GC serial ports were wired to appear as DCE so that a
straight-through serial cable could be used, instead of a
null-modem cable, for direct serial connection between
the GC Controller and the PC, which is Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE).
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-77
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB-25
“null-modem” type cable, as shown below, to
make the connection between the GC and an
external modem.
Figure 5-3 GC DB-9 Port to External Modem DB-25 Port
5.18.2 GC Phoenix Plug to External Modem DB-25
To make an RS-232 serial connection between
one of the Phoenix Plug serial ports of the GC,
and an external modem with DB-25 serial port,
you will need to manufacture the cable and its
DB-25, male plug cable end as illustrated in
Figure 5-4.
5-78 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Com ID JULY 2010
Figure 5-4 Phoenix Plug Port to External Modem DB-25 Port
5.18.3 Com ID
The GC Controller Com ID is usually preset at
the factory and defined by the DIP switch
settings on the controller system interface
board. Five switches are reserved for defining
the Com ID; therefore, Com ID values range
from 1 to 31.
Normally it is not necessary to change the Com
ID value to anything other than 0. Setting the
Com ID to zero allows the MON2000 software
to automatically recognize the Com ID defined
by the controller DIP switches. When
connected, MON2000 displays the controller
DIP setting as the Com ID in the main window
titlebar. See Table 5-15 for more information.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-79
MON2000
JULY 2010 Com ID
1. User_Modbus and SIM_2251 are slave port
protocols (the GC Controller can operate only as a
slave).
2. User_Modbus, a PLC emulation Modbus protocol,
can use scaling to convert floating point numbers to
integers.
3. SIM_2251 emulates Daniel 2500 communication
protocol and is a simulation of the 2251 GC
Controller.
4. See Appendix I for instructions on how to connect
a modem to the GC Controller.
Table 5-15 Description of Com ID Settings
Connection Usage Read/Write Protocol
PC or modem
(direct serial connection)
PC
User_Modbus
SIM_2251
R
RW
ASCII
RTU
DCS User_Modbus
SIM_2251
R
RW
ASCII
RTU
Printer
(direct serial connection)
Report W ASCII
5-80 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Registers JULY 2010
5.18.4 Registers
To accommodate installations that use Modbus
registers and the User_Modbus protocol,
MON2000 enables you to assign GC analysis
variables to registers.
See Appendix F for more information regarding
GC Modbus registers.
For a list of variable assignments made to all
registers, print the communication section of
the PC Config Report.
To assign GC analysis variables and scale
ranges,
1. Use the Application>Serial Ports menu to
access this function.
2. The Serial Ports dialog displays.
This function is not required for normal GC operation.
Only use this function if you are designing a special
installation to directly access the GC Controller Modbus
registers.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-81
MON2000
JULY 2010 Registers
3. From the Serial Ports dialog, click the
button or press the F3 key.
4. The Registers dialog appears.
5. View or edit data. Double-click a given table
cell or use one of the edit function buttons,
described below, to make your changes.
Note that the Reg column displays the
number for the GC Controller Modbus
register that will be polled by a connected
data acquisition system.
6. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.
From the Variables menu, you can assign
the results of optional base pressure(s) to
the Modbus register. See Section 5.18.5.
For each default 0 FloatPt scale assigned, reserve 2
Modbus registers for a given variable.
Scale assignments other than 0 FloatPT require
only one register per variable.
5-82 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Registers JULY 2010
7. To change the stream assignment, click the
appropriate cell. Use the provided pull-
down menu and click the desired stream to
select it.
To copy the stream settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F7 key. This feature also increments the
Stream value to the next available stream
(e.g., incrementing from Stream 2 to Stream
8), per the GC application. An error
message displays when the last available
stream is reached.
8. To change the component assignment, click
the appropriate cell. Use the provided pull-
down menu and click the desired option to
select it.
To copy the component settings from a
highlighted row and apply them to the next
row, click the button or press
the F8 key.
This feature also increments the
Component value to the next available
component (e.g., incrementing from
Ammonia to Benzene), per the GC
application. An error message displays
when the last available component is
reached.
9. To select a scale and range,
(a) Select the scale/range to be replaced.
By assigning a scale range, a floating
point value can be converted to an
integer value per the user-defined scale
assignment.
Assigning a scale and
corresponding range is an
optional step.
The default scale assignment
is 0 FloatPt, which means
the value is not converted to
integer and is stored in two
(2) adjacent Modbus
registers.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-83
MON2000
JULY 2010 Registers
(b) Click the button or press
the F5 key. A menu list of all available
scales and ranges appears.
(c) Double-click the desired new scale and
corresponding range.
Note that any of the available 33 scales
can be redefined via the Edit Scales
function (see Step 10).
10.To redefine a scale or create a custom scale,
(a) Click the button or press
the F2 key.
(b) The Edit Scales dialog appears.
All 33 scaling options will display.
5-84 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Registers JULY 2010
(c) Input the new Zero Scale or Full Scale
values as appropriate.
(d) Click the button to accept
your changes and return to the Registers
dialog.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Registers dialog.
To convert floating point data to a whole integer,
each scale definition follows this algorithm:
where
RF = range, Full Scale =4095
Rz = range, Zero Scale =0
SF = scale, Full =100
Sz = scale, Zero =0
Dfp = data, floating pt =97.13
(% from Methane)
integer RFRZ
–
SFSZ
–
-------------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
=Dfp 3977=
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-85
MON2000
JULY 2010 Registers
11.To check for conflicting Modbus register
assignments,
(a) Click the button or press the
F6 key.
(b) MON2000 displays the first encountered
error.
For this example, you would change the
register number for Row 2. You would
then verify all subsequent register
numbers as well.
(c) Click the button to accept
your changes and return to the Serial
Ports dialog. MON2000 automatically
checks for conflicting Modbus register
assignments.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Serial Ports dialog.
5-86 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Setting Optional Base Pressures JULY 2010
5.18.5 Setting Optional Base Pressures
As discussed in Section 5.18.4, you can assign
GC analysis variables to various Modbus
registers. Follow the procedure below to add
the “Optional Base Pressure” variable to the
Registers List.
Up to three (3) optional base pressures can be
used for GC analysis calculations. These
optional base pressure values are entered via
the Streams function (see Section 5.8).
• “Results - Opt. Base Press” – A group of 12
GC analysis calculations can be used to
reflect the use of different base pressures.
See Section C.3 for more information.
To assign the “Optional Base Pressure”
variable,
1. Verify the values for optional base pressures
that have already been entered.
(a) Use the Application > Streams menu to
access this function.
(b) The Streams dialog box displays.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-87
MON2000
JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Pressures
(c) Scroll to the Opt Press columns and note
these values along with the
corresponding optional pressure and
stream number(s).
(d) If you wish to enter different pressure
values, do so now and then click the
button to accept your
changes.
Otherwise, click the button to
return to the main window.
2. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access the Register function.
5-88 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Setting Optional Base Pressures JULY 2010
3. From the Serial Ports dialog, click the
button or press the F3 key.
The Registers dialog appears.
4. From the Registers dialog, use the Variable
pull-down menu to select the Optional Base
Pressures option.
5. Use the corresponding component pull-
down menu to select the desired optional
base pressure option.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-89
MON2000
JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Pressures
6. To assign a scale, ensure that the correct
row is selected and click the
button or press the F5 key. Double-click the
desired scale option to apply.
For instructions on creating or editing a
scale, see Section 5.18.4.
7. The “Optional Base Pressure” variable
should be listed with the settings specified.
8. Click the button to accept your
changes.
5-90 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Setting Optional Base Results JULY 2010
5.18.6 Setting Optional Base Results
As discussed in Section 5.18.4, you can assign
GC analysis variables to various Modbus
registers. Follow the procedure below to add
the “Results - Opt. Base Press” variable to the
Registers List.
A group of 12 GC analysis calculations can be
used to reflect the use of different base
pressures. See Section C.3 for more
information.
To assign the “Results - Opt. Base Press”
variable,
1. Verify the values for optional base pressures
that have already been entered.
(a) Use the Application > Streams menu to
access this function.
(b) The Streams dialog displays.
(c) Scroll to the Opt Press columns and note
these values along with the
corresponding optional pressure and
stream number(s).
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-91
MON2000
JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Results
(d) If you wish to enter different pressure
values, do so now and then click the
button to accept your
changes.
Otherwise, click the button to
return to the main window.
2. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access this function.
3. From the Serial Ports dialog, click the
button or press the F3 key.
The Registers dialog appears.
5-92 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
Setting Optional Base Results JULY 2010
4. From the Registers dialog, use the Variable
pull-down menu to select the Results - Opt.
Base Press option.
5. Use the corresponding component pull-
down menu to select the desired optional
base pressure option.
See Table 5-16 to determine which number
you should enter.
6. To assign a scale, ensure that the correct
row is selected and click the
button or press the F5 key. Double-click the
desired scale option to apply.
For instructions on creating or editing a
scale, see Section 5.18.4.
7. The “Results - Opt. Base Press” variable
should be listed with the settings specified.
8. Click the button to accept your
changes.
Metric GC analysis
variables are available only
if the Metric Base
Conditions option has been
enabled (see Section 5.1).
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-93
MON2000
JULY 2010 Setting Optional Base Results
.
Table 5-16 GC Analysis Variable Number per Optional Pressure
GC Analysis Variable Optional Pressure
U.S. Metric 123
Gross Heating Value or
Btu (Dry)
Heating Value,
Superior, MJ/m3 (Dry)
11325
Gross Heating Value or
Btu (Sat.)
Heating Value,
Superior, MJ/m3 (Sat.)
21426
Gross Heating Value or
Btu (Act.)
Heating Value,
Superior, MJ/m3 (Act.)
31527
Net Btu (Dry) Heating Value, Inferior,
MJ/m3 (Dry)
41628
Net Btu (Sat.) Heating Value, Inferior,
MJ/m3 (Sat.)
51729
Net Btu (Act.) Heating Value, Inferior,
MJ/m3 (Act.)
61830
Real Relative Density
Gas
Heating Value,
Superior, kcal/m3 (Dry)
71931
Gallons/1000 SCF C2 + Heating Value,
Superior, kcal/m3 (Sat.)
82032
Gallons/1000 SCF C3 + Heating Value,
Superior, kcal/m3 (Act.)
92133
Gallons/1000 SCF C4 + Heating Value, Inferior,
kcal/m3 (Dry)
10 22 34
Gallons/1000 SCF C5 + Heating Value, Inferior,
kcal/m3 (Sat.)
11 23 35
Gallons/1000 SCF C6 + Heating Value, Inferior,
kcal/m3 (Act.)
12 24 36
5-94 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu JULY 2010
5.19 TCP/IP, SUBNET, AND GATEWAY MENU
Use this function to configure the TCP/IP,
Subnet, and Gateway communication
parameters for the 2350A GC Controller.
1. Use the Application > TCP/IP menu to
access this function.
2. The TCP/IP dialog displays.
See Appendix F for detailed instructions for
the Ethernet card installation, TCP/IP,
Subnet, and Gateway settings.
Table 5-16 GC Analysis Variable Number per Optional Pressure (Continued)
GC Analysis Variable Optional Pressure
U.S. Metric 123
Use the above index numbers to assign “Results - Opt. Base Press” to
User_Modbus registers.
APPLICATION FUNCTIONS 5-95
MON2000
JULY 2010 TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu
This page is intentionally left blank.
5-96 APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
MON2000
TCP/IP, Subnet, and Gateway Menu JULY 2010
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Chromatogram Viewer Function
6
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
Use the Chromatogram Viewer to display and
print live, archived, or saved chromatograms
(from a .cgm file on disk). The 2350A GC
Controller saves the most recent
chromatograms for each stream running in the
Stream Sequence, as well as the chromatogram
from the most recent calibration run for each
CDT. See the following sections for further
instructions.
6.1 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER FUNCTION
To access the Chromatogram Viewer,
1. Connect to the GC.
2. Use the Chromatogram > Chromatogram
Viewer menu to access this function.
3. The Chromatogram Viewer dialog appears.
6-2 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Viewing a Live Chromatogram JULY 2010
4. Click the button to exit this dialog.
Any display changes or open data will be
lost. See Section 6.4 to save a chromatogram
to disk.
6.2 VIEWING A LIVE CHROMATOGRAM
6.2.1 From Online GC
To view a live chromatogram trace from the
online GC,
1. Check the View current CGM option.
If a chromatogram contains data for more
than one detector, a Select Detector menu
dialog displays. Double-click either
“Detector 1”, “Detector 2”, or “Both”.
2. MON2000 plots the current, live
chromatogram.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legends.
Use the Graph and Chromatogram
functions to manipulate the display. To
zoom in on a particular point, click and drag
your mouse over that area; repeat as
necessary. Use the Restore State or Zoom
Out options from the right-click menu (see
Section 6.9) to return to the original display.
You can display up to 8 chromatograms at
one time. Each chromatogram is color-
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 From GC Archive
coded; use the Chromatogram pull-down
menu to select a specific chromatogram.
6.2.2 From GC Archive
To view the most recent chromatogram trace
from the online GC archive,
1. Click the button. The Available
Chromatograms dialog appears.
2. Double-click the desired entry.
If a chromatogram contains data for more
than one detector, a Select Detector menu
dialog displays. Double-click either
“Detector 1”, “Detector 2”, or “Both”.
3. MON2000 plots the archived
chromatogram.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legends.
Use the Graph and Chromatogram
functions to manipulate the display. To
6-4 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
From File on Disk JULY 2010
zoom in on a particular point, click and drag
your mouse over that area; repeat as
necessary. Use the Restore State or Zoom
Out options from the right-click menu (see
Section 6.9) to return to the original display.
You can display up to 8 chromatograms at
one time. Each chromatogram is color-
coded; use the Chromatogram pull-down
menu to select a specific chromatogram.
6.2.3 From File on Disk
To view a chromatogram trace from a file
previously saved to disk,
1. Click the button. The Open
Chromatogram File dialog appears.
2. Use the provided directory tree to locate the
desired CGM file or CGM Comparison file
and click the button to open.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 From File on Disk
3. The Chromatogram window displays.
If a chromatogram contains data for more
than one detector, a Select Detector menu
dialog displays. Double-click either
“Detector 1”, “Detector 2”, or “Both”.
6-6 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
From File on Disk JULY 2010
4. MON2000 displays the chromatogram file.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legends.
Use the Graph and Chromatogram
functions to manipulate the display. To
zoom in on a particular point, click and drag
your mouse over that area; repeat as
necessary. Use the Save State, Restore
State, or Zoom In or Out options from the
right-click menu (see Section 6.9) to return
to the original display for both Live and
Archived CGM views. Press the keyboard
HOME key to force the CMG view to the
default state. Also, pressing the keyboard
HOME key sets the CGM view to the default
state if the current application analysis
time is different from the previous
application analysis time.
The Save State function is
available when viewing a
live or archived CGM.
The MON2000 software looks
for and finds the application’s
analysis time. Pressing the
”Home” key returns the user
to the default CGM state.
Right Click Menu
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 From File on Disk
You can display up to 8 chromatograms at
one time. Each chromatogram is color-
coded; use the Chromatogram pull-down
menu to select a specific chromatogram
5. Click the button to save the
selected comparison file to disk.
The Save Chromatogram Comparison File
dialog appears.
6. Enter the file name to be saved and click the
button to save the file to disk.
Or,
Click the button to exit this
dialog.
6-8 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Removing a Chromatogram from View JULY 2010
6.3 REMOVING A CHROMATOGRAM FROM VIEW
To remove a chromatogram trace from the
Viewer display (and close the cgm file, if
reading from disk),
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. MON2000
removes the chromatogram from view and,
if applicable, closes the .cgm file.
6.4 SAVING A CHROMATOGRAM TO DISK
To save a currently displayed chromatogram to
disk,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button.
This function will save a
live chromatogram at the
current point, thus
overwriting the “last.cgm”
file.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Graph Functions
MON2000 displays the Save Chromatogram
File window.
Use the provided directory tree to select the
desired file location and name, then click
the button.
3. MON2000 saves the specified
chromatogram along with its corresponding
graph settings.
6.5 GRAPH FUNCTIONS
Use the Graph buttons to access any of the
following graph-related functions.
6.5.1 Editing the Chromatogram Graph
Use the Edit Graph function to change the span
and interval for the x/y axis, as well as other
display parameters.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
6-10 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Changing Cursor Size JULY 2010
2. Click the button. The Edit Graph
dialog appears.
3. Use the provided attributes and options to
change the chromatogram display and
printer speed as desired.
4. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the Chromatogram
Viewer dialog.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog.
5. The chromatogram display changes as
specified.
Additional display options are available by
right-clicking the display area. See Section
6.9 for more information.
6.5.2 Changing Cursor Size
To toggle the cursor size from coarse movement
(less accurate) to fine movement (more
accurate), click the button.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Printing the Chromatogram
6.5.3 Printing the Chromatogram
To print a currently displayed area of the
chromatogram,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button.
6.6 CHROMATOGRAM FUNCTIONS
Use the Chromatogram buttons to access any of
the following chromatogram-related functions.
• Edit - edit the Chromatogram
• Results - view the CGM calculation results
• Desc - save a description of the CGM
• Save - save the displayed chromatogram to
disk
• Remove - removes a chromatogram from
view
• Forced Cal - perform a forced calibration
• Cur/All - toggle the TEV and CGM
Component spreadsheet display
• Save CMP - save multiple CGMs
To save the displayed
chromatogram to disk,
see Section 6.4.
To remove a
chromatogram from
view, see Section 6.3.
To toggle the TEV and
CGM Component
spreadsheet display,
see Section 6.6.8.
6-12 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Editing the Chromatogram JULY 2010
6.6.1 Editing the Chromatogram
Use the Edit Chromatogram function to change
the x/y offset values and other display
parameters such as color.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. The Edit
Chromatogram dialog appears.
3. Use the X Offset and Y Offset values to
change the chromatogram display as
desired.
4. Use the Color pull-down menu to assign a
different color to this chromatogram.
5. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the Chromatogram
Viewer dialog.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Chromatogram Viewer dialog.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer
6.6.2 Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer
To edit the Timed Events Table (TEV) from the
Chromatogram Viewer window,
1. Double-click the left mouse button, while
hovering over the TEV legend, to edit the
timed events from the CGM viewer (see the
following figures).
Or,
Right-click and use the drop-down menu to
modify, add, insert, and delete TEV’s via the
normal editing procedures.
In the edit mode, initial focus is
applied to the currently selected
event in the table, or to the
event with the closest time.
If more than one CGM is
displayed, only the selected
CGM timed events will be
available to edit.
6-14 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Editing TEVs from CGM Viewer JULY 2010
MON2000 displays the Timed Events Table
dialog.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer
2. Click the button to save your
changes, or press the F8 key.
3. Press the ESC key to discard changes.
6.6.3 Editing Retention Times from CGM Viewer
To edit component retention from the
Chromatogram Viewer window,
1. Double-click the left mouse button to edit
the retention times from the CGM viewer
Or,
Right-click and use the drop-down menu to
modify retention times via the normal
editing procedures.
6.6.4 Editing TEVs from Cursor
To update Timed Events from the
Chromatogram Viewer using the cursor,
1. Right-click the mouse button, with the
mouse pointer hovered over the Event Time
legend.
From the pull-down menu, select Update
Time from Cursor.
Save changes and discard
changes options are
available from the right-
click menu.
You must access the
Component Data Table to
add, insert, and delete
retention times. Use the
Application> Component
Data menu or press the F6
key.
6-16 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Viewing the Chromatogram Results JULY 2010
Or,
Press the F9 key. MON2000 displays the
message, “Reading GC Data” in the status
bar, then actives the TEV Table.
2. Click the button to save your
changes, or press the F8 key.
Press the ESC key to discard changes.
6.6.5 Viewing the Chromatogram Results
To read a table of calculation results for a
selected chromatogram,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. A dialog appears
asking if the results should be displayed
using the calculation control flags.
3. Click the button to display the
report using the calculations selected in the
Application>Control menu.
Save changes and discard
changes options are
available from the right-
click menu.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Viewing the Chromatogram Results
Click the button to display the report
using ALL calculations.
Click the button to return to the
Chromatogram Viewer dialog.
6-18 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Entering a Description JULY 2010
6.6.6 Entering a Description
To enter a description for the selected
chromatogram,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. The Edit
Description dialog appears.
3. Type the desired statement(s).
4. Press the ENTER key to accept this
description.
Use the button or press the ESC key to
exit this dialog without accepting your
entry.
5. Click the button to save this
description with the chromatogram file.
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Forcing a Calibration
6.6.7 Forcing a Calibration
Use the Forced Cal function to calibrate the
GC, using the raw data and stream number for
the selected GC Archive chromatogram. The
results are stored in the CDT under the
corresponding stream number.
To perform a forced calibration,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button.
6.6.8 Toggling TEVs and CGM Components
To toggle the display of the TEV and CGM
Component speadsheets,
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. If multiple
CGMs are displayed in the graph area, the
'CUR/ALL' button toggles between showing
all TEVs and all components for all CGMS
to showing only the TEVs and components
for the currently selected stream.
The selected GC Archive
chromatogram must be
from a good calibration
gas run.
6-20 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Viewing Baseline Data JULY 2010
3. MON2000 toggles the display of the TEVs
and Components spreadsheets and the
CGM view.
6.7 VIEWING BASELINE DATA
Use the Baseline function to display the
retention times and baselines for the selected
chromatogram.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. This removes the
integration lines from a displayed Archive
CGM.
3. MON2000 displays a plot of the baseline
values, and lists the corresponding
retention times in the legend table.
Cur/All View 1 Cur/All View 2
CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER 6-21
MON2000
JULY 2010 Viewing RAW Data
6.8 VIEWING RAW DATA
Use the Raw Data function to display the Raw
Data Table for the selected chromatogram.
1. Use the Chromatogram pull-down menu to
select a specific chromatogram.
2. Click the button. The Raw Data
dialog displays and shows the raw data for
all CGMs in the graph area.
3. Click the button to return to the
Chromatogram Viewer dialog.
6.9 DISPLAY OPTIONS
Right-click the graph area to access these
options, or use the corresponding keystroke(s).
Options are listed in alphabetical order.
See Table 6-1 for a complete listing of option
names, descriptions, and keystroke sequences.
6-22 CHROMATOGRAM VIEWER
MON2000
Display Options JULY 2010
Table 6-1 Display Options for Chromatogram Viewer
Keystroke Right-Click Option Description
CTRL C Copy to clipboard allows you to copy this graph to another
application such as MSWord or Excel
F8 Cursor to nearest point snap cursor to nearest point in both the X and Y
directions
CTRL V Paste from clipboard allows you to plot a range of points from another
application such as MSWord or Excel
CTRL P Print Graph Area print currently displayed chromatograph area
CTRL S Print Series All print all displayed chromatograms
HOME Restore State restore last saved display settings for Live or
Archived for the selected chromatogram
CTRL HOME Save State save current or archived display settings for the
selected chromatogram
F4 Toggle Coarse/Fine toggle cursor from coarse (less accurate) to fine
(more accurate)
F9 Toggle Lines/Dots toggle graph from line(s) to dots
CTRL F4 Toggle Mouse Position Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse while
tooltip displays exact coordinates of the current
point
CTRL F9 Toggle Nearest Point Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse cursor
NUM + Zoom In zoom in on entire graph
NUM – Zoom Out zoom out from entire graph
NUM →Zoom X In zoom in on X axis
NUM ←Zoom X Out zoom out from X axis
NUM ↑Zoom Y In zoom in on Y axis
NUM ↓Zoom Y Out zoom out from Y axis
REPORTS 7-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Report Display
7
REPORTS
The options listed in the Reports menu enable
you to display, print, or store various pre-
configured GC reports.
See the following sections for more information
on specific reports and related functions.
7.1 REPORT DISPLAY
This function allows you to immediately
display, print, or store preconfigured reports on
GC analysis data. Data is reported either real-
time from the GC unit or from previously
stored files.
7.1.1 View Report from Live Data
To display a report with live data from the GC
unit,
1. Use the Reports > Report Display menu to
access this function.
2. The Report Display dialog appears, per GC
type.
You must be currently online
with the desired GC unit to
generate a report from the
controller.
Report Display dialog for
2350A GC Controllers
Report Display dialog for Model 700 GC
7-2 REPORTS
MON2000
View Report from Live Data JULY 2010
3. Select the report type, stream, and update
setting from the lists provided.
4. Click the button or press the F2
key to generate and display the selected
report.
To close this dialog without generating a
report, click the button to return
to the main window.
Table 7-1 Description of Report Display Settings
Setting Description
Reports list of pre-defined reports; Shows report
type (Analysis, Raw Data, Calibration,
etc...)
Select Stream list of available streams
For a single detector GC:
0–Current = last stream analyzed
For a dual detector GC:
0–Current Det1 = last stream analyzed,
Detector 1
0–Current Det2 = last stream analyzed,
Detector 2
Update Method list of update options that determine
when the report display is refreshed
Anly = after each analysis
Cal = after each calibration
Fcal = after each final calibration
None = not updated
The contents of the GC analysis
reports are defined by:
• the GC application
• functions such as
Calculations, User Defined,
Limit Alarms, and Streams
REPORTS 7-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Report from Live Data
5. MON2000 generates the report, per your
specifications, and displays the results in
the File Viewer dialog.
MON2000 creates a temporary HTML file to
display the generated report. If you want to
save this report to disk, see Section 7.1.4.
Use the scroll bars to see other areas of the
report. Use the button to
increase or decrease the font size displayed.
The display refreshes per the update setting configured in the
Report Display dialog (see Section 7.4).
For example, in the Report Display dialog, if Stream is set to “0–
Current” and Update is set to “Anly”, the report display will refre
s
after the GC analyzes the stream selected via the Report Display
dialog.
The refresh function displays the newly generated report and
deletes the previous report (unless already saved to disk).
Check the GC status bar for the run time and current stream.
7-4 REPORTS
MON2000
View Report from File JULY 2010
See the following sections for instructions
printing the displayed file or opening other
report files from disk.
6. Click the button or press the ESC
key to exit this function and return to the
Report Display dialog.
7.1.2 View Report from File
To open a report file for viewing,
1. Use the Reports > Report Display menu to
access this function.
2. The Report Display dialog appears.
If you are working in off-line mode, the
Report Display dialog will appear blank.
MicroSoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or later) is
required to view a report file in HTML format.
REPORTS 7-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Report from File
3. Click the button or press the
F3 key to access the File Viewer dialog.
4. Click the button. The Open
dialog appears.
5. Use the provided directory tree to select the
desired report file. Click the
button.
6. MON2000 opens the file and displays it in
the File Viewer dialog.
Use the scroll bars to see other areas of the
report. Use the button to
increase or decrease the font size displayed.
By default, the Open
dialog displays the
c:\GC\Save directory.
7-6 REPORTS
MON2000
Print Report JULY 2010
Use the and buttons
to browse through multiple report files.
7. Click the button or press the ESC
key to return to the Report Display dialog.
7.1.3 Print Report
To print a report,
1. Display a live report or open a report file
from disk. See Section 7.1.1 or Section 7.1.2
for details.
2. Click the button.
3. MON2000 prints the report to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
7.1.4 Save Report to Disk
To save a report to disk,
1. Display a live report or open a report file
from disk. See Section 7.1.1 or Section 7.1.2
for details.
The refresh function displays a newly
generated report and deletes the currently
displayed report (see Section 7.1.1 for
details).
You should print or save the current report
immediately after it is displayed.
REPORTS 7-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Save Report to Disk
2. Click the button. The Save
HTML Document dialog appears.
3. Select the directory in which you want to
save this report and type the desired name.
Note that the default location is
c:\GC\Save.
4. Click the button.
MicroSoft Internet Explorer 5.0 (or later) is
required to view a report file in HTML format.
You can save the report in any of these formats:
• .txt, ASCII Tab-delimited
• .cvs, Comma-deliminted
• .xls, Excel
•.htm, HTML
• .xml, EXtensible Markup Language
7-8 REPORTS
MON2000
Report Contents JULY 2010
7.1.5 Report Contents
This section includes examples of the following
reports: Analysis, Raw Data, Calibration,
24-Hour Average, Weekly Average, Hourly
Average, and Variable Average. After each
sample report, a table describes the contents
and identifies which functions affect the data.
Each report contains the header information,
including:
Table 7-2 Contents Guide for Report Headers
Content Related Function(s) Menu Section
Date-Time standard GC application n/a n/a
Analysis Time Timed Events Table (TEV) Application > Timed Events
[F5]
5.3
Cycle Time TEV Application > Timed Events
[F5]
5.3
Stream Report Display, Select Stream
Stream Name
Reports > Report Display
Application > Streams
7.1
5.8
Mode standard GC application n/a n/a
Cycle Start Time standard GC application n/a n/a
Analyzer System, Analyzer Name Application > System 5.1
Strm Seq System, Stream Sequence Application > System 5.1
Report Header
(optional)
User Defined, Text Strings Application > User Defined
> Text Strings
5.4.3
REPORTS 7-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Report Contents
Analysis Report
7-10 REPORTS
MON2000
Report Contents JULY 2010
Table 7-3 Contents Guide for Analysis Report
Content Related Function(s) Menu Section
Component Name Component Data Table (CDT) Application > Component
Data [F6]
5.2
GC Analysis Data
variables (std)
Calculations, Control Application > Calculations
> Control
5.5.1
GC Analysis Data
variables (user)
Calculations, User Defined Application > Calculations
> User Defined
5.5.3
Alarms Limit Alarms Application > Limit Alarms 5.6
Additional Base
Pressures
Compress(ibility) enabled
Streams, Optional Pressure
Application > Calculations
> Control
Application > Streams
5.5.1
5.8
REPORTS 7-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Report Contents
Raw Data Report
Table 7-4 Contents Guide for Raw Data Report
Content Related Function(s) Menu Section
Retention Time
Peak Area
Peak Height
Det(ector)
Integration Start/End
Peak Width 1/2 Height
standard GC application n/a n/a
Mthd (method) standard GC application, peak
derivation method (non-edit)
Chromatogram
Viewer
6.2.1
7-12 REPORTS
MON2000
Report Contents JULY 2010
Calibration Report
Table 7-5 Contents Guide for Calibration Report
Content Related Function(s) Menu Section
Component Name
Cal. Conc.
CDT Application > Component
Data [F6]
5.2
Raw Data
New RF
RF % Dev.
New RT
RT % Dev.
CDT (additional columns) Application > Component
Data [F6]
5.2
Alarms Limit Alarms Application > Limit Alarms 5.6
Streams used for analysis display “0”s in the calibration raw data
columns (see Section 5.8)
REPORTS 7-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Report Contents
Final Calibration Report
Table 7-6 Contents Guide for Final Calibration Report
Content Related Function(s) Menu Section
Component Name
Cal. Conc.
CDT Application > Component
Data [F6]
5.2
Old RF
New RF
RF % Dev.
Old RT
New RT
RT % Dev.
standard GC application
results of final calibration,
adjustments to response
factors (RFs) and retention
times (RTs)
CDT (additional columns)
Application > Component
Data [F6]
5.2
Alarms Limit Alarms Application > Limit Alarms 5.6
Report items marked with an asterisk (*) were updated during
calibration.
7-14 REPORTS
MON2000
Report Contents JULY 2010
Average Reports
There are five types of Average Reports:
• Hourly Average Report
• 24-Hour Average Report
• Weekly Average Report
• Monthly Average Report
• Variable Average Report
Sample 24-Hour Average Report
REPORTS 7-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Report Request
7.2 GC REPORT REQUEST
This function allows you to send a report to a
printer connected to the GC Controller.
1. Use the Reports > GC Report Request menu
to access this function.
2. The GC Report Request dialog appears.
Table 7-7 Contents Guide for Average Reports
Content Related Function(s) Menu Section
Item Number
Analysis data/calcula-
tion
Stream
Component
Calculations, Averages Application > Calculations
> Averages
5.5.2
Old RF
New RF
RF % Dev.
Old RT
New RT
RT % Dev.
standard GC application
results of ongoing or
completed averages
n/a n/a
7-16 REPORTS
MON2000
GC Printer Control JULY 2010
3. Select the report you wish to print.
For reports other than the GC Config, a
Streams list displays.
Double-click the appropriate stream and the
controller sends the report to the printer.
Click the button. Double-click
the appropriate stream and the print
process begins.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
7.3 GC PRINTER CONTROL
This function allows you to define schedules for
automatic printing of standard GC reports to a
printer connected to the GC Controller.
1. Use the Reports > GC Printer Control menu
to access this function.
The GC Config Report is a snapshot of the PC Config
Report. Contents include:
• current alarms
• streams
• control calculations
•CDTs
•TEVs
• GC serial port settings
• analog outputs
See Appendix A for a sample PC Config Report.
REPORTS 7-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Printer Control
2. The GC Printer Control dialog displays.
3. Use the provided data fields, check and
combo boxes to select the desired settings.
See Table 7-8 for detailed descriptions.
4. Click the button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
You can, for example, set a
report to print after each
analysis and every 12 hours.
Table 7-8 Description of Settings for GC Printer Control
Setting Description
Anly Enables/disables report printing after each analysis run regardless of report type
selected.
Cal Enables/disables report printing after each calibration run regardless of report type
selected.
FCal Enable/disable report printing after every final calibration run regardless of report
type selected.
Time Time at which report should print at 24-hour intervals.
To disable this feature, set Time to 00:00 or 12:00 AM.
The Time setting overrides the Hours setting and only applies to streams that are
enabled (i.e., checked ON) for report printing.
7-18 REPORTS
MON2000
MON2000 Printer Control JULY 2010
7.4 MON2000 PRINTER CONTROL
This function allows you to define schedules for
automatic printing of standard GC reports to a
printer connected to your PC. See Section 3.7 to
configure the printer settings. The user must
be on-line (connected to the controller) using
either a serial port direct connection, modem or
Ethernet card in order to print from the
MON2000 printer.
Hours hour interval at report should print
Use this setting for intervals less than 24 hours. For example, use this setting if you
wish to print a report every 8 hours. Ensure that the Time value is “00:00” to disable
the 24-hour setting or “12:00 AM” to disable the 12-hour setting.
This setting only applies to streams enabled (i.e., checked ON) for report printing.
Avg average type to be used in the report calculations; calculations are dependent on
settings in the Averages Calculations dialog (see Section 5.5.2)
No = disabled
Hr = hourly avg
24 = 24-hour avg
Wk = weekly avg
Mn = monthly avg
Var = variable avg
<numbe
red
column
s>
streams to be used for data collection when the report is generated
Form
Feed
enable/disable manual paper feed feature of printer
Alarm
Logging
enable/disable real-time printing of alarms as they occur
Event
Logging
enable/disable real-time printing of events as they occur
Table 7-8 Description of Settings for GC Printer Control (Continued)
Setting Description
REPORTS 7-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 MON2000 Printer Control
1. Use the Reports > MON2000 Printer Control
menu to access this function.
2. The Printer Control dialog displays.
Use the provided data fields, check and
combo boxes to select the desired settings.
See Table 7-9 for detailed descriptions.
3. Click the button to accept your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
You can, for example, set a
report to print after each
analysis and every 12 hours.
Each report generation
interrupts all current functions.
Table 7-9 Description of Settings for MON2000 Printer Control
Setting Description
Anly enable/disable report printing after each analysis run regardless of
report type selected
Cal enable/disable report printing after each calibration run regardless
of report type selected
FCal enable/disable report printing after every final calibration run
regardless of report type selected
Time time at which report should print (every 24 hours)
00:00 = disables 24-hour setting
12:00 AM = disables 12-hour setting
Note that the Time setting will override the Hours setting.
7-20 REPORTS
MON2000
Archive Data JULY 2010
7.5 ARCHIVE DATA
This function enables you to view, print, or
save various reports and records stored in the
GC memory for the Model 500 and Model 700
analyzers. You can also reset (i.e., delete) the
stored records from the GC memory.
Hours hour interval at report should print
Use this setting for intervals less than 24 hours. For example, use
this setting if you wish to print a report every 8 hours. Ensure that
the Time value is “00:00” to disable the 24-hour setting or “12:00
AM” to disable the 12-hour setting.
Avg average type to be used in the report calculations; calculations are
dependent on settings in the Averages Calculations dialog (see
Section 5.5.2)
No = disabled
Hr = hourly avg
24 = 24-hour avg
Wk = weekly avg
Mn = monthly avg
Var = variable avg
<numbe
red
columns
>
streams to be used for data collection when the report is generated
Form
Feed
enable/disable manual paper feed feature of printer
Table 7-9 Description of Settings for MON2000 Printer Control (Continued)
Setting Description
REPORTS 7-21
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Data Model 500/Model 700
The standard GC application can store up to
ninety-nine days of analysis runs and
calibration records.
7.5.1 View Data Model 500/Model 700
To view, print, copy or save archived data,
1. Use the Reports > Archive Data > View Data
menu to access this function.
2. MON2000 displays the Date Range
Selection pop-up dialog.
Select All Dates radio button or choose
Selected Dates. Select the Start date and
End Date (date range) for the report to be
archived.
7-22 REPORTS
MON2000
View Data Model 500/Model 700 JULY 2010
3. Click the button to apply your
selection.
Or,
Click the button to return to the
View Data window.
MON2000 displays the message “Reading
GC Data” in the status bar.
4. The Select Archive Record dialog appears.
Double-click the desired archived report or
record. (If no records are found, an
information dialog displays.) Select a range
(multiple) of records to archive by left-
clicking the mouse at the beginning record
and dragging the pointer to the last record
to be archived. Then, press the ENTER key.
Or,
Left-click the mouse pointer on the
beginning record, then move the mouse
pointer to another location (either further
up or down the list) and while holding down
the Shift key, click the ending record. All
highlighted records will be automatically
selected. Press the Enter key to display all
of the selected records.
MON2000 limits the
number of viewable
Archived Records to 100.
REPORTS 7-23
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Data Model 500/Model 700
5. The Calculation Results from Ext. Modbus
window appears.
Use the button or press the ESC key to
exit this function and return to the main
window.
As applicable, use the scroll bars to see
other areas of the record.
7-24 REPORTS
MON2000
Archive Export Data JULY 2010
6. To print, copy to the clipboard, or save the
report to disk, right-click the Archive Data
sheet and select the desired option from the
popup menu.
Or, use the , or
buttons for these functions.
Use the Save File dialog to choose the
directory location and file name.
7. Click the button to return to the
main window.
7.5.2 Archive Export Data
Use this function to export data files for review
at a later time.
From the Reports>Archive Data>Export Data
menu,
You can save the report in any of these
formats:
• .txt, ASCII Tab-delimited
• .cvs, Comma-deliminted
• .xls, Excel
•.htm, HTML
• .xml, EXtensible Markup Language
REPORTS 7-25
MON2000
JULY 2010 Archive Export Data
1. Click Export Data and the Export Archive
window displays.
2. The exported data file is saved in the
default (GC>Directory). Use the pull-down
menu to save the data file to a different
directory.
3. Click an existing file (to write over an
existing file) or enter a 'new' file name in the
'Data Field'.
4. Save the file as either:
• .csv (spreadsheet application format)
• .txt (Word Pad or Note Pad application
format)
7-26 REPORTS
MON2000
Archive Export Data JULY 2010
If the GC you are using is a Model 2350A, the
Data Selection Range' dialog appears. Choose
the date range as:
• All dates (radio button) or,
• Selected Dates (radio button)
• Start date
• End date
Also note that the Date Range dialog only
displays when files are archived for more than
one day.
5. Click the button to apply your
selection. Click the button to
abort and return to the Trend Data window.
6. The Select Archive Records dialog appears.
To Select all records, the operator may drag
the slide bar down to the end of the list,
then while holding down the 'Shift' key click
the last report and MON2000 will
automatically select all records in between.
This also works for any number of records
within the list.
Default Settings
Date Range Selection
Select Archive
Record Default
Select Archive
Record Selection
REPORTS 7-27
MON2000
JULY 2010 Reset
The operator may select several records
individually by holding down the 'Ctrl' key
and clicking the mouse pointer on random
selected reports. Reports that are several
hours apart may be viewed in this manner.
Or, as the example .BMP above shows, the
operator may click a report and drag the
mouse pointer down, highlighting several
reports in sequential order.
7.5.3 Reset
To delete archived data and reset the GC
Controller memory,
1. Use the Reports > Archive Data > Reset
menu to access this function.
2. MON2000 displays a confirmation dialog.
Click the button to continue.
3. MON2000 clears the GC Controller
memory. New archived records will begin
accumulating again as analysis and
calibration runs occur.
7-28 REPORTS
MON2000
Trend Data JULY 2010
7.6 TREND DATA
This function allows you to view, print, or save
graphical representations, or trend lines, of
accumulated analysis data for the 2350A and
the Model 700 GC Controllers.
7.6.1 Trend Data Model 700/2350A GCs
1. Use the Reports > Trend Data menu, then
click the button to access this
function.
2. The Trend Data dialog appears.
Use the enabled Graph and Trend push-
buttons to access the Trend Data features.
See the following sections for detailed
information.
3. Click the button to return to the
main window.
REPORTS 7-29
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A
7.6.2 View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A
To view a live trend from the online Model 700/
2350A GC,
1. Click the button.
2. The Select menu for variable displays.
Double-click the desired variable. If the
selected variable applies to a single
component (e.g., Gallons/1000 SCF, Liquid
Volume Percent, or Mole Percent), then the
Standard Components menu appears.
You cannot view a live trend if the corresponding
analysis record does not exist in the GC memory.
An error message will display:
7-30 REPORTS
MON2000
View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A JULY 2010
3. The Select menu for streams appears.
Double-click the left mouse button on the
desired stream to make your selection.
4. MON2000 displays the Date Range
Selection pop-up dialog.
Select All Dates radio button or choose
Selected Dates. From the pull-down
menu, select the date range for the Trend
report.
Click the to apply your
selection.
Or,
Click the button to return to the
trend window.
5. MON2000 reads data from the online GC
unit and plots the current, live trend for the
selected component and stream.
Plotting a trend line interrupts the normal storage
of ongoing Auto Sequence analysis results.
A trend line graph generated from the maximum
1200 archived analysis records can require up to
8 minutes to plot. Any Auto Sequence analysis
that occurs during the plotting will not be
retained for future retrieval nor will be included in
ongoing calculations.
REPORTS 7-31
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Live Trend Online Model 700/2350A
The Trend Data window appears.
7-32 REPORTS
MON2000
View Trend from File on Disk JULY 2010
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legend.
Use the Graph and Trend Options functions
to manipulate the display. To zoom in on a
particular point, click and drag your mouse
over that area; repeat as necessary. Use the
Restore State or Zoom Out options from the
right-click menu (see Section 7.6.10) to
return to the original display.
7.6.3 View Trend from File on Disk
To view a trend from a file previously saved to
disk, use the Reports > Trend Data menu, then
click the button to access this function.
1. Click the button.
2. Use the provided directory tree to locate the
desired TRD file and click the
button to open.
REPORTS 7-33
MON2000
JULY 2010 View Trend from File on Disk
3. MON2000 displays the trend file.
The corresponding data is dynamically
displayed in the provided legend.
Use the Graph and Trend Options functions
to manipulate the display. To zoom in on a
particular point, click and drag your mouse
over that area; repeat as necessary. Use the
Restore State or Zoom Out options from the
right-click menu (see Section 7.6.10) to
return to the original display.
7-34 REPORTS
MON2000
Edit Graph Display JULY 2010
7.6.4 Edit Graph Display
1. Click the button. The Edit Graph
dialog appears.
2. Use the provided attributes and options to
change the trend display as desired.
3. Click the button to accept your
changes and return to the Trend Data
dialog.
Click the button to abort and
return to the Trend Data dialog.
4. The trend display changes as specified.
Additional display options are available by
right-clicking the display area. See Section
7.6.10 for more information.
7.6.5 Changing Cursor Size
To toggle the cursor size from course movement
(less accurate) to fine movement (more
accurate), click the button.
REPORTS 7-35
MON2000
JULY 2010 Describe Trend
7.6.6 Describe Trend
1. Click the button. The Edit
Description dialog appears.
2. Type the desired statement(s).
3. Press the ENTER key to save this
description.
Use the button or press the ESC key to
exit this dialog without saving your entry.
7.6.7 Print Trend
To print the displayed trend graph, click the
button.
MON2000 prints the report to your configured
printer (see Section 3.7).
7-36 REPORTS
MON2000
Save Trend JULY 2010
7.6.8 Save Trend
To save a currently displayed trend to disk,
1. Click the button.
2. Use the provided directory tree to select the
desired file location and name, then click
the button.
3. MON2000 saves the trend along with its
graph settings.
7.6.9 Read Trend Archive
This feature is not available if the
corresponding analysis record does not exist in
the GC memory or if you are viewing this trend
data offline from a file.
To read the Trend Archive,
1. Click the button.
If you are operating a Model 700 or 2350A
GC, then an Archive Range Selection dialog
displays.
(a) Toggle the appropriate radio button to
select either All Dates or Selected Dates.
To specify a date range, use the Start
Date and End Date pull-down menus.
(b) Click the button to continue.
The table is saved as a
binary file with a .trd
extension.
REPORTS 7-37
MON2000
JULY 2010 Display Options
2. The Archive dialog appears.
3. Click the button to return to the
Trend Data dialog.
7.6.10 Display Options
Right-click the graph area to access these
options, or use the corresponding keystroke(s).
Options are listed in alphabetical order.
7-38 REPORTS
MON2000
Display Options JULY 2010
Table 7-10 Display Options for Trend Data
Keystroke Right-Click Option Description
CTRL C Copy to clipboard allows you to copy this graph to another
application such as MS Word or Excel
F8 Cursor to nearest point snap cursor to nearest point in both the X and Y
directions
CTRL V Paste from clipboard allows you to plot a range of points from another
application such as Meshwork or Excel
CTRL P Print Plot Area print currently displayed chromatograph area
CTRL S Print Series All print all displayed chromatograms
HOME Restore State restore last saved display settings for the
selected chromatogram
CTRL HOME Save State save current display settings for the selected
chromatogram
F4 Toggle Coarse/Fine toggle cursor from coarse (less accurate) to fine
(more accurate)
F9 Toggle Lines/Dots toggle graph from line(s) to dots
CTRL F4 Toggle Mouse Position Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse while
tooltip displays exact coordinates of the current
point
CTRL F9 Toggle Nearest Point Tip graph cursor follows movement of mouse cursor
NUM + Zoom In zoom in on entire graph
NUM – Zoom Out zoom out from entire graph
NUM →Zoom X In zoom in on X axis
NUM ←Zoom X Out zoom out from X axis
NUM ↑Zoom Y In zoom in on Y axis
NUM ↓Zoom Y Out zoom out from Y axis
LOGS 8-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Maintenance Log
8Y
LOGS
The options in the Logs pull-down menu allows
you to keep a maintenance record, keep a
parameter record, and view the Alarm and
Event Logs.
8.1 MAINTENANCE LOG
Use this function to track maintenance
activities performed on a given GC unit.
To read and edit the Maintenance Log,
1. Use the Logs > Maintenance Log menu to
access this function. MON2000 retrieves the
data from the GC unit.
2. The Maintenance Log dialog appears.
8-2 LOGS
MON2000
Maintenance Log JULY 2010
3. To add the log entry text,
(a) Click the “Add Message F4” button or
click the last ‘Log Message’ cell and
press the RETURN key. The Maintenance
Log message dialog displays.
(b) Add text in the appropriate Log Message
cell, then click the button to
apply the changes. Click the
button to discard your changes and
return to the Main window.
4. To change the log entry text,
(a) Click the appropriate Log Message cell.
(b) Click the button. The
Edit Log Message dialog appears.
(c) Type your edits.
A Log Message can contain up
to 1000 characters.
However, the entire
Maintenance Log can contain
no more than 1100 characters.
LOGS 8-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Parameter List
(d) To accept your edits, press the RETURN
key. To cancel your edits, click the
button or press the ESC key.
5. To delete a log entry, click the desired log
entry and press the DELETE key.
6. Click the button to write this
data to the GC unit.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
8.2 PARAMETER LIST
Use this function to keep a record of the
hardware components and associated
parameters for a given GC unit.
To read and edit the Parameter List,
1. Use the Logs > Parameter List menu to
access this function. MON2000 retrieves the
data from the GC unit.
8-4 LOGS
MON2000
Parameter List JULY 2010
2. The Parameter List dialog appears.
Table 8-1 Items in Parameter List
Type Parameter
Operational SO #
PN #
Purchaser
Location
Order #
Date
Model #
Control Serial #
Analyzer Serial #
Approved by
Date
Customer Approved by
Date
Drawings Analyzer Flow
Sample Conditioning System
Interconnect Wiring
Outline and Dimensional
System Wiring
Other
LOGS 8-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Parameter List
3. To save this data to disk, click the
button or press the F3 key.
The Save Parameter File dialog appears.
Analysis Settings
Flows in cc/min
Sample Loop 1
Sample Loop 2
Detector
Valve Part Numbers
Sample System Sample Valve 1 Flow Rate (cc/min)
Sample 1 Pressure (PSIG)
Sample Valve 2 Flow Rate (cc/min)
Sample 2 Pressure (PSIG)
SCS Oven Temperature (°C)
Solenoid Purge Flow (cc/min/stream)
Column OD (in.)
ID (in.)
Length
Support
Mesh
Phase
Connected
Function
Table 8-1 Items in Parameter List (Continued)
Type Parameter
8-6 LOGS
MON2000
Alarm Log JULY 2010
This feature only saves the files in .par
format. Use the Save Parameter File dialog
to choose the directory location and file
name.
4. To open an existing parameter file from
disk, click the button or
press the F4 key.
Use the Open Parameter File dialog to
choose the desired file.
5. Click the button to write your
changes to the GC unit.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
8.3 ALARM LOG
Use this function to read and/or clear the
various entries in the Alarm Log. The Alarm
Log is a circular buffer that contains 50 entries.
To clear or acknowledge all active alarms, see
Section 8.4.
LOGS 8-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Alarm Log
To view the Alarm Log,
1. Use the Logs > Alarm Log menu to access
this function. MON2000 retrieves the last
50 alarms from the GC unit.
2. The Alarm Log dialog appears.
Table 8-2 Alarm Log Attributes
Attribute Description
<acknowledgement> indicates whether the alarm has been
acknowledge
U = unacknowledged
? = status unknown
State indicates whether the alarm is
currently active
SET = currently active
CLEAR = inactive
Date/Time date and time the alarm condition
began
8-8 LOGS
MON2000
Alarm Log JULY 2010
3. By default, MON2000 displays all recorded
alarms.
To view only the unacknowledged alarms,
click the Unacknowledged alarms only radio
button.
To view only the active alarms, click the
Active alarms radio button.
4. To acknowledge a single alarm,
(a) Ensure you have selected the correct
display option (see Step 3).
(b) Select the alarm you want to
acknowledge.
(c) Click the button or press
the F2 key.
Alarm Message 1 describes the alarm condition
Alarm Message 2 displays the alarm limit and current
condition values, as applicable
Table 8-2 Alarm Log Attributes (Continued)
Attribute Description
If an alarm message is changed (see Section 5.6 and
Section 5.7) all affected alarm entries, including those
previously recorded, will include that change.
An alarm triggered by a user-defined value will continue
to display as an active alarm until that value is no longer
in the alarm state.
LOGS 8-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Clear or Acknowledge Active Alarms
5. To acknowledge all unacknowledged
alarms,
(a) Ensure you have selected the correct
display option (see Step 3).
(b) Click the button or press
the F3 key.
In the Active Alarm view, click the
button or press the F4 key.
If an alarm is cleared before the
condition has been resolved, MON2000
redisplays the alarm entry as an active
alarm.
6. Click the button to exit and
return to the main window.
8.4 CLEAR OR ACKNOWLEDGE ACTIVE ALARMS
To clear or acknowledge all alarms, click the
Logs pull-down menu and select the Clear/Ack
All Active Alarms option.
8.5 EVENT LOG
Use this function to track the system and
operator events that have occurred with a
given GC unit.
To view the Event Log,
1. Use the Logs > Event Log menu to access
this function. MON2000 retrieves the last
50 events from the GC unit.
8-10 LOGS
MON2000
Event Log JULY 2010
2. The Event Log dialog appears, displaying
each system or operator event and the
corresponding data.
3. Click the button to exit and
return to the main window.
Table 8-3 Event Log Attributes
Attribute Description
User Id user name
Date date event occurred
Time time event occurred
Event Message indicates event type (i.e., describes event)
Old Value if applicable, the value before the event
New Value if applicable, the value after the event
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Overview
9
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
9.1 OVERVIEW
The MON2000 PLUS program provides
configurable automatic collection and storage
of analysis and calibration data from the gas
chromatograph controller.
Configuration of the specific chromatographs to
be polled, timing of polling, and specific data to
be collected from each is defined by the user
through the setup of polling control files.
An Auto-Sequencing module interprets the
commands in a polling control file and performs
the collection and storage of data.
Data collected is stored in text files (*.txt) or
comma delimited files (*.csv). The emphasis is
on the data being in a form suitable for import
by standard spreadsheet and/or database
programs.
Reports collected are stored in text files (.txt)
formatted as ready-to-print or in comma-
delimited files (.csv) that reduce white space
and the output file size.
The Data Collection feature
is only available with the
MON2000 PLUS program.
The MON2000 PLUS
program is not designed to
provide database capability
for the data collected.
9-2 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Overview JULY 2010
All Model 500 and 1000 GC’s with 2350A and
older 2350/2360 GC Controllers and Model 700
GC Controllers are supported in the acquisition
of the following types of data:
• Alarms - Selection of Alarm Log, Active
Alarms, or Unacknowledged Alarms.
• Averages - Direct Access to single averages
and/or blocks of averages to include support
for acquiring results from most recent
averaging period as well as those for
previous averaging periods (number limited
by number supported by specific model and
application). Access to average value,
maximum value, minimum value, and
number of samples for the period to be
supported.
• CGM Archive - Selection of Last Analysis or
Last Calibration and Stream number.
• CGM on Alarm - Poll the CGM when an
alarm condition is set or cleared.
• Event Log - Selection of Start/End time,
Most Recent n Days, Since Last Collected,
or Entire Log.
• Maintenance Log - Selection of Start/End
Time, Most Recent n Days, Since Last
Collected, or Entire Log
• Registers - Both User Modbus and
SIM_2251 single and multiple register
queries are supported.
• Reports - Archive data accessible via
Reports>Archive Data>View Data menu are
available (selection based on most recent
number of days, date range, single stream
or all streams). Selections are based on the
various GC model and are consistent with
the capabilities of those models and specific
applications.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Data Collection Configuration
• Condition Start - Start of conditional polls.
The poll commands following the Condition
Start are run only when the condition is
met. The condition is defined through the
status change of a Modbus register
(SIM_2251 or User_Modbus).
• Condition End - End of conditional polls.
The poll commands following the Condition
End are run normally.
Use these Data Collection functions to
configure a polling control file and start the
Auto-Sequencing module:
• Configuration Open File - Open or edit an
existing Polling Control file.
• Configuration New File - Create a new
Polling Control file and use the Commands
to configure the polling settings.
• Start Auto - Initiate the Auto-Sequencing
module. During Auto-Sequencing a Status
display is maintained on the screen.
9.2 DATA COLLECTION CONFIGURATION
Use the Data Collection>Configuration>New
File or Data Collection>Configuration>Open
File menu to access the Configuration for Data
Collection window and the commands to
configure the Polling Control file. This function
is performed in the Online or Offline mode.
A Polling Control file contains commands to be
executed in order to acquire desired sets of data
from one or more gas chromatographs.
9-4 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Data Collection Configuration JULY 2010
Select a desired command from the list of
available commands and input the necessary
data to complete the command (see Table 9-1
for a list of commands). The completed
command is added to the Polling Control file.
Continue with the next desired command. This
process is continued until all commands are
selected and configured for the file. Edit the
polling control file by adding, deleting, and
inserting commands.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Data Collection Configuration
Table 9-1 List of Commands
Command Description
Await This command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to await a specific time of day prior to con-
tinuing processing the commands in this file. The user enters the desired time of day in hours and
minutes.
Connect/
Logon
Connect/No
Logon
The Connect/Logon command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to establish communications
with the indicated GC controller using the communication method and parameters as indicated in
the GC directory entry and logon to the GC Controller. After selection of the Connect command
the user selects the desired GC controller from a list of the GC directory entries.
Another Poll Command is Connect/No Logon which allows the Auto-Sequencing module to execute
without logging on to a GC Controller.
Delay
(Seconds)
The Delay (Seconds) command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to Delay for a specified
interval of time prior to proceeding. The user enters the time in seconds.
Delay
(Hours)
The Delay (Hours) command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to Delay for a specified
interval of time prior to proceeding. The user enters the time in hours.
Disconnect This command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to terminate communications with the con-
troller to which it is currently connected. No additional user provided information is necessary for
this command. If this command is executed and no GC Controller is connected, then the command
is ignored.
End This command marks the end of the polling control file and signals the Auto-Sequencing module to
stop processing.
Poll The poll command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to acquire a set of data of a single type
from the GC Controller to which it is currently connected. The user first selects the data type to be
acquired.
Poll Data Types
•Alarms
•Averages
• CGM Archive
• CGM on Alarm
•Event Log
• Maintenance Log
•Registers
• Reports
• Condition Start
• Condition End
Repeat The repeat command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to restart processing of the
commands in the polling control file at the beginning of the file. The repeat command can be
specified with a count that specifies the number of times to execute the sequence of commands in
the file. Without the count (or with a count of zero) the sequence of commands will be re-executed
indefinitely until terminated manually by the user.
Run The run command instructs the Auto-Sequencing module to start execution of a user program.
The user specifies whether the Auto-Sequencing module waits for completion of the user program
before processing the poll control file commands, or continues immediately thus executing in
parallel with the user program. This feature allows you to further process the collected data. As an
example, the user program might perform some validity checking on the data, reformat it, and
then and store it in an Access database on the MON2000 PLUS PC.
9-6 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Create a New Polling Control File JULY 2010
9.2.1 Create a New Polling Control File
To create and configure a new polling control
file,
1. Use the Data Collection > Configura-
tion>New File menu to access this function.
2. MON2000 PLUS displays the Configuration
for Data Collection window.
3. From the Polling Output File(s) table select
Report and/or Data type by clicking the
appropriate check box. Enter the Default
Filename field for the chosen selections.
4. From the Commands pull-down list, select a
command.
5. Enter the necessary data and a description
for the command.
6. Use the add, Insert, Delete, and Poll
Command buttons to add/edit/modify the
configuration.
7. When you have finished adding/editing/
modifying the commands, click the Save
button.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Open an Existing Polling Control File
8. The Save Polling Control File dialog
appears. Enter a filename and click the
Save button to save the *.apc file.
9.2.2 Open an Existing Polling Control File
To edit or modify the configuration of an
existing file,
1. From the MON2000 PLUS main window,
use the Data Collection>Configuration>
Open File menu.
2. Click the button and the Open
Polling Control File window displays.
3. Select the desired polling control file, then
click the button.
9-8 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Open an Existing Polling Control File JULY 2010
4. The Configuration for Data Collection
window displays.
5. Use the
buttons to modify the Data Collection
configuration or Polling Control file.
6. When you have finished modifying the file,
click the button to apply the
changes.
7. The Save Polling Control File dialog
appears.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Await Command
8. A Save Polling Control message prompts
you to replace the exiting file or rename the
Polling Control file (*.apc) file. Click the
button to replace the existing
file.
Or,
9. Click the button to discard your
changes.
9.2.3 Await Command
This command instructs the auto-sequencing
module to wait for a specific time of day prior to
processing the commands in the file. The user
enters the desired time of day in hours and
minutes.
To configure the Await Command,
1. From the General Configuration Commands
pull-down list select the Await command.
2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Time field and enter the time.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Await command in the
Command Description field.
9-10 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Connect/Logon Command JULY 2010
9.2.4 Connect/Logon Command
The Connect/Logon command instructs the
Auto-Sequencing module to establish
communications with the indicated GC
controller, using the communication method
and parameters as indicated in the GC
directory entry and logon to the GC Controller.
After selection of the Connect command the
user selects the desired GC controller from a
list of the GC directory entries.
To configure the Connect/Logon Command,
1. Select Connect/Logon from the General
Configuration Commands pull-down list.
2. From the GC Entry list that is configured in
the File>GC Directory menu, select the
desired GC Controller.
3. Enter a description for the Connect/Logon
command in the Command Description
field.
Use the communication
method and parameters as
configured in the File>GC
Directory entry.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Connect/No Logon Command
9.2.5 Connect/No Logon Command
The Poll Command Connect/No Logon allows
the Auto-Sequencing function to execute
without logging on to a GC Controller.
To configure the Connect/No Logon Command,
1. Select Connect/No Logon from the
General Configuration Command pull-down
list.
2. From the GC Entry list that is configured in
the File>GC Directory menu, select the
desired GC Controller.
3. Enter a description for the Connect/No
Logon command in the Command
Description field.
9.2.6 Delay (Seconds) Command
Prior to executing the auto-polling function, the
Delay (Seconds)Command instructs the
Auto-Sequencing module to delay for a
specified interval of time. The user enters the
time delay in one second increments.
9-12 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Delay (Hours) Command JULY 2010
To configure the Delay (Seconds) Command,
1. From the General Configuration List of
Commands pull-down list, select Delay
(Seconds).
2. Enter the time delay, in one second
increments, in the Delay field.
3. Enter a description for the Delay (Seconds)
command in the Command Description
field.
9.2.7 Delay (Hours) Command
Prior to executing the auto-polling function, the
Delay(Hours)Command instructs the Auto-
Sequencing module to delay for a specified
interval of time. The user enters the time delay
in one hour increments.
To configure the Delay (Hours) Command,
1. From the General Configuration List of
Commands pull-down list, select Delay
(Hours).
2. Enter the time delay, in one hour
increments, in the Delay field.
3. Enter a description for the Delay (Hours)
command in the Command Description
field.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Disconnect Command
9.2.8 Disconnect Command
Use the Disconnect Command to terminate
communications with a currently connected GC
Controller.
To configure the Disconnect command,
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select Disconnect.
2. Enter a description for the Disconnect
Command in the Command Description
field.
No additional input parameters are required
for this command. Also note, if you are not
connected to a GC Controller, this command is
ignored.
9.2.9 End Command
The End Command marks the end of the polling
control file and signals the Auto-Sequencing
module to stop processing.
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the button to select
another command.
2. Use the Command pull-down list, and select
End.
3. Enter a description for the End Command
in the Command Description field.
9-14 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Alarms JULY 2010
9.2.10 Poll Command: Alarms
To configure the Alarms Command, from the
Configuration for Data Collection window,
1. Select POLL from the General Configuration
Commands pull-down list.
2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Type field and select Alarms from the pull-
down list.
3. In the Command Description field, enter a
description for the Alarms command.
4. Click the button. The Poll
Command: Alarms dialog box displays.
5. To select Alarm Log, click the Alarm Log
check box. RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Time Selection field.
Each Poll Command includes
the criteria to define
acquisition and storage of a
single type of data.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Alarms
6. Use the Time Selection pull-down list and
choose one of the following:
• Start/End Time
•Most Recent
• Since Last Collected
Use the Up and Down arrows and enter
the starting date, starting time, ending
date and ending time in the appropriate
data fields.
7. If Active Alarms or Unacknowledged
Alarms is selected, no additional
information is necessary and all of the
entries of the selected type are returned.
8. From the Output File table, enter/edit a
filename and file format for the Alarms
Output file.
9. Click the button to apply the
selections.
MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
9-16 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Averages JULY 2010
10.Click the button to save the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
Click the button to discard your
changes.
9.2.11 Poll Command: Averages
To configure the Averages Command, to
acquire sets of one or more averages for the
most recent averaging period and/or the
previous averaging period (any available in the
GC Controller),
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, select the Poll command.
2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key or click in the
Type field, then select Averages from the
pull-down list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or left-click the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Averages command.
MON2000 PLUS reads all the Averages
configuration (set up from the
Applications>Calculatioins>Averages menu) if
connected to GC controller.
If you are using a Direct Connection (rather than
an Ethernet Connection), the reading process
could take a long time.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Averages
4. Click the button and the
Poll Command: Averages dialog box
displays.
5. From the Averages Configuration dialog, for
a single record, select Average - Single
Record. If the Average - Single Record is
selected, only the average values are
included in the output file.
Or,
9-18 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Averages JULY 2010
If Complete Output Complete Output is
selected, click the check boxes to select
Average, Min, Max, or Samples values.
Use the Result Grouping pull-down list and
select By Period or By Average.
If the number of averages is greater than
one, then select whether the results are to
be grouped by average, or grouped by
period.
(a) When grouped by Average, the data from
all of the periods of a given average are
stored in a single record in the output
file with the appropriate time-stamp
included with the data for each period.
(b) When grouped by Period, a record for
each period contains the values from
each of the averages for that period and
a single time stamp value is included in
the record.
All averages referenced by
a single Poll command must
be for the same averaging
interval (e.g. hourly, daily,
weekly, monthly, variable).
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: CGM Archive
6. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Averages Output file.
7. Click the button to apply the
configuration changes.
8. MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
9. Click the button to write the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
Click the button to discard your
changes.
9.2.12 Poll Command: CGM Archive
Use the CGM Archive command to poll either
the Last Analysis or Last Calibration CGM
Archive for a specific stream. The output file is
in *.cgm format and the file name is based on
the Analyzer Name, Stream, and Date/Time.
The CGM file is stored in the
"\GC\SAVE\CGM Archive" folder.
To configure the CGM Archive Command,
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the ADD button to select
another command.
2. Next, select the Poll command.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Type field, then select CGM Archive.
9-20 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: CGM Archive JULY 2010
4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the CGM Archive command.
5. Click the button and the
Poll Command: CGM Archive dialog box
appears.
6. Enter the Stream number for data
collection.
7. Use the Analysis/Calibration pull-down list
and select the CGM Archive for the Last
Analysis or Last Calibration.
8. Click the button to apply the
configuration changes. MON2000 PLUS
returns you to the Configuration for Data
Collection window.
Or,
9. Click the button to discard your
changes.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-21
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: CGM on Alarm
9.2.13 Poll Command: CGM on Alarm
Use the CGM on Alarm command to poll the
CGM when an alarm condition is set or cleared.
Setup continuous polls so that MON2000 PLUS
can determine and retrieve the CGM with the
alarm condition. The data is saved to an output
file in CGM format and is stored in the
"\GC\SAVE\ERRORS" folder. The file name
is based on the Date/Time and ends with an 'a'.
To configure the CGM on Alarm Command,
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the button to select
another command.
2. Next, select the Poll command.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Type field, then select CGM on Alarm.
4. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the CGM on Alarm
command. No further details are needed.
9.2.14 Poll Command: Condition Start
Use the Condition Start command to start
conditional polling.
To configure the Condition Start command,
1. From the General Configuration (List of
Commands) table, select Poll from the
Command column.
9-22 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Condition Start JULY 2010
2. Select Condition Start from the pull-down
list in the Type column.
3. Enter a description in the Command
Description column.
4. Select a default output file format by
clicking either the Report or Data
checkbox on the Polling Output File(s)
table.
5. Enter a default output file name.
6. Click the Poll Command Details button
located at the bottom of the Configuration
for Data Collection window. The Poll
Command: Condition Start window
appears.
7. Select Register/SIM_2251 or Register/
User_Modbus from the Condition Data
Type column.
8. Enter the register number in the Condition
Data Value column.
9. Select Change from the Condition Status
column.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-23
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Condition End
10.To apply the configuration changes, click
OK. To discard your changes and return to
the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click Cancel.
9.2.15 Poll Command: Condition End
Use the Condition End command to stop
conditional polling.
To configure the Condition End command,
1. From the General Configuration (List of
Commands) table, select Poll from the
Command column.
2. Select Condition End from the pull-down
list in the Type column.
3. Enter a description in the Command
Description column.
9-24 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Event Log JULY 2010
9.2.16 Poll Command: Event Log
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select the POLL command.
2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse Type
field and select Event LOG from the pull-
down list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Event Log command.
4. Click the button and the
Poll Command: Event Log dialog box
displays.
5. From the Event Log Selection pull-down
list, choose one of the following:
Event Log
Selection Additional Selections
Start/End Time Start Date
Start Time
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-25
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Event Log
6. For each entry in the Event Log which
satisfies the selection criteria, a record
containing the following information is
stored:
- User ID of user initiating the change (or
SYSTEM)
- Date/time of occurrence
- Description of the event
- Parameter value prior to the event (old
value)
- Parameter value after the event (new
value)
7. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Event Log Output file.
8. Click the button to apply the
configuration changes.
9. MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
10.Click the button to write the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
Ending Date
Ending Time
Most Recent n Days Enter number of n Days
Since Last Collected No further information
is needed
Entire Log No further information
is needed
Event Log
Selection Additional Selections
9-26 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Maintenance Log JULY 2010
Click the button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9.2.17 Poll Command: Maintenance Log
To configure the Maintenance Log command,
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select the POLL command.
2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse Type
field and select Maintenance Log from the
pull-down list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Maintenance Log
command.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-27
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Maintenance Log
4. Click the button and the
Poll Command: Maintenance Log dialog box
displays.
5. From the Maintenance Log Configuration
Selection table, choose one of the following:
6. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Maintenance Log Output file.
7. Click the button to apply the
configuration changes.
Or,
Maintenance Log Selection Additional Selections
Start/End Time • Start Date
• Start Time
•End Date
•End Time
Most Recent n Days • Enter number of n Days
Since Last Collected • No further information
is needed
Entire Log • No further information
is needed
9-28 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Registers JULY 2010
8. Click the button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9.2.18 Poll Command: Registers
Blocks of Modbus Register data can be specified
for collection.
To configure the Registers Command,
1. From the General Configuration: List of
Commands, use the Commands pull-down
list and select the POLL command.
2. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse Type
field and select Registers from the pull-
down list.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW key on your
keyboard, or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the
Command Description field. Enter a
description for the Registers command.
MON2000 PLUS reads all the
configured Registers
associated with the Modbus
Type (Sim_2251 or
User_Modbus) if you are
connected to a GC
Controller.
If you are using a direct
connection (rather than an
Ethernet connection), the
reading process could take a
long time.
When initially building a
“polling control” file, you
may want to use the
MON2000 PLUS “Offline
Edit” function with an “as
configured” version of the
application open to avoid
these delays.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-29
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Registers
4. Click the button and the
Poll Command: Registers dialog appears.
The basic configuration includes the
following:
• Modbus Type - SIM_2251 or USER
MODBUS
• Data Type Register or Coil
• Starting Register/Coil
• Number of Registers/ Coils
9-30 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Registers JULY 2010
(a) If SIM_2251 is selected and the Starting
Register is in the range 701 - 999, then
Record Selection includes the following:
(b) If USER MODBUS is selected, and Data
Type is Register, then the user must
enter a Data Format string to define for
each parameter being requested (an
integer 16-bit or floating-point 32-bit
value). Floating-point values use two
consecutive registers for storage.
Record Selection Additional Selections
Starting Record + n Starting Record
number
Number of Records (n)
Total Number of
Records
Most Recent n Records Number of Records (n)
Total Number of
Records
Location of Last Written
Record
Since Last Collection Total Number of
Records
Location of Last Written
Record
Date/Time Format
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-31
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Registers
(c) For the standard registers, the values
returned are stored in a single record in
the output file, following the Date and
Time when the registers are polled, the
Starting Register, and Number of
Registers.
(d) For SIM_2251 registers 701-999, one
record is stored in the output file for each
record retrieved with fields within the
record, starting the date and time when
the record is polled, starting Register
(701-999), Record Number, and the data
for the record.
5. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt, *.dat or
*.csv) for the Registers Output file. The
DAT file format is for customized chroma
data.
6. Click the button to apply the
configuration changes.
7. MON2000 PLUS displays the Save Changes
dialog.
8. Click the button to write the
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
Or,
9. Click the button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9-32 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Poll Command: Reports JULY 2010
9.2.19 Poll Command: Reports
The archived analysis reports (as viewable
under MON2000 when connected to a
controller, from the Reports>Archived
Data>View Data menu) can be retrieved and
stored.
To configure the Reports Command,
1. From the Configuration for Data Collection
window, click the ADD button to select
another command.
2. Next, select the Poll command.
3. Press the RIGHT ARROW on your keyboard,
or LEFT-CLICK the mouse in the Type field,
then select Reports from the pull-down list.
4. Press the right arrow on your keyboard, or
left-click the mouse in the Command
Description field. Enter a description for the
Reports command.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-33
MON2000
JULY 2010 Poll Command: Reports
5. Click the button and the
Poll Command: Reports dialog box appears.
6. Use the following selection criteria and then
enter appropriate data:
7. Regardless of the selection criteria method
used above, choose the order of returned
reports in the Output Order (with Most
Recent First or with Oldest First).
8. Next, select the Output Type, as a Complete
Report or an Analysis - Single Record.
Reports Selection Additional Selections
Start/End Time • Stream Number
(0 - indicate all streams)
• Start Date
• Start Time
•End Date
•End Time
Most Recent n Days • Stream Number
(0 - indicate all streams)
• Enter number of n Days
Runs Since Last Collection • Stream Number
(0 - indicate all streams)
9-34 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Repeat Command JULY 2010
9. From the Output File table, enter/edit the
filename and file format (*.txt or *.csv) for
the Reports Output file.
10.Click the button to apply the
configuration changes.
Or,
11.Click the button to discard your
changes and return to the Configuration for
Data Collection window.
9.2.20 Repeat Command
Use the Repeat command to instruct the Auto-
Sequencing module to restart processing of the
commands in the polling control file (from the
beginning of the file). Specify a count for the
number of times to execute the sequence of
commands in the file. Without a specified count
(or with a count of zero) the sequence of
commands will be re-executed indefinitely until
terminated manually by the user.
To configure the Repeat command,
1. From the General Configuration List of
Commands pull-down list, select Repeat.
2. Enter the number of times to repeat the
Auto-Sequencing process, in the Repeat
Count field.
3. Enter a description for the Repeat
Command in the Command Description
field.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-35
MON2000
JULY 2010 Run Command
9.2.21 Run Command
The run command (future release) instructs the
Auto-Sequencing module to start execution of a
user program. The user specifies whether the
Auto-Sequencing module waits for completion
of the user program before processing the poll
control file commands, or continues
immediately thus executing in parallel with the
user program. This feature allows you to
further process the collected data. As an
example, the user program might perform some
validity checking on the data, reformat it, and
then and store it in an Access database on the
MON2000 PLUS PC.
9.3 DATA COLLECTION
The Data Collection Start Auto function allows
you to open an existing polling control file,
select to append or overwrite the existing
output files, select whether to enable
Transaction Logging, and start the automatic
data collection.
9-36 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Start Auto-Sequencing JULY 2010
9.3.1 Start Auto-Sequencing
To initiate Auto-Sequencing, use the Data Col-
lection>Start Auto menu,
1. Click START AUTO and the Start Auto-
Sequencing dialog appears.
2. Click the button and the Open
Polling Control File dialog appears.
3. Select the desired polling control file, and
then click the button.
4. From the Output Files selection, click the
desired radio button:
• Append to the existing file
• Overwrite the existing file
5. In the check box, select Enable Transaction
Logging (if desired).
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-37
MON2000
JULY 2010 Start Auto-Sequencing
6. Click the button to confirm the
start of automatic operation. MON2000
PLUS begins the Auto-Sequencing process
and displays the Auto-Sequencing Status
window.
7. The Auto-Sequencing module begins with
the first command in the selected polling
control file and performs the requested
operation. Processing continues
sequentially through the file performing the
operations requested by each command.
(a) If a Repeat command is encountered,
then the processing is restarted at the
beginning of the file.
(b) If an End command (or the end-of-file) is
encountered, the module ends the
command processing.
9-38 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Transaction Log JULY 2010
9.3.2 Transaction Log
To enable the Transaction Logging functions,
select the check box on the Start Auto-
Sequencing dialog. If this option is chosen, one
or more entries are made to the
AutoPollCommsLog.txt file each time a
command is executed.
Transaction Log entries include a time stamp
and a description of the command being
executed. If the command results in Modbus
messages being exchanged between the PC and
the controller, the poll message from the PC
and the response from the controller are
recorded.
9.3.3 Auto-Sequencing Status
During Auto-Sequencing a status display is
maintained on the screen.
MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING 9-39
MON2000
JULY 2010 Status Log
As each command is processed the following
general information is displayed (depending on
the command being processed, the details of
the exact data included will vary:
• Polling Control file in use
• Start time of operation
• Command being processed
• Description of command being processed
• Status of completion of the command (level
detail appropriate to the individual
command)
• Next Command to be processed
• Status Log
Auto-Sequencing must be stopped before other
MON2000 PLUS menu selections can be
chosen.
Terminate Auto-Sequencing at any time by
clicking the Abort button on the Auto-
Sequencing status display screen. If this
occurs, the Auto-Sequencing module will close
all open output files and return to normal
operation of the MON2000 PLUS program.
9.3.4 Status Log
When MON2000 PLUS detects connection or
polling errors, the error condition is logged and
a Status Log file is saved as:
AutoPollStatusLog.txt.
The Status Log field on the Auto-Sequencing
Status dialog indicates the error condition.
9-40 MON2000 PLUS DATA COLLECTION/AUTO-POLLING
MON2000
Status Log JULY 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
MODBUS TEST 10-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Starting WinMB
10
MODBUS TEST
The Modbus Test Program (WinMB) enables
you to test the operation of the serial port com-
munications, and determine Modbus register
and log contents. Use this program as an aid to
software debugging or for special installations.
Via WinMB, you can troubleshoot with any
device including the GC Controller, an
ultrasonic meter, or a flow computer.
Traditionally, Modbus registers are polled by
using a data collection system (DCS). To
facilitate installation and debugging, the
WinMB program emulates a DCS.
This section provides detailed instructions for
using the WinMB program. Use this program
only if you are familiar with Modbus
communication protocol and the operation of
the MON2000 software.
10.1 STARTING WINMB
To start WinMB from MON2000, pull down the
File menu and click the Modbus Test option.
FUNCTION NOT REQIURED FOR NORMAL GC OPERATION
The Modbus test is reserved for advanced functions
The Modbus Test function is not required for normal GC
operation. Skip this section unless you are developing
software, engaging in a software debugging process, or
designing a custom installation that directly accesses the
GC Controller Modbus registers.
10-2 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Establishing Communications JULY 2010
If MON2000 displays an error, verify the
installation directory via the Program Settings
function (see Section 2.16.2).
The Modbus Test Program main window
appears.
10.2 ESTABLISHING COMMUNICATIONS
Use the following instructions to configure the
desired communications settings.
If you are accessing WinMB via MON2000,
WinMB defaults to the same communications
and serial port settings as those set for
MON2000. To set up a WinMB-specific
configuration, see Section 10.2.3.
MODBUS TEST 10-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Comparison of Modbus Protocols
10.2.1 Comparison of Modbus Protocols
MON2000 software and the WinMB program
accommodate two different Modbus protocols:
SIM_2251 and User_Modbus. For each protocol,
separate Modbus registers are reserved.
Thus some settings for MON2000 and WinMB
depend on which Modbus protocol is used.
The protocol you need depends, ultimately, on
the hardware used for data acquisition from the
GC Controller Modbus register contents.
The following comparison should help clarify
the differences between these protocols as well
as the utility of each.
Table 10-1 Comparison of SIM_2251 and User_Modbus Protocols
SIM_2251 User_Modbus
serial slave port serial slave port
modified protocol that allows floating point
numbers to be transmitted over Modbus via
2251 emulation slave type
standard Gould protocol that accommodates
PLC Emulation LO-HI (PLC-LH)
most register contents are predefined; some
registers can be user-defined
predefined Boolean (coils)
user-defined Numeric (registers)
data types are predefined for registers 1000 to
9000
data types are user-defined
variables assigned to registers can be listed in
the PC Config Report (for instructions, see
Section 2.16.3; for an example report, see
Appendix A). See Appendix F for more detail
about individual registers.
variables assigned to registers can be listed in
the PC Config Report (for instructions, see
Section 2.16.3; for example report, see
Appendix A)
When using WinMB, set Register Mode to
“DANIEL” to view register contents.
When using WinMB, set Register Mode to
“PLC- LH” or “PLC-HL” to view register
contents.
It is not necessary to assign scales to regis-
ters.
It may be necessary to assign scales to regis-
ters, to convert floating point values to whole
integer representations.
10-4 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000 JULY 2010
10.2.2 Set GC Com Parameters via MON2000
Set the communication parameters for the GC
Controller serial port to which your PC, or
other device, is connected.
To determine or reset the communications
parameters at the GC Controller,
1. Use the Application > Serial Ports menu to
access the Serial Ports function. The Serial
Ports dialog appears.
2. Verify the MON2000 serial port Usage
setting.
(a) Determine the GC Controller serial port
to which you are directly connected.
(b) In the Serial Ports dialog, ensure that
the Usage setting for the port is either
“SIM-2251” or “User_Modbus”.
If the setting is incorrect, change it by
using the provided combo box.
3. Verify the Baud Rate setting.
WinMB accepts the following baud rates:
300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200.
4. Ensure the remaining serial port
parameters are correct. Revise as required
and record for future reference.
Consult accurate
documentation of the GC
installation or visually
inspect the serial line
connection at the GC
Controller Terminal Board.
MODBUS TEST 10-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Set Up Port via WinMB
Typical settings are:
Note that the RTU protocol permits a more
efficient data transmission for it uses
significantly less bits than ASCII.
5. Check the Com ID setting. The Com ID is
the slave address defined by MON2000.
6. Verify that the RW setting is either “R” or
“RW”.
7. Click the button to accept your
input and return to the main screen.
10.2.3 Set Up Port via WinMB
To determine or reset the communications
parameters used by WinMB,
Table 10-2 Typical GC Communications Parameters
Parameter RTU Setting ASCII Setting
Data Bits 8 7
Stop Bits 1 1
Parity None Even
Handshake None None
RTS On 00
RTS Off 0 0
Ptrcl RTU ASCII
RTS On/Off settings are
required only when line
settling is needed before
data transmission begins.
Record the true Device ID
number for future use.
10-6 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Set Up Port via WinMB JULY 2010
1. Click the button to access the
Port Setup function. The Port Setup dialog
appears.
2. Define the WinMB serial port setup options.
3. Click the button to accept your
input and return to the main screen.
Table 10-3 Typical WinMB Port Parameters
Parameter Typical Setting
Port COM1 or COM2
Baud Rate 9600
Data Bits 7 or 8
Parity Even or None
Stop Bits 1
Flow Control None
Control Options Read Timeout, 500 ms
Try, 2
Register Mode Daniel (for SIM_2251):
PLC-LH (for User_Modbus)
PLC-LH
Protocol ASCII Modbus
RTU Modbus
The serial port settings
displayed are for the serial
communication parameters
at the PC. These settings
must match the GC
Controller settings (to verify,
see Section 10.2.2).
For direct connection to the
GC Controller, ensure that
the Port setting is the same
as the Com ID number of the
serial port used.
MODBUS TEST 10-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Getting Modbus Data
10.3 GETTING MODBUS DATA
Use the following steps to read or write register
contents to the GC Controller (or any other
device). See the following subsections for
additional details.
Before retrieving data, print a PC Config
Report (see Section 2.16.3) and check the
Communication data for variable names
assigned to the Modbus registers.
1. In the Slave Addr data field, type the Comm
ID of the GC unit (or other device). WinMB
will accept a slave address of 1 to 247.
Enter “0” to use the broadcast mode. In the
broadcast mode, WinMB polls all known
devices. Each device interprets this message
as an instruction to read and take action;
however, a response message may not be
received by WinMB.
To access previous
settings, use the spin
arrows to view and select.
Any change is applied to the
corresponding register value at
each device. Table 10-4
shows which function codes
support the broadcast mode.
10-8 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Getting Modbus Data JULY 2010
2. Use the Function pull-down menu to select
the desired read or write option.
3. In the Data Addr data field, type the
starting register.
Note that the data type is set automatically
by WinMB, per the specified data address.
Use the Data Type pull-down menu to select
a different data type for these registers.
To select data types for SIM_2251 registers
1000 to 9000, see Section 10.3.2.
4. In the Quantity data field, type the number
of registers to be retrieved (range from 1 to
2016).
Table 10-4 Available Modbus Function Codes
Function Code Description Broadcast
1 (Read Coil) read one or more coil values
3 (Read Reg) read one or more register values
5 (Set Single Coil) set (write) one coil value
5 (Set Single Reg) set (write) one register value
15 (Set Multiple Coils) set (write) multiple coil values
16 (Set Multiple Regs) set (write) multiple register values
Table 10-5 Default Data Type per Register Range for SIM_2251
Register Range Default Type
1000 – 2999 Boolean
3000 – 4999 Integer
5000 – 6900 Long
7000 – 8999 Float
To ensure best data type
assignments, review a PC
Config Report (see
Section 2.16.3 to view a
live report; see Section 7.1
to view a report file; see
Appendix A for a sample
report).
MODBUS TEST 10-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Use Single Data Type
Note that the requested number of registers
cannot exceed the amount contained by the
selected message block but you can retrieve
a partial block. You cannot cross a message
block boundary.
Also note that in Standard Modbus mode
each register is 16 bits. Therefore, integers
(SHORT) consist of 1 register while floats
(FLOAT) and long integers (LONG) consist of
2 registers.
5. Type the desired repeat count (how many
times WinMB will read or set the specified
registers before ceasing transmission) in the
Repeat data box.
You can repeat the poll from 1 to 9999
times. A Repeat value of “–1” produces an
infinite polling loop that can be terminated
by clicking the button.
10.3.1 Use Single Data Type
Use this function to assign a data type to a
group of registers you will read or edit.
To poll a group of registers with the same user-
defined data type,
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 in Section 10.3.
2. Click the Use <Type> to decode registers
radio button to choose this option.
3. Use the Data Type pull-down menu to
assign a data type to the selected registers
(see Section 10.3, Steps 3 and 4).
Boolean registers are not
user-defined (for either
SIM_2251 or User_Modbus)
and primarily contain alarm
flags useful for debugging.
To view the contents of
Boolean registers, select the
“1 (Read Coil)” function
code.
Numeric registers for
User_Modbus can be user-
defined (see
Section 5.18.4). To view
the contents of Numeric
registers, select the “3
(Read Regs)” function code.
10-10 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Use Template (Mixed Data Types) JULY 2010
4. Click the button to retrieve the
selected registers (i.e., the specified data
addresses) from the GC Controller (or other
device).
Click the button to cease
transmission and return to the Modbus
Function Selection options.
Note that the transmitted/received packet
displays in the Packet Input-Output
window.
10.3.2 Use Template (Mixed Data Types)
Use this function to create a new template or
use an existing template file to directly decode
Modbus register data retrieved from the GC
Controller (or other device). Via the
configuration of a given template, WinMB
imposes the specified data types, etc., onto the
incoming registers. The Template function is
best used when decoding mixed data types.
To create a new template or use an existing
template,
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 in Section 10.3.
2. Use the Data Type radio buttons to select
the desired template option, to decode
registers or decode logs.
3. Note that the Record No. setting is now
available. Enter the desired record by
typing in the provided data field or using
the scroll arrows.
MODBUS TEST 10-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Use Template (Mixed Data Types)
To verify which record number should be
entered, consult the Modbus specifications
for your device. For more information on GC
Modbus registers, see Appendix F.
4. Click the button. The
Template File dialog appears with a new
template displayed.
Table 10-6 Using Record Numbers with Templates
Data Type Setting Other Setting(s) Result
register template • Enter Data Addr value.
• Enter Record No. value.
• Enter Quantity value.
Read Quantity fields (i.e., the number of
fields specified by the Quantity setting)
from the specified Record No. of the
register (Data Addr).
log template • Enter Record No. value. Read all fields associated with the
Record No.
• Enter Data Addr value.
• Enter “0” for the Record
No. value.
Read all fields in all records for the
specified log register (Data Addr).
10-12 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Use Template (Mixed Data Types) JULY 2010
5. To open an existing template file, click the
button. The Select Template
Configuration File dialog appears.
Use the directory tree to locate the desired
file (e.g., temp1.cfg), highlight it, and then
click the button.
6. To edit the displayed file,
• Use the provided combo boxes to select a
different data type. The Offset and Size
values change to accommodate the data
type.
• Click the button to change all
template data types to the type last
selected.
7. To save the displayed file to disk, click the
button. The Select Template
Configuration File dialog appears.
MODBUS TEST 10-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Using Modbus Data
Use the directory tree to specify the desired
location. Either select an existing file or
type the new file name (e.g., temp2.cfg) in
the File name data field. Then click the
button.
8. Click the button to apply your
selections and return to the main window.
Click the button to return to the
main window without applying your
selections.
10.4 USING MODBUS DATA
Use WinMB to poll the GC Controller Modbus
registers (or, registers from another device),
confirming that data is being accurately
relayed from the GC Controller to the PC.
Then, as necessary, assign data types to the
returned data (see Section 10.4.3). You can
save all settings to file for future reference.
To launch the WinMB program from
MON2000, use the File > Modbus Test menu
(see Section 10.1 for additional options).
10-14 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Set Log Parameters JULY 2010
10.4.1 Set Log Parameters
The Log Data function allows you to log the
polled data to a specified file.
To set the log parameters for WinMB,
1. Click the button to access the
Log Data function. The Log Data List dialog
appears.
2. Click the Enable Logging check box to turn
this function ON and to access the Log Data
Parameters.
The Log Data function is not
required for transmission of
Modbus data.
To disable this function,
deselect the Enable Logging
check box.
MODBUS TEST 10-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Set Log Parameters
3. Use the Logging Mode pull-down menu to
select either a Sampling or Continuous
mode.
Continuous mode records the polled data
continuously until the connection is
terminated or the Log Data function is
disabled (see Step 2).
Sampling mode records the polled data per
the user-defined Time Interval (e.g., every 2
minutes).
4. Select the desired logging type.
Append adds this log to the file specified,
preserving previously logged data.
Reset deletes the previously logged data and
saves only this new log.
5. Click the button to apply your
selections and return to the main window.
Go to Step 6.
Click the button to return to the
main window without applying your
selections.
10-16 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Save Modbus Data JULY 2010
6. The Save As dialog appears.
Use the directory tree to specify the desired
location and choose a format type. Either
select an existing file or type the new file
name in the File name data field.
7. Click the button to create this
log file, apply your selections, and return to
the main window.
Click the button to abort and
return to the main window.
10.4.2 Save Modbus Data
To save the data table in a separate file,
1. Click the button to access the
Save Data function. The Save Data
Displayed dialog appears.
You can save log data
in any of these
formats:
• .txt, ASCII tab-
deliminated
• .xls, Excel
•.htm, HTML
MODBUS TEST 10-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Assign Scale Ranges for User_Modbus
2. Use the directory tree to specify the desired
location and either select an existing file or
type the new file name in the File name
data field.
3. Click the button to save this data
and return to the main window.
Click the button to return to the
main window without saving this data.
10.4.3 Assign Scale Ranges for User_Modbus
This is an optional task that applies to
applications using the User_Modbus protocol.
By assigning scale ranges, floating point data
can be converted to integer values.
Use the Serial Ports, Edit Register List
function to assign scale ranges. See Section
5.18.4 for detailed instructions. See Appendix F
for more information regarding GC Modbus
registers.
10.4.4 Print Modbus Data
To print the transmitted data, click the
button. The standard Windows®
print dialog appears.
MON2000 prints the report to your configured
printer (see Section 3.7).
You can save log data
in any of these formats:
• .txt, ASCII tab-
deliminated
•.xls, Excel
•.htm, HTML
10-18 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
Troubleshooting Communication Errors JULY 2010
10.5 TROUBLESHOOTING COMMUNICATION
ERRORS
The WinMB Communication Error Log is
maintained in a circular buffer that holds up to
512 entries.
WinMB tracks the errors for a given session
but does not store them. When you exit
WinMB, all errors are cleared.
To view any communication errors that
occurred during the data transfer, from the
File>Modbus Test menu,
1. Click the button to access the
Communication Error Log function. The
Error dialog appears.
2. To view all errors that have occurred in this
session, click the button.
To delete all entries to date, click the
button.
3. Click the button to return to the
main window.
Double-click a Description
cell to “scroll through” the
displayed text.
MODBUS TEST 10-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Using Modbus Test Online Help
10.6 USING MODBUS TEST ONLINE HELP
Use the WinMB online help file to quickly
access reference terminology, function
descriptions, and other related information.
See the following sections for more information.
10.6.1 How to Access
To access online help, use the File>Modbus
Test menu to display the Modbus Help test
dialog, then,
•Press F1 on your PC keyboard
Or,
• Click the button located on the
toolbar.
The Modbus Test Program Help Index displays.
10-20 MODBUS TEST
MON2000
How to Navigate JULY 2010
10.6.2 How to Navigate
To navigate within this help file,
• Click the button to display an index,
a topic-tree contents menu, and a search
function.
• Click the button to display an index
where you can select a specific term.
• Click the button to return to the last
topic viewed.
• Click the button to print the current
topic.
Use the scroll bars and arrows to display more
of a topic. You can also resize and/or move the
topic window for better viewing convenience.
When applicable, a topic will contain links to
other related topics. Use these links as you
need.
PC CONFIG REPORT A-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 How to Print
AA
APPENDIX A, PC CONFIG REPORT
This appendix explains how to print a PC
Config Report and provides an example for
reference.
A.1 HOW TO PRINT
Use the following instructions to print the
current application settings for the online GC.
To view a PC Config Report already saved to
disk, see Section 7.1.2.
1. Use the File > PC Config Report menu to
access this function. The PC Config Report
window appears.
2. Click the check boxes (see Select column) to
choose the option you want included in the
configuration report.
Click the button or press the F2
key to select all options.
Click the button or press F3 to
deselect (i.e., clear) all checked options.
Output data for the PC
Config Report depends on
the GC Controller and its
application.
A-2 PC CONFIG REPORT
MON2000
Example Report JULY 2010
3. Use the Output radio buttons to either save
the report to disk, print the report with or
without form feeds, or display on screen.
If you want to use the standard Windows®
Print dialog to select a printer, uncheck the
Use default printer option.
4. Click the button or press the F4
key to generate your customized PC Config
Report and print or save this file.
By default, if a print option is selected,
MON2000 will print the report to your
configured printer (see Section 3.7).
A.2 EXAMPLE REPORT
This example PC Config Report, on the
following pages, represents a typical report
that includes all sections. It is provided for
reference only.
If you are online with the
GC Controller, a PC Config
Report that includes all
options can require up to
20 minutes to generate
and save. Printing a full
report can take longer.
If you press the ESC key,
MON2000 will stop after
the current option is
completed.
System Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Description Value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Stream Sequence 1
Aux. Stream Sequence
Analyzer Name 2350_001
Unit Type 2350
System Description 2350 Standard 1 - 64 avgs
Chromatogram Buffers Size 21000
Max Peaks 64
Number of Valves 5
Daylight Saving Time Normal
CGM Analog Output Config 0
Baseline Offset 12
CFG Baseline Number 1
Metric Base Conditions Off
Max. Archive Averages 64
Max. Archive Avg. Records 64
CFG Revision Level 150
CFG Base Name USASTD1
********************************************************************************
Component Data Table Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Component Data Table #1
No. Component U/S DetID RetTime Resp Factor F/V CalConc AnalMthd
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 C6+ 47/35/17 STD 1 30.2 2013490 VAR 0.0289 % AREA
2 PROPANE STD 1 50.2 1316330 VAR 1.0 % AREA
3 i-BUTANE STD 1 65.7 1520820 VAR 0.3 % AREA
4 n-BUTANE STD 1 73.6 1545350 VAR 0.3 % AREA
5 NEOPENTANE STD 1 86.3 1651260 VAR 0.1 % AREA
6 i-PENTANE STD 1 109.4 1715050 VAR 0.0993 % AREA
7 n-PENTANE STD 1 121.6 1793230 VAR 0.0999 % AREA
8 NITROGEN STD 1 149.5 782820 VAR 2.5 % AREA
9 METHANE STD 1 153.1 637330 VAR 89.5719 % AREA
10 CARBON DIOXIDE STD 1 179.2 953088 VAR 1.0 % AREA
11 ETHANE STD 1 200.6 1060440 VAR 5.0 % AREA
No. Component RTDev SecDev Updt RFDev GRSBTU NETBTU MolWgt AGA8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 C6+ 47/35/17 3 2 CAL 10 5288.7 4900.5 95.96 C6mix1
2 PROPANE 3 2 CAL 10 2521.9 2320.3 44.1 PROPANE
3 i-BUTANE 3 2 CAL 10 3259.4 3007.3 58.12 i-BUTANE
4 n-BUTANE 3 2 CAL 10 3269.8 3017.4 58.12 n-BUTANE
5 NEOPENTANE 3 3 CAL 10 3993.9 3691.4 72.15 i-PENTANE
6 i-PENTANE 3 4 CAL 10 4010.2 3707.6 72.15 i-PENTANE
7 n-PENTANE 3 4 CAL 10 4018.2 3715.5 72.15 n-PENTANE
8 NITROGEN 3 2 CAL 10 0 0 28.01 NITROGEN
9 METHANE 3 3 CAL 10 1012.3 911.5 16.04 METHANE
10 CARBON DIOXIDE 3 4 CAL 10 0 0 44.01 CO2
11 ETHANE 3 5 CAL 10 1773.7 1622.4 30.07 ETHANE
No. Component Lb/Gal GPMFactor Reid Vapor RelDenGas RelDenLqd
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 C6+ 47/35/17 5.6681 0.4462 3.0194 3.3132 0.68
2 PROPANE 4.227 0.2756 188.64 1.5226 0.507
3 i-BUTANE 4.693 0.3271 72.591 2.0068 0.5629
4 n-BUTANE 4.869 0.3153 51.709 2.0068 0.584
5 NEOPENTANE 4.975 0.383 35.9 2.4911 0.5967
6 i-PENTANE 5.206 0.3661 20.445 2.4912 0.6244
7 n-PENTANE 5.261 0.3622 15.574 2.4912 0.6311
8 NITROGEN 6.748 0.1096 0 0.9672 0.8094
9 METHANE 2.5 0.1695 5000 0.5539 0.3
10 CARBON DIOXIDE 6.82 0.1704 0 1.5196 0.818
11 ETHANE 2.97 0.2675 800 1.0382 0.3562
No. Component HVSupMJ/m3 HVInfMJ/m3 HVSupMJ/kg HVInfMJ/kg M_RelDens
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 C6+ 47/35/17 196.98 182.52 48.557 44.99 0.6803
2 PROPANE 93.936 86.42 50.368 46.34 0.5078
3 i-BUTANE 121.41 112.01 49.388 45.57 0.5635
4 n-BUTANE 121.79 112.4 49.546 45.72 0.5846
5 NEOPENTANE 148.76 137.49 48.75 45.06 0
6 i-PENTANE 149.36 138.09 48.949 45.25 0.6249
7 n-PENTANE 149.66 138.38 49.045 45.35 0.6316
8 NITROGEN 0 0 0 0 0.8093
9 METHANE 37.708 33.948 55.575 50.034 0.3
10 CARBON DIOXIDE 0 0 0 0 0.8227
11 ETHANE 66.065 60.43 51.95 47.52 0.3581
********************************************************************************
Timed Event Table Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Timed Event Table #1
Analysis Time 225 Cycle Time 240 Sample Valve Y N N N N
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Valve # 2 ON @ 0.0
Inhibit ON 1 @ 0.0
Valve # 3 ON @ 2.0
Slope Sens 8 1 @ 3.0
Detector 1 6 @ 4.0
Valve # 1 ON @ 5.0
Strm Switch @ 7.0
Peak Width 4 1 @ 8.0
Valve # 1 OFF @ 10.0
Valve # 2 OFF @ 23.0
Inhibit OFF 1 @ 26.0
Inhibit ON 1 @ 36.0
Valve # 3 OFF @ 42.0
Inhibit OFF 1 @ 46.0
Inhibit ON 1 @ 97.0
Peak Width 8 1 @ 100.0
Inhibit OFF 1 @ 101.0
Inhibit ON 1 @ 139.0
Detector 1 1 @ 140.0
Valve # 3 ON @ 142.0
Peak Width 3 1 @ 143.0
Inhibit OFF 1 @ 146.0
Detector 1 5 @ 169.0
Inhibit ON 1 @ 170.0
Peak Width 8 1 @ 173.0
Inhibit OFF 1 @ 174.0
Inhibit ON 1 @ 223.0
********************************************************************************
User-Defined Numeric Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Name Type Value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No entries found.
********************************************************************************
User-Defined Selection Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Name Options
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 EnableCalMan 2
2 EnableComAlm 2
4 Maint_mode 1
5 Run_Aux_Seq 1
Options for EnableCalMan
---------------------------
No. Name
----------------------
1 DISABLE
2 ENABLE
Options for EnableComAlm
---------------------------
No. Name
----------------------
1 DISABLE
2 ENABLE_NC
3 ENABLE_NO
Options for Maint_mode
---------------------------
No. Name
----------------------
1 OFF
2 ON
Options for Run_Aux_Seq
---------------------------
No. Name
----------------------
1 OFF
2 ON
********************************************************************************
User-Defined Text Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Name Size Text
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 rpt_header1 50 Company: Daniel Industries
2 rpt_header2 50
********************************************************************************
Calculation Control Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Avg Limit Alarm Test Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Mole Percent Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
Liquid Volume N N N N N N N N
Weight Percent N N N N N N N N
Normalize Results N N N N N N N N
Gas Density N N N N N N N N
Liquid Density N N N N N N N N
Relative Density Gas N N N N N N N N
Relative Density Lqd N N N N N N N N
Compressibility N N N N N N N N
Dry Gross Heating BTU N N N N N N N N
Sat Gross Heating BTU N N N N N N N N
Actual Gross Heating BTU N N N N N N N N
Dry Net Heating BTU N N N N N N N N
Sat Net Heating BTU N N N N N N N N
Actual Net Heating BTU N N N N N N N N
Wobbe Index N N N N N N N N
Reid Vapor Pressure N N N N N N N N
Gallons/1000 SCF C2+ N N N N N N N N
Gallons/1000 SCF C3+ N N N N N N N N
Gallons/1000 SCF C4+ N N N N N N N N
Gallons/1000 SCF C5+ N N N N N N N N
Gallons/1000 SCF C6+ N N N N N N N N
User Flag 1 N N N N N N N N
Average Molecular Wgt N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Dry MJ/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Sat MJ/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Act MJ/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Dry MJ/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Sat MJ/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Act MJ/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Dry MJ/kg N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Dry MJ/kg N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Dry Kc/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Sat Kc/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Act Kc/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Dry Kc/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Sat Kc/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Act Kc/m3 N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Sup Dry Kc/kg N N N N N N N N
HeatVal Inf Dry Kc/kg N N N N N N N N
Metric Rel Dens Lqd N N N N N N N N
Metric Gas Density N N N N N N N N
Metric Lqd Density N N N N N N N N
********************************************************************************
Calculation Average Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Resets
Time: 00:00
Weekday: Sun
Day of Month: 1
No. Variable Name S C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hourly
No entries found.
24 Hour
No entries found.
Weekly
No entries found.
Monthly
No entries found.
Variable
No entries found.
********************************************************************************
Calculation User-Defined Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Variable S C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 label 1
Avg. Molecular Weight 1 1
+ Gallons/1000 SCF 1 1
* Gas Density lbm/1000 ft3 1 1
/ Heating Value Gross BTU Dry 1 1
- Mole Percent 1 1
2 label 2
Gallons/1000 SCF 1 2
+ Gallons/1000 SCF 1 3
+ User Calc Result 1 1
+ Value 1: 16.2 1 1
********************************************************************************
Limit Alarms Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Variable S C DO Type
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No entries found.
********************************************************************************
Discrete Alarms Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Alarm Discrete Discrete Alarm Message
No. Input Output
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 0
2 0 0
3 0 0
4 0 0
5 0 0
********************************************************************************
Streams Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Cal Data Base Condition
No. Name Use Det CD TE Tot Avg Start Int Auto PSIA °F
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Stream 1 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
2 Stream 2 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
3 Stream 3 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
4 Stream 4 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
5 Stream 5 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
6 Stream 6 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
7 Stream 7 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
8 Stream 8 ANL Det1 1 1 5 3 07:00 24 Y Y 14.73 60
No calibration streams defined
Optional Base Pressures
No. Name Op Base Pres 1 Op Base Pres 2 Op Base Pres 3
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Stream 1 0 0 0
2 Stream 2 0 0 0
3 Stream 3 0 0 0
4 Stream 4 0 0 0
5 Stream 5 0 0 0
6 Stream 6 0 0 0
7 Stream 7 0 0 0
8 Stream 8 0 0 0
********************************************************************************
Analog Input Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Label Zero Scale Full Scale F/V Fixed Value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 AI 1 0 100 VAR 0
********************************************************************************
Analog Output Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Variable S C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Mole Percent 1 1
No. Zero Scale Full Scale F/V Fixed Value
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 100 VAR 0
Bargraph
No. Variable Streams Component
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Mole Percent 1 1
2 Not Used 1
3 Not Used 1
4 Not Used 1
5 Not Used 1
6 Not Used 1
7 Not Used 1
8 Not Used 1
9 Not Used 1
10 Not Used 1
11 Not Used 1
12 Not Used 1
13 Not Used 1
14 Not Used 1
15 Not Used 1
16 Not Used 1
Scaling Values
No. Zero Scale Full Scale
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 0 100
2 0 100
3 0 100
4 0 100
5 0 100
6 0 100
7 0 100
8 0 100
9 0 100
10 0 100
11 0 0
12 0 0
13 0 0
14 0 0
15 0 0
16 0 0
********************************************************************************
Discrete Input Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Label Switch
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 DI 1 AUTO
2 DI 2 AUTO
3 DI 3 AUTO
4 DI 4 AUTO
5 AUX_STRM_SEQ AUTO
********************************************************************************
Discrete Output Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Label Switch On-Time Off-Time
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 DO 1 AUTO 00:00 00:00
2 DO 2 AUTO 00:00 00:00
3 DO 3 AUTO 00:00 00:00
4 Common_Alarm AUTO 00:00 00:00
5 Calib-Maint AUTO 00:00 00:00
********************************************************************************
Valve Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Label Switch
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Valve 1 AUTO
2 Valve 2 AUTO
3 Valve 3 AUTO
4 Valve 4 AUTO
5 Valve 5 AUTO
********************************************************************************
Serial Port Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Baud Data Stop Hand- RTS RTS Comm Read
Port Usage Rate Bits Bits Parity shaking ON OFF Protocol ID Write
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 USER_MODBUS 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 0 RW
2 SIM_2251 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 3 RW
3 PC 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 0 RW
4 PC 9600 8 1 None None 0 0 RTU 0 RW
********************************************************************************
Global Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Variable name Indices Type No. of Chars.
S C
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 cal_run_num 1 1 Integer
2 sim_abtu 1 1 Float
3 sim_alarm 16 1 Integer
4 sim_anlytime 1 1 Integer
5 sim_cal 1 1 Integer
6 sim_cal_abtu 1 1 Float
7 sim_cal_comp 1 1 Float
8 sim_cal_dbtu 1 1 Float
9 sim_cal_gpm 1 1 Float
10 sim_cal_rden 1 1 Float
11 sim_cal_sbtu 1 1 Float
12 sim_cal_unno 1 1 Float
13 sim_cal_wobb 1 1 Float
14 sim_calcycle 1 1 Long
15 sim_char 1 1 Char 1
16 sim_compno 16 4 Integer
17 sim_compress 1 1 Float
18 sim_cycday 1 1 Integer
19 sim_cychour 1 1 Integer
20 sim_cycmin 1 1 Integer
21 sim_cycmonth 1 1 Integer
22 sim_cyctime 1 1 Long
23 sim_cycyear 1 1 Integer
24 sim_day 1 1 Integer
25 sim_dbtu 1 1 Float
26 sim_dummy 4 1 Float
27 sim_gpmwt 16 4 Float
28 sim_hour 1 1 Integer
29 sim_min 1 1 Integer
30 sim_molpct 16 4 Float
31 sim_month 1 1 Integer
32 sim_newdata 1 1 Integer
33 sim_rden_gas 1 1 Float
34 sim_rf 16 4 Float
35 sim_sbtu 1 1 Float
36 sim_smask 1 1 Integer
37 sim_stream 1 1 Integer
38 sim_totgpm 1 1 Float
39 sim_unnormal 1 1 Float
40 sim_wobbe 1 1 Float
41 sim_year 1 1 Integer
********************************************************************************
Streams Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Structure Name No. of Streams
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No entries found.
********************************************************************************
Component Data Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Structure Name No. of Streams No. of Components
per Stream
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
No entries found.
********************************************************************************
Data Files Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. File Name No. of Records
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Event_Log 240
File Name Event_Log
---------------------------
No. Field Name Type No. of Chars.
--------------------------------------------------
1 date Float
2 time Float
3 operator_id Char 4
4 event_id Float
5 ASCII_text Char 60
6 prev_value Float
7 curr_value Float
********************************************************************************
Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
No. Name Page Page Left Right Top Bottom
Width Length Margin Margin Margin Margin
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 Analysis 150 55 0 0 0 0
2 Raw Data 80 55 1 0 0 0
3 Calibration 80 55 1 0 0 0
4 Final Calib 80 55 1 0 0 0
5 Hourly Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0
6 24 Hour Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0
7 Weekly Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0
8 Monthly Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0
9 Variable Avg 80 55 0 0 0 0
Field List used in Analysis
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
DATE
DATE
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data cycl_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data stream_num STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE strms name STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data run_mode STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
TIME VAR stream_data cycl_strt_tm STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE seqtxt DET NO 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
TABLE 2
TVAR cdt stdusr CDT_TBL_NO 1* 0
TVAR cdt compnam CDT_TBL_NO 1* 0
TVAR analysis molpct STREAM_NO 1* 25
TVAR analysis wtpct STREAM_NO 1* 26
TVAR analysis liqvolpct STREAM_NO 1* 27
TVAR analysis gpm STREAM_NO 1* 28
TVAR analysis btu_gross STREAM_NO 1* 29
TVAR analysis btu_net STREAM_NO 1* 30
TVAR analysis rel_den_gas STREAM_NO 1* 31
TVAR analysis superior_m3 STREAM_NO 1* 54
TVAR analysis inferior_m3 STREAM_NO 1* 55
TVAR analysis superior_kg STREAM_NO 1* 56
TVAR analysis inferior_kg STREAM_NO 1* 57
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_mole STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_molwgt STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_liqvol STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_gpmc2 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_btugros STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_btu_net STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_rd_gas STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_sm3_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_im3_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_skg_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE stream_data totl_ikg_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
STRING 32
VARIABLE strms base_pres STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 250
STRING 251
VARIABLE strms base_temp STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 32
STRING 250
STRING 251
STRING 32
VARIABLE stream_data z_factor STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE strms base_pres STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pressures STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pressures STREAM_NO 2 0
VARIABLE op_pressures STREAM_NO 3 0
STRING 0
STRING 81
STRING 82
STRING 83
STRING 29
STRING 29
VARIABLE stream_data btudry_gross STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 13 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 25 0
STRING 43
STRING 39
STRING 39
VARIABLE stream_data btusat_gross STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 2 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 14 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 26 0
STRING 44
STRING 40
STRING 40
VARIABLE stream_data btuact_gross STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 3 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 15 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 27 0
STRING 52
STRING 30
STRING 30
VARIABLE stream_data btu_dry_net STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 4 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 16 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 28 0
STRING 45
STRING 41
STRING 41
VARIABLE stream_data btu_sat_net STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 5 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 17 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 29 0
STRING 46
STRING 42
STRING 42
VARIABLE stream_data btu_act_net STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 6 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 18 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 30 0
STRING 53
STRING 47
VARIABLE stream_data totl_gpmc2 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 8 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 20 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 32 0
STRING 48
VARIABLE stream_data totl_gpmc3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 9 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 21 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 33 0
STRING 49
VARIABLE stream_data totl_gpmc4 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 10 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 22 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 34 0
STRING 50
VARIABLE stream_data totl_gpmc5 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 11 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 23 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 35 0
STRING 51
VARIABLE stream_data totl_gpmc6 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 12 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 24 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 36 0
STRING 59
VARIABLE stream_data sup_m3_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 13 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 25 0
STRING 156
STRING 60
VARIABLE stream_data sup_m3_sat STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 2 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 14 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 26 0
STRING 157
STRING 61
VARIABLE stream_data sup_m3_act STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 3 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 15 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 28 0
STRING 158
STRING 62
VARIABLE stream_data inf_m3_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 4 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 16 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 28 0
STRING 159
STRING 63
VARIABLE stream_data inf_m3_sat STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 5 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 17 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 29 0
STRING 181
STRING 64
VARIABLE stream_data inf_m3_act STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 6 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 18 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 30 0
STRING 182
STRING 65
VARIABLE stream_data sup_kg_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 182
STRING 66
VARIABLE stream_data inf_kg_dry STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 184
STRING 67
VARIABLE stream_data sdry_kcal_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 9 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 21 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 33 0
STRING 185
STRING 68
VARIABLE stream_data ssat_kcal_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 7 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 19 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 31 0
STRING 186
STRING 69
VARIABLE stream_data sact_kcal_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 8 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 20 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 32 0
STRING 187
STRING 70
VARIABLE stream_data idry_kcal_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 10 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 22 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 34 0
STRING 188
STRING 71
VARIABLE stream_data isat_kcal_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 11 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 23 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 35 0
STRING 189
STRING 72
VARIABLE stream_data iact_kcal_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 12 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 24 0
VARIABLE op_pres_calc STREAM_NO 36 0
STRING 190
STRING 73
VARIABLE stream_data sdry_kcal_kg STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 191
STRING 74
VARIABLE stream_data idry_kcal_kg STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 192
STRING 31
VARIABLE stream_data real_rd_gas STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 34
VARIABLE stream_data real_rd_lqd STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 58
VARIABLE stream_data rden_lqd_15 STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 58
STRING 33
VARIABLE stream_data totl_unrml STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 77
VARIABLE stream_data avg_molwgt STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 35
STRING 35
VARIABLE stream_data wobbe STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 36
STRING 36
VARIABLE stream_data gas_density STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 36
STRING 75
VARIABLE stream_data gas_dens_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 75
STRING 37
VARIABLE stream_data lqd_density STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 37
STRING 76
VARIABLE stream_data lqd_dens_m3 STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 76
STRING 38
VARIABLE stream_data reid_vapor STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 38
TABLE 200
TVAR anlin label 1* 1 0
TVAR aincur 1* 1 0
STRING 160
TABLE 160
TVAR calcs label 1* 1 0
TVAR calcval 1* 1 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Raw Data
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
DATE
DATE
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data cycl_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data stream_num STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE strms name STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data run_mode STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
TIME VAR stream_data cycl_strt_tm STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE seqtxt DET NO 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
TABLE 50
TVAR raw_data peak_num STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data rt STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data area STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data height STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data detector STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data2 method STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data3 startint STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data3 endint STREAM_NO 1* 21
TVAR raw_data3 half_height STREAM_NO 1* 21
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Calibration
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE cal_run_num 1 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE strms nrun STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
DATE
DATE
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data cycl_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data stream_num STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE strms name STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data run_mode STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
TIME VAR stream_data cycl_strt_tm STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE seqtxt DET NO 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
TABLE 2
TVAR cdt compnam CDT_TBL_NO 1* 0
TVAR cdt cal_conc CDT_TBL_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_avgs raw STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_avgs rf STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_avgs rfdev STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_avgs rt STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_avgs rtdev STREAM_NO 1* 0
ALARMS 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Final Calib
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
DATE
DATE
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data anly_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data cycl_time STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data stream_num STREAM_NO 1 0
VARIABLE strms name STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE stream_data run_mode STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
TIME VAR stream_data cycl_strt_tm STREAM_NO 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE seqtxt DET NO 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
TABLE 2
TVAR cdt compnam CDT_TBL_NO 1* 0
TVAR cdt cal_conc CDT_TBL_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results oldrf STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results newrf STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results updated STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results rfdev STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results oldrt STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results newrt STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results updated STREAM_NO 1* 0
TVAR cal_results rtdev STREAM_NO 1* 0
ALARMS 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Hourly Avg
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data number 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data label 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_data s 1* 1 0
STRING 129
VARIABLE avg_data c 1* 1 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 2 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 3 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in 24 Hour Avg
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data number 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data label 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_data s 1* 1 0
STRING 129
VARIABLE avg_data c 1* 1 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 2 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 3 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Weekly Avg
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data number 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data label 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_data s 1* 1 0
STRING 129
VARIABLE avg_data c 1* 1 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 2 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 3 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Monthly Avg
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data number 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data label 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_data s 1* 1 0
STRING 129
VARIABLE avg_data c 1* 1 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 2 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 3 0
* indicates index is incremented.
Field List used in Variable Avg
---------------------------------
Type Variable SubField Name Indices CP Flag
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE anlyzr_name 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header1 1 1 0
VARIABLE rpt_header2 1 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data number 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_data label 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_data s 1* 1 0
STRING 129
VARIABLE avg_data c 1* 1 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 1 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 1 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 2 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 2 0
STRING 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 avg 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 minimum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive1 maximum 1* 3 0
VARIABLE avg_archive2 1* 3 0
* indicates index is incremented.
********************************************************************************
Communication Report from 2350_001 2350_001.BIN
6/2/2000 15:02:49
Slave Name Slave ID Slave Type
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
USER_MODBUS 0 PLC Emulation - Low-Hi
SIM_2251 3 Daniel 2500 Emulation
USER_MODBUS
-------------
Modbus Variable Field Indices Data String Override
Reg. Name Name S C Type Length Keylock?
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boolean(Coils)
0 sysalarm_set 1 1 Application Checksum Failure No
1 sysalarm_set 2 1 ROM Checksum Failure No
2 sysalarm_set 3 1 RAM Diagnostics Failure No
3 sysalarm_set 4 1 A/D Converter Failure No
4 sysalarm_set 5 1 Detector Oven Failure No
5 sysalarm_set 6 1 Liquid Sample Valve Heater Failure No
6 sysalarm_set 7 1 Sample System Oven Failure No
7 sysalarm_set 8 1 Catalytic Converter Failure No
8 sysalarm_set 9 1 Heater 5 Failure No
9 sysalarm_set 10 1 Heater 6 Failure No
10 sysalarm_set 11 1 Heater 1 Controller Failure No
11 sysalarm_set 12 1 Heater 2 Controller Failure No
12 sysalarm_set 13 1 Heater 3 Controller Failure No
13 sysalarm_set 14 1 Heater 4 Controller Failure No
14 sysalarm_set 15 1 Heater 5 Controller Failure No
15 sysalarm_set 16 1 Heater 6 Controller Failure No
16 sysalarm_set 17 1 FID Flame out No
17 sysalarm_set 18 1 Warmstart Calibration Failure No
18 sysalarm_set 19 1 Valve Timing Failure No
19 sysalarm_set 20 1 Excess Response Factor Deviation No
20 sysalarm_set 21 1 M200 Invalid Non-Volatile Data No
21 sysalarm_set 22 1 M200 Invalid A Module Data No
22 sysalarm_set 23 1 M200 Invalid B Module Data No
23 sysalarm_set 24 1 M200 Bad Options No
24 sysalarm_set 25 1 M200 Stack Overflow No
25 sysalarm_set 26 1 M200 Hardware Shutdown No
26 sysalarm_set 27 1 M200 Synchronization Failure No
27 sysalarm_set 28 1 Preamp Input 1 Out of Range - DET1 No
28 sysalarm_set 29 1 Preamp Input 2 Out of Range - DET1 No
29 sysalarm_set 30 1 Preamp Input 3 Out of Range - DET1 No
30 sysalarm_set 31 1 Preamp Input 4 Out of Range - DET1 No
31 sysalarm_set 32 1 Preamp Failure - DET1 No
32 sysalarm_set 33 1 Analog Output 1 HIGH No
33 sysalarm_set 34 1 Analog Output 2 HIGH No
34 sysalarm_set 35 1 Analog Output 3 HIGH No
35 sysalarm_set 36 1 Analog Output 4 HIGH No
36 sysalarm_set 37 1 Analog Output 5 HIGH No
37 sysalarm_set 38 1 Analog Output 6 HIGH No
38 sysalarm_set 39 1 Analog Output 7 HIGH No
39 sysalarm_set 40 1 Analog Output 8 HIGH No
40 sysalarm_set 41 1 Analog Output 9 HIGH No
41 sysalarm_set 42 1 Analog Output 10 HIGH No
42 sysalarm_set 43 1 Analog Output 11 HIGH No
43 sysalarm_set 44 1 Analog Output 12 HIGH No
44 sysalarm_set 45 1 Analog Output 13 HIGH No
45 sysalarm_set 46 1 Analog Output 14 HIGH No
46 sysalarm_set 47 1 Analog Output 15 HIGH No
47 sysalarm_set 48 1 Analog Output 16 HIGH No
48 sysalarm_set 49 1 Analog Output 1 LOW No
49 sysalarm_set 50 1 Analog Output 2 LOW No
50 sysalarm_set 51 1 Analog Output 3 LOW No
51 sysalarm_set 52 1 Analog Output 4 LOW No
52 sysalarm_set 53 1 Analog Output 5 LOW No
53 sysalarm_set 54 1 Analog Output 6 LOW No
54 sysalarm_set 55 1 Analog Output 7 LOW No
55 sysalarm_set 56 1 Analog Output 8 LOW No
56 sysalarm_set 57 1 Analog Output 9 LOW No
57 sysalarm_set 58 1 Analog Output 10 LOW No
58 sysalarm_set 59 1 Analog Output 11 LOW No
59 sysalarm_set 60 1 Analog Output 12 LOW No
60 sysalarm_set 61 1 Analog Output 13 LOW No
61 sysalarm_set 62 1 Analog Output 14 LOW No
62 sysalarm_set 63 1 Analog Output 15 LOW No
63 sysalarm_set 64 1 Analog Output 16 LOW No
64 sysalarm_set 65 1 Analyzer Failure No
65 sysalarm_set 66 1 Power Failure No
66 sysalarm_set 67 1 Fused Peak Overflow - Noisy Baseline No
67 sysalarm_set 68 1 CPU Battery Low No
68 sysalarm_set 69 1 GC Idle No
69 sysalarm_set 70 1 Real-Time Clock Failure No
70 sysalarm_set 71 1 Analog Input 1 HIGH No
71 sysalarm_set 72 1 Analog Input 2 HIGH No
72 sysalarm_set 73 1 Analog Input 3 HIGH No
73 sysalarm_set 74 1 Analog Input 4 HIGH No
74 sysalarm_set 75 1 Analog Input 1 LOW No
75 sysalarm_set 76 1 Analog Input 2 LOW No
76 sysalarm_set 77 1 Analog Input 3 LOW No
77 sysalarm_set 78 1 Analog Input 4 LOW No
78 sysalarm_set 79 1 Preamp Input 1 Out of Range - DET2 No
79 sysalarm_set 80 1 Preamp Input 2 Out of Range - DET2 No
80 sysalarm_set 81 1 Preamp Input 3 Out of Range - DET2 No
81 sysalarm_set 82 1 Preamp Input 4 Out of Range - DET2 No
82 sysalarm_set 83 1 Preamp Failure - DET2 No
83 sysalarm_set 84 1 NA No
84 sysalarm_set 85 1 NA No
85 lmtalarm_set 1 1 No
86 lmtalarm_set 2 1 No
87 lmtalarm_set 3 1 No
88 lmtalarm_set 4 1 No
89 lmtalarm_set 5 1 No
90 lmtalarm_set 6 1 No
91 lmtalarm_set 7 1 No
92 lmtalarm_set 8 1 No
93 lmtalarm_set 9 1 No
94 lmtalarm_set 10 1 No
95 lmtalarm_set 11 1 No
96 lmtalarm_set 12 1 No
97 lmtalarm_set 13 1 No
98 lmtalarm_set 14 1 No
99 lmtalarm_set 15 1 No
100 lmtalarm_set 16 1 No
101 lmtalarm_set 17 1 No
102 lmtalarm_set 18 1 No
103 lmtalarm_set 19 1 No
104 lmtalarm_set 20 1 No
105 stream_data stream_togg 1 1 Stream 1 No
106 stream_data stream_togg 2 1 Stream 2 No
107 stream_data stream_togg 3 1 Stream 3 No
108 stream_data stream_togg 4 1 Stream 4 No
109 stream_data stream_togg 5 1 Stream 5 No
110 stream_data stream_togg 6 1 Stream 6 No
111 stream_data stream_togg 7 1 Stream 7 No
112 stream_data stream_togg 8 1 Stream 8 No
113 doutcur 1 1 No
114 doutcur 2 1 No
115 doutcur 3 1 No
116 doutcur 4 1 No
117 doutcur 5 1 No
Numeric(Registers)
0 stream_data avg_molwgt 1 1 Char 4 Stream 1 No
2 analysis molpct 1 1 Char 4 C6+ 47/35/17 0 - 1 No
3 analysis molpct 1 2 Integer PROPANE 0 - 1 No
4 analysis molpct 1 3 Integer i-BUTANE 0 - 1 No
5 analysis molpct 1 4 Integer n-BUTANE 0 - 1 No
6 analysis molpct 1 5 Float NEOPENTANE No
8 analysis molpct 1 6 Float i-PENTANE No
10 analysis molpct 1 7 Float n-PENTANE No
12 analysis molpct 1 8 Float NITROGEN No
14 analysis molpct 1 9 Float METHANE No
16 analysis molpct 2 9 Float METHANE No
18 analysis molpct 3 9 Float METHANE No
20 analysis molpct 4 9 Float METHANE No
22 analysis molpct 5 9 Float METHANE No
24 analysis molpct 5 10 Float CARBON DIOXIDE No
26 analysis molpct 5 11 Float ETHANE No
28 analysis molpct 6 11 Float ETHANE No
30 analysis molpct 7 11 Float ETHANE No
32 analysis molpct 8 11 Float ETHANE No
SIM_2251
-------------
Modbus Variable Field Indices Override
Reg. Name Name S C Keylock?
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boolean(Coils)
16-Bit Integer
3001 sim_compno 1 1 No
3002 sim_compno 2 1 No
3003 sim_compno 3 1 No
3004 sim_compno 4 1 No
3005 sim_compno 5 1 No
3006 sim_compno 6 1 No
3007 sim_compno 7 1 No
3008 sim_compno 8 1 No
3009 sim_compno 9 1 No
3010 sim_compno 10 1 No
3011 sim_compno 11 1 No
3012 sim_compno 12 1 No
3013 sim_compno 13 1 No
3014 sim_compno 14 1 No
3015 sim_compno 15 1 No
3016 sim_compno 16 1 No
3017 sim_compno 1 1 No
3018 sim_compno 2 1 No
3019 sim_compno 3 1 No
3020 sim_compno 4 1 No
3021 sim_compno 5 1 No
3022 sim_compno 6 1 No
3023 sim_compno 7 1 No
3024 sim_compno 8 1 No
3025 sim_compno 9 1 No
3026 sim_compno 10 1 No
3027 sim_compno 11 1 No
3028 sim_compno 12 1 No
3029 sim_compno 13 1 No
3030 sim_compno 14 1 No
3031 sim_compno 15 1 No
3032 sim_compno 16 1 No
3033 sim_anlytime 1 1 No
3034 sim_stream 1 1 No
3035 sim_smask 1 1 No
3036 sim_month 1 1 No
3037 sim_day 1 1 No
3038 sim_year 1 1 No
3039 sim_hour 1 1 No
3040 sim_min 1 1 No
3041 sim_cycmonth 1 1 No
3042 sim_cycday 1 1 No
3043 sim_cycyear 1 1 No
3044 sim_cychour 1 1 No
3045 sim_cycmin 1 1 No
3046 sim_alarm 1 1 No
3047 sim_alarm 2 1 No
3048 sim_alarm 3 1 No
3049 sim_alarm 4 1 No
3050 sim_alarm 5 1 No
3051 sim_alarm 6 1 No
3052 sim_alarm 7 1 No
3053 sim_alarm 8 1 No
3054 sim_alarm 9 1 No
3055 sim_alarm 10 1 No
3056 sim_alarm 11 1 No
3057 sim_alarm 12 1 No
3058 sim_newdata 1 1 No
3059 sim_cal 1 1 No
32-Bit Integer
5001 sim_cyctime 1 1 No
5002 sim_calcycle 1 1 No
Floating-Point
7001 sim_molpct 1 1 No
7002 sim_molpct 2 1 No
7003 sim_molpct 3 1 No
7004 sim_molpct 4 1 No
7005 sim_molpct 5 1 No
7006 sim_molpct 6 1 No
7007 sim_molpct 7 1 No
7008 sim_molpct 8 1 No
7009 sim_molpct 9 1 No
7010 sim_molpct 10 1 No
7011 sim_molpct 11 1 No
7012 sim_molpct 12 1 No
7013 sim_molpct 13 1 No
7014 sim_molpct 14 1 No
7015 sim_molpct 15 1 No
7016 sim_molpct 16 1 No
7017 sim_gpmwt 1 1 No
7018 sim_gpmwt 2 1 No
7019 sim_gpmwt 3 1 No
7020 sim_gpmwt 4 1 No
7021 sim_gpmwt 5 1 No
7022 sim_gpmwt 6 1 No
7023 sim_gpmwt 7 1 No
7024 sim_gpmwt 8 1 No
7025 sim_gpmwt 9 1 No
7026 sim_gpmwt 10 1 No
7027 sim_gpmwt 11 1 No
7028 sim_gpmwt 12 1 No
7029 sim_gpmwt 13 1 No
7030 sim_gpmwt 14 1 No
7031 sim_gpmwt 15 1 No
7032 sim_gpmwt 16 1 No
7033 sim_dbtu 1 1 No
7034 sim_sbtu 1 1 No
7035 sim_rden_gas 1 1 No
7036 sim_compress 1 1 No
7037 sim_wobbe 1 1 No
7038 sim_unnormal 1 1 No
7039 sim_totgpm 1 1 No
7040 calcval 1 1 label 1 No
7041 calcval 2 1 label 2 No
7042 calcval 3 1 No
7043 calcval 4 1 No
7044 calcval 5 1 No
7045 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7046 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7047 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7048 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7049 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7050 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7051 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7052 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7053 sim_dummy 1 1 No
7054 sim_abtu 1 1 No
7055 avgs avg 1 1 Not Used No
7056 avgs avg 2 1 Not Used No
7057 avgs avg 3 1 Not Used No
7058 avgs avg 4 1 Not Used No
7059 avgs avg 5 1 Not Used No
7060 avgs avg 6 1 Not Used No
7061 avgs avg 7 1 Not Used No
7062 avgs avg 8 1 Not Used No
7063 avgs avg 9 1 Not Used No
7064 avgs avg 10 1 Not Used No
7065 avgs avg 11 1 Not Used No
7066 avgs avg 12 1 Not Used No
7067 avgs avg 13 1 Not Used No
7068 avgs avg 14 1 Not Used No
7069 avgs avg 15 1 Not Used No
7070 avg_archive1 avg 1 1 Not Used No
7071 avg_archive1 avg 2 1 Not Used No
7072 avg_archive1 avg 3 1 Not Used No
7073 avg_archive1 avg 4 1 Not Used No
7074 avg_archive1 avg 5 1 Not Used No
7075 avg_archive1 avg 6 1 Not Used No
7076 avg_archive1 avg 7 1 Not Used No
7077 avg_archive1 avg 8 1 Not Used No
7078 avg_archive1 avg 9 1 Not Used No
7079 avg_archive1 avg 10 1 Not Used No
7080 avg_archive1 avg 11 1 Not Used No
7081 avg_archive1 avg 12 1 Not Used No
7082 avg_archive1 avg 13 1 Not Used No
7083 avg_archive1 avg 14 1 Not Used No
7084 avg_archive1 avg 15 1 Not Used No
7085 aincur 1 1 AI 1 No
7086 aincur 2 1 No
7087 sim_cal_abtu 1 1 No
7088 sim_cal_dbtu 1 1 No
7089 sim_cal_sbtu 1 1 No
7090 sim_cal_wobb 1 1 No
7091 sim_cal_rden 1 1 No
7092 sim_cal_comp 1 1 No
7093 sim_cal_gpm 1 1 No
7094 sim_cal_unno 1 1 No
7095 sim_rf 1 1 No
7096 sim_rf 2 1 No
7097 sim_rf 3 1 No
7098 sim_rf 4 1 No
7099 sim_rf 5 1 No
7100 sim_rf 6 1 No
7101 sim_rf 7 1 No
7102 sim_rf 8 1 No
7103 sim_rf 9 1 No
7104 sim_rf 10 1 No
7105 sim_rf 11 1 No
7106 sim_rf 12 1 No
7107 sim_rf 13 1 No
7108 sim_rf 14 1 No
7109 sim_rf 15 1 No
7110 sim_rf 16 1 No
7111 sim_rf 1 1 No
7112 sim_rf 2 1 No
7113 sim_rf 3 1 No
7114 sim_rf 4 1 No
7115 sim_rf 5 1 No
7116 sim_rf 6 1 No
7117 sim_rf 7 1 No
7118 sim_rf 8 1 No
7119 sim_rf 9 1 No
7120 sim_rf 10 1 No
7121 sim_rf 11 1 No
7122 sim_rf 12 1 No
7123 sim_rf 13 1 No
7124 sim_rf 14 1 No
7125 sim_rf 15 1 No
7126 sim_rf 16 1 No
7127 avgs avg 1 1 Not Used No
7128 avgs avg 2 1 Not Used No
7129 avgs avg 3 1 Not Used No
7130 avgs avg 4 1 Not Used No
7131 avgs avg 5 1 Not Used No
7132 avgs avg 6 1 Not Used No
7133 avgs avg 7 1 Not Used No
7134 avgs avg 8 1 Not Used No
7135 avgs avg 9 1 Not Used No
7136 avgs avg 10 1 Not Used No
7137 avgs avg 11 1 Not Used No
7138 avgs avg 12 1 Not Used No
7139 avgs avg 13 1 Not Used No
7140 avgs avg 14 1 Not Used No
7141 avgs avg 15 1 Not Used No
7142 avgs avg 16 1 Not Used No
7143 avgs avg 17 1 Not Used No
7144 avgs avg 18 1 Not Used No
7145 avgs avg 19 1 Not Used No
7146 avgs avg 20 1 Not Used No
7147 avgs avg 21 1 Not Used No
7148 avgs avg 22 1 Not Used No
7149 avgs avg 23 1 Not Used No
7150 avgs avg 24 1 Not Used No
7151 avgs avg 25 1 Not Used No
7152 avgs avg 26 1 Not Used No
7153 avgs avg 27 1 Not Used No
7154 avgs avg 28 1 Not Used No
7155 avgs avg 29 1 Not Used No
7156 avgs avg 30 1 Not Used No
7157 avgs avg 31 1 Not Used No
7158 avgs avg 32 1 Not Used No
7159 avgs avg 33 1 Not Used No
7160 avgs avg 34 1 Not Used No
7161 avgs avg 35 1 Not Used No
7162 avgs avg 36 1 Not Used No
7163 avgs maximum 1 1 Not Used No
7164 avgs maximum 2 1 Not Used No
7165 avgs maximum 3 1 Not Used No
7166 avgs maximum 4 1 Not Used No
7167 avgs maximum 5 1 Not Used No
7168 avgs maximum 6 1 Not Used No
7169 avgs maximum 7 1 Not Used No
7170 avgs maximum 8 1 Not Used No
7171 avgs maximum 9 1 Not Used No
7172 avgs maximum 10 1 Not Used No
7173 avgs maximum 11 1 Not Used No
7174 avgs maximum 12 1 Not Used No
7175 avgs maximum 13 1 Not Used No
7176 avgs maximum 14 1 Not Used No
7177 avgs maximum 15 1 Not Used No
7178 avgs maximum 16 1 Not Used No
7179 avgs maximum 17 1 Not Used No
7180 avgs maximum 18 1 Not Used No
7181 avgs maximum 19 1 Not Used No
7182 avgs maximum 20 1 Not Used No
7183 avgs maximum 21 1 Not Used No
7184 avgs maximum 22 1 Not Used No
7185 avgs maximum 23 1 Not Used No
7186 avgs maximum 24 1 Not Used No
7187 avgs maximum 25 1 Not Used No
7188 avgs maximum 26 1 Not Used No
7189 avgs maximum 27 1 Not Used No
7190 avgs maximum 28 1 Not Used No
7191 avgs maximum 29 1 Not Used No
7192 avgs maximum 30 1 Not Used No
7193 avgs maximum 31 1 Not Used No
7194 avgs maximum 32 1 Not Used No
7195 avgs maximum 33 1 Not Used No
7196 avgs maximum 34 1 Not Used No
7197 avgs maximum 35 1 Not Used No
7198 avgs maximum 36 1 Not Used No
7199 avgs minimum 1 1 Not Used No
7200 avgs minimum 2 1 Not Used No
7201 avgs minimum 3 1 Not Used No
7202 avgs minimum 4 1 Not Used No
7203 avgs minimum 5 1 Not Used No
7204 avgs minimum 6 1 Not Used No
7205 avgs minimum 7 1 Not Used No
7206 avgs minimum 8 1 Not Used No
7207 avgs minimum 9 1 Not Used No
7208 avgs minimum 10 1 Not Used No
7209 avgs minimum 11 1 Not Used No
7210 avgs minimum 12 1 Not Used No
7211 avgs minimum 13 1 Not Used No
7212 avgs minimum 14 1 Not Used No
7213 avgs minimum 15 1 Not Used No
7214 avgs minimum 16 1 Not Used No
7215 avgs minimum 17 1 Not Used No
7216 avgs minimum 18 1 Not Used No
7217 avgs minimum 19 1 Not Used No
7218 avgs minimum 20 1 Not Used No
7219 avgs minimum 21 1 Not Used No
7220 avgs minimum 22 1 Not Used No
7221 avgs minimum 23 1 Not Used No
7222 avgs minimum 24 1 Not Used No
7223 avgs minimum 25 1 Not Used No
7224 avgs minimum 26 1 Not Used No
7225 avgs minimum 27 1 Not Used No
7226 avgs minimum 28 1 Not Used No
7227 avgs minimum 29 1 Not Used No
7228 avgs minimum 30 1 Not Used No
7229 avgs minimum 31 1 Not Used No
7230 avgs minimum 32 1 Not Used No
7231 avgs minimum 33 1 Not Used No
7232 avgs minimum 34 1 Not Used No
7233 avgs minimum 35 1 Not Used No
7234 avgs minimum 36 1 Not Used No
7235 avg_archive1 avg 1 1 Not Used No
7236 avg_archive1 avg 2 1 Not Used No
7237 avg_archive1 avg 3 1 Not Used No
7238 avg_archive1 avg 4 1 Not Used No
7239 avg_archive1 avg 5 1 Not Used No
7240 avg_archive1 avg 6 1 Not Used No
7241 avg_archive1 avg 7 1 Not Used No
7242 avg_archive1 avg 8 1 Not Used No
7243 avg_archive1 avg 9 1 Not Used No
7244 avg_archive1 avg 10 1 Not Used No
7245 avg_archive1 avg 11 1 Not Used No
7246 avg_archive1 avg 12 1 Not Used No
7247 avg_archive1 avg 13 1 Not Used No
7248 avg_archive1 avg 14 1 Not Used No
7249 avg_archive1 avg 15 1 Not Used No
7250 avg_archive1 avg 16 1 Not Used No
7251 avg_archive1 avg 17 1 Not Used No
7252 avg_archive1 avg 18 1 Not Used No
7253 avg_archive1 avg 19 1 Not Used No
7254 avg_archive1 avg 20 1 Not Used No
7255 avg_archive1 avg 21 1 Not Used No
7256 avg_archive1 avg 22 1 Not Used No
7257 avg_archive1 avg 23 1 Not Used No
7258 avg_archive1 avg 24 1 Not Used No
7259 avg_archive1 avg 25 1 Not Used No
7260 avg_archive1 avg 26 1 Not Used No
7261 avg_archive1 avg 27 1 Not Used No
7262 avg_archive1 avg 28 1 Not Used No
7263 avg_archive1 avg 29 1 Not Used No
7264 avg_archive1 avg 30 1 Not Used No
7265 avg_archive1 avg 31 1 Not Used No
7266 avg_archive1 avg 32 1 Not Used No
7267 avg_archive1 avg 33 1 Not Used No
7268 avg_archive1 avg 34 1 Not Used No
7269 avg_archive1 avg 35 1 Not Used No
7270 avg_archive1 avg 36 1 Not Used No
7271 avg_archive1 maximum 1 1 Not Used No
7272 avg_archive1 maximum 2 1 Not Used No
7273 avg_archive1 maximum 3 1 Not Used No
7274 avg_archive1 maximum 4 1 Not Used No
7275 avg_archive1 maximum 5 1 Not Used No
7276 avg_archive1 maximum 6 1 Not Used No
7277 avg_archive1 maximum 7 1 Not Used No
7278 avg_archive1 maximum 8 1 Not Used No
7279 avg_archive1 maximum 9 1 Not Used No
7280 avg_archive1 maximum 10 1 Not Used No
7281 avg_archive1 maximum 11 1 Not Used No
7282 avg_archive1 maximum 12 1 Not Used No
7283 avg_archive1 maximum 13 1 Not Used No
7284 avg_archive1 maximum 14 1 Not Used No
7285 avg_archive1 maximum 15 1 Not Used No
7286 avg_archive1 maximum 16 1 Not Used No
7287 avg_archive1 maximum 17 1 Not Used No
7288 avg_archive1 maximum 18 1 Not Used No
7289 avg_archive1 maximum 19 1 Not Used No
7290 avg_archive1 maximum 20 1 Not Used No
7291 avg_archive1 maximum 21 1 Not Used No
7292 avg_archive1 maximum 22 1 Not Used No
7293 avg_archive1 maximum 23 1 Not Used No
7294 avg_archive1 maximum 24 1 Not Used No
7295 avg_archive1 maximum 25 1 Not Used No
7296 avg_archive1 maximum 26 1 Not Used No
7297 avg_archive1 maximum 27 1 Not Used No
7298 avg_archive1 maximum 28 1 Not Used No
7299 avg_archive1 maximum 29 1 Not Used No
7300 avg_archive1 maximum 30 1 Not Used No
7301 avg_archive1 maximum 31 1 Not Used No
7302 avg_archive1 maximum 32 1 Not Used No
7303 avg_archive1 maximum 33 1 Not Used No
7304 avg_archive1 maximum 34 1 Not Used No
7305 avg_archive1 maximum 35 1 Not Used No
7306 avg_archive1 maximum 36 1 Not Used No
7307 avg_archive1 minimum 1 1 Not Used No
7308 avg_archive1 minimum 2 1 Not Used No
7309 avg_archive1 minimum 3 1 Not Used No
7310 avg_archive1 minimum 4 1 Not Used No
7311 avg_archive1 minimum 5 1 Not Used No
7312 avg_archive1 minimum 6 1 Not Used No
7313 avg_archive1 minimum 7 1 Not Used No
7314 avg_archive1 minimum 8 1 Not Used No
7315 avg_archive1 minimum 9 1 Not Used No
7316 avg_archive1 minimum 10 1 Not Used No
7317 avg_archive1 minimum 11 1 Not Used No
7318 avg_archive1 minimum 12 1 Not Used No
7319 avg_archive1 minimum 13 1 Not Used No
7320 avg_archive1 minimum 14 1 Not Used No
7321 avg_archive1 minimum 15 1 Not Used No
7322 avg_archive1 minimum 16 1 Not Used No
7323 avg_archive1 minimum 17 1 Not Used No
7324 avg_archive1 minimum 18 1 Not Used No
7325 avg_archive1 minimum 19 1 Not Used No
7326 avg_archive1 minimum 20 1 Not Used No
7327 avg_archive1 minimum 21 1 Not Used No
7328 avg_archive1 minimum 22 1 Not Used No
7329 avg_archive1 minimum 23 1 Not Used No
7330 avg_archive1 minimum 24 1 Not Used No
7331 avg_archive1 minimum 25 1 Not Used No
7332 avg_archive1 minimum 26 1 Not Used No
7333 avg_archive1 minimum 27 1 Not Used No
7334 avg_archive1 minimum 28 1 Not Used No
7335 avg_archive1 minimum 29 1 Not Used No
7336 avg_archive1 minimum 30 1 Not Used No
7337 avg_archive1 minimum 31 1 Not Used No
7338 avg_archive1 minimum 32 1 Not Used No
7339 avg_archive1 minimum 33 1 Not Used No
7340 avg_archive1 minimum 34 1 Not Used No
7341 avg_archive1 minimum 35 1 Not Used No
7342 avg_archive1 minimum 36 1 Not Used No
7343 avg_archive1 avg 1 2 Not Used No
7344 avg_archive1 avg 2 2 Not Used No
7345 avg_archive1 avg 3 2 Not Used No
7346 avg_archive1 avg 4 2 Not Used No
7347 avg_archive1 avg 5 2 Not Used No
7348 avg_archive1 avg 6 2 Not Used No
7349 avg_archive1 avg 7 2 Not Used No
7350 avg_archive1 avg 8 2 Not Used No
7351 avg_archive1 avg 9 2 Not Used No
7352 avg_archive1 avg 10 2 Not Used No
7353 avg_archive1 avg 11 2 Not Used No
7354 avg_archive1 avg 12 2 Not Used No
7355 avg_archive1 avg 13 2 Not Used No
7356 avg_archive1 avg 14 2 Not Used No
7357 avg_archive1 avg 15 2 Not Used No
7358 avg_archive1 avg 16 2 Not Used No
7359 avg_archive1 avg 17 2 Not Used No
7360 avg_archive1 avg 18 2 Not Used No
7361 avg_archive1 avg 19 2 Not Used No
7362 avg_archive1 avg 20 2 Not Used No
7363 avg_archive1 avg 21 2 Not Used No
7364 avg_archive1 avg 22 2 Not Used No
7365 avg_archive1 avg 23 2 Not Used No
7366 avg_archive1 avg 24 2 Not Used No
7367 avg_archive1 avg 25 2 Not Used No
7368 avg_archive1 avg 26 2 Not Used No
7369 avg_archive1 avg 27 2 Not Used No
7370 avg_archive1 avg 28 2 Not Used No
7371 avg_archive1 avg 29 2 Not Used No
7372 avg_archive1 avg 30 2 Not Used No
7373 avg_archive1 avg 31 2 Not Used No
7374 avg_archive1 avg 32 2 Not Used No
7375 avg_archive1 avg 33 2 Not Used No
7376 avg_archive1 avg 34 2 Not Used No
7377 avg_archive1 avg 35 2 Not Used No
7378 avg_archive1 avg 36 2 Not Used No
7379 avg_archive1 maximum 1 2 Not Used No
7380 avg_archive1 maximum 2 2 Not Used No
7381 avg_archive1 maximum 3 2 Not Used No
7382 avg_archive1 maximum 4 2 Not Used No
7383 avg_archive1 maximum 5 2 Not Used No
7384 avg_archive1 maximum 6 2 Not Used No
7385 avg_archive1 maximum 7 2 Not Used No
7386 avg_archive1 maximum 8 2 Not Used No
7387 avg_archive1 maximum 9 2 Not Used No
7388 avg_archive1 maximum 10 2 Not Used No
7389 avg_archive1 maximum 11 2 Not Used No
7390 avg_archive1 maximum 12 2 Not Used No
7391 avg_archive1 maximum 13 2 Not Used No
7392 avg_archive1 maximum 14 2 Not Used No
7393 avg_archive1 maximum 15 2 Not Used No
7394 avg_archive1 maximum 16 2 Not Used No
7395 avg_archive1 maximum 17 2 Not Used No
7396 avg_archive1 maximum 18 2 Not Used No
7397 avg_archive1 maximum 19 2 Not Used No
7398 avg_archive1 maximum 20 2 Not Used No
7399 avg_archive1 maximum 21 2 Not Used No
7400 avg_archive1 maximum 22 2 Not Used No
7401 avg_archive1 maximum 23 2 Not Used No
7402 avg_archive1 maximum 24 2 Not Used No
7403 avg_archive1 maximum 25 2 Not Used No
7404 avg_archive1 maximum 26 2 Not Used No
7405 avg_archive1 maximum 27 2 Not Used No
7406 avg_archive1 maximum 28 2 Not Used No
7407 avg_archive1 maximum 29 2 Not Used No
7408 avg_archive1 maximum 30 2 Not Used No
7409 avg_archive1 maximum 31 2 Not Used No
7410 avg_archive1 maximum 32 2 Not Used No
7411 avg_archive1 maximum 33 2 Not Used No
7412 avg_archive1 maximum 34 2 Not Used No
7413 avg_archive1 maximum 35 2 Not Used No
7414 avg_archive1 maximum 36 2 Not Used No
7415 avg_archive1 minimum 1 2 Not Used No
7416 avg_archive1 minimum 2 2 Not Used No
7417 avg_archive1 minimum 3 2 Not Used No
7418 avg_archive1 minimum 4 2 Not Used No
7419 avg_archive1 minimum 5 2 Not Used No
7420 avg_archive1 minimum 6 2 Not Used No
7421 avg_archive1 minimum 7 2 Not Used No
7422 avg_archive1 minimum 8 2 Not Used No
7423 avg_archive1 minimum 9 2 Not Used No
7424 avg_archive1 minimum 10 2 Not Used No
7425 avg_archive1 minimum 11 2 Not Used No
7426 avg_archive1 minimum 12 2 Not Used No
7427 avg_archive1 minimum 13 2 Not Used No
7428 avg_archive1 minimum 14 2 Not Used No
7429 avg_archive1 minimum 15 2 Not Used No
7430 avg_archive1 minimum 16 2 Not Used No
7431 avg_archive1 minimum 17 2 Not Used No
7432 avg_archive1 minimum 18 2 Not Used No
7433 avg_archive1 minimum 19 2 Not Used No
7434 avg_archive1 minimum 20 2 Not Used No
7435 avg_archive1 minimum 21 2 Not Used No
7436 avg_archive1 minimum 22 2 Not Used No
7437 avg_archive1 minimum 23 2 Not Used No
7438 avg_archive1 minimum 24 2 Not Used No
7439 avg_archive1 minimum 25 2 Not Used No
7440 avg_archive1 minimum 26 2 Not Used No
7441 avg_archive1 minimum 27 2 Not Used No
7442 avg_archive1 minimum 28 2 Not Used No
7443 avg_archive1 minimum 29 2 Not Used No
7444 avg_archive1 minimum 30 2 Not Used No
7445 avg_archive1 minimum 31 2 Not Used No
7446 avg_archive1 minimum 32 2 Not Used No
7447 avg_archive1 minimum 33 2 Not Used No
7448 avg_archive1 minimum 34 2 Not Used No
7449 avg_archive1 minimum 35 2 Not Used No
7450 avg_archive1 minimum 36 2 Not Used No
7451 avg_archive1 avg 1 3 Not Used No
7452 avg_archive1 avg 2 3 Not Used No
7453 avg_archive1 avg 3 3 Not Used No
7454 avg_archive1 avg 4 3 Not Used No
7455 avg_archive1 avg 5 3 Not Used No
7456 avg_archive1 avg 6 3 Not Used No
7457 avg_archive1 avg 7 3 Not Used No
7458 avg_archive1 avg 8 3 Not Used No
7459 avg_archive1 avg 9 3 Not Used No
7460 avg_archive1 avg 10 3 Not Used No
7461 avg_archive1 avg 11 3 Not Used No
7462 avg_archive1 avg 12 3 Not Used No
7463 avg_archive1 avg 13 3 Not Used No
7464 avg_archive1 avg 14 3 Not Used No
7465 avg_archive1 avg 15 3 Not Used No
7466 avg_archive1 avg 16 3 Not Used No
7467 avg_archive1 avg 17 3 Not Used No
7468 avg_archive1 avg 18 3 Not Used No
7469 avg_archive1 avg 19 3 Not Used No
7470 avg_archive1 avg 20 3 Not Used No
7471 avg_archive1 avg 21 3 Not Used No
7472 avg_archive1 avg 22 3 Not Used No
7473 avg_archive1 avg 23 3 Not Used No
7474 avg_archive1 avg 24 3 Not Used No
7475 avg_archive1 avg 25 3 Not Used No
7476 avg_archive1 avg 26 3 Not Used No
7477 avg_archive1 avg 27 3 Not Used No
7478 avg_archive1 avg 28 3 Not Used No
7479 avg_archive1 avg 29 3 Not Used No
7480 avg_archive1 avg 30 3 Not Used No
7481 avg_archive1 avg 31 3 Not Used No
7482 avg_archive1 avg 32 3 Not Used No
7483 avg_archive1 avg 33 3 Not Used No
7484 avg_archive1 avg 34 3 Not Used No
7485 avg_archive1 avg 35 3 Not Used No
7486 avg_archive1 avg 36 3 Not Used No
7487 avg_archive1 maximum 1 3 Not Used No
7488 avg_archive1 maximum 2 3 Not Used No
7489 avg_archive1 maximum 3 3 Not Used No
7490 avg_archive1 maximum 4 3 Not Used No
7491 avg_archive1 maximum 5 3 Not Used No
7492 avg_archive1 maximum 6 3 Not Used No
7493 avg_archive1 maximum 7 3 Not Used No
7494 avg_archive1 maximum 8 3 Not Used No
7495 avg_archive1 maximum 9 3 Not Used No
7496 avg_archive1 maximum 10 3 Not Used No
7497 avg_archive1 maximum 11 3 Not Used No
7498 avg_archive1 maximum 12 3 Not Used No
7499 avg_archive1 maximum 13 3 Not Used No
7500 avg_archive1 maximum 14 3 Not Used No
7501 avg_archive1 maximum 15 3 Not Used No
7502 avg_archive1 maximum 16 3 Not Used No
7503 avg_archive1 maximum 17 3 Not Used No
7504 avg_archive1 maximum 18 3 Not Used No
7505 avg_archive1 maximum 19 3 Not Used No
7506 avg_archive1 maximum 20 3 Not Used No
7507 avg_archive1 maximum 21 3 Not Used No
7508 avg_archive1 maximum 22 3 Not Used No
7509 avg_archive1 maximum 23 3 Not Used No
7510 avg_archive1 maximum 24 3 Not Used No
7511 avg_archive1 maximum 25 3 Not Used No
7512 avg_archive1 maximum 26 3 Not Used No
7513 avg_archive1 maximum 27 3 Not Used No
7514 avg_archive1 maximum 28 3 Not Used No
7515 avg_archive1 maximum 29 3 Not Used No
7516 avg_archive1 maximum 30 3 Not Used No
7517 avg_archive1 maximum 31 3 Not Used No
7518 avg_archive1 maximum 32 3 Not Used No
7519 avg_archive1 maximum 33 3 Not Used No
7520 avg_archive1 maximum 34 3 Not Used No
7521 avg_archive1 maximum 35 3 Not Used No
7522 avg_archive1 maximum 36 3 Not Used No
7523 avg_archive1 minimum 1 3 Not Used No
7524 avg_archive1 minimum 2 3 Not Used No
7525 avg_archive1 minimum 3 3 Not Used No
7526 avg_archive1 minimum 4 3 Not Used No
7527 avg_archive1 minimum 5 3 Not Used No
7528 avg_archive1 minimum 6 3 Not Used No
7529 avg_archive1 minimum 7 3 Not Used No
7530 avg_archive1 minimum 8 3 Not Used No
7531 avg_archive1 minimum 9 3 Not Used No
7532 avg_archive1 minimum 10 3 Not Used No
7533 avg_archive1 minimum 11 3 Not Used No
7534 avg_archive1 minimum 12 3 Not Used No
7535 avg_archive1 minimum 13 3 Not Used No
7536 avg_archive1 minimum 14 3 Not Used No
7537 avg_archive1 minimum 15 3 Not Used No
7538 avg_archive1 minimum 16 3 Not Used No
7539 avg_archive1 minimum 17 3 Not Used No
7540 avg_archive1 minimum 18 3 Not Used No
7541 avg_archive1 minimum 19 3 Not Used No
7542 avg_archive1 minimum 20 3 Not Used No
7543 avg_archive1 minimum 21 3 Not Used No
7544 avg_archive1 minimum 22 3 Not Used No
7545 avg_archive1 minimum 23 3 Not Used No
7546 avg_archive1 minimum 24 3 Not Used No
7547 avg_archive1 minimum 25 3 Not Used No
7548 avg_archive1 minimum 26 3 Not Used No
7549 avg_archive1 minimum 27 3 Not Used No
7550 avg_archive1 minimum 28 3 Not Used No
7551 avg_archive1 minimum 29 3 Not Used No
7552 avg_archive1 minimum 30 3 Not Used No
7553 avg_archive1 minimum 31 3 Not Used No
7554 avg_archive1 minimum 32 3 Not Used No
7555 avg_archive1 minimum 33 3 Not Used No
7556 avg_archive1 minimum 34 3 Not Used No
7557 avg_archive1 minimum 35 3 Not Used No
PC CONFIG REPORT A-61
MON2000
JULY 2010 Example Report
7558 avg_archive1 minimum 36 3 Not Used
No
***************************************************************************
*******
***************************************************************************
*****
TCP/IP Report from Model 2350A
4/28/2005 2:00:51 PM
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----
Usage PC
Comm ID 0
Host Name DANIELGC
Use DHCP/Specify an IP address Specify an IP Address
IP Address 172.16.23.128
Subnet Mask 255.255.240.0
Gateway 172.16.16.2
Read/Write RW
***************************************************************************
*****
Temperature Control Report from Model 2350A
4/28/2005 2:00:52 PM
Loop 1 2 3 4
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----
Mode Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic
Prop Gain 60 60 60 60
Reset 600 600 600 600
Rate 1 1 1 1
D Filter 5 5 5 5
Setpoint 82 84 40 350
***************************************************************************
*****
End of Report
A-62 PC CONFIG REPORT
MON2000
Example Report JULY 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
JULY 2010 B-1
A
APPENDIX B: COMPONENT DATA TABLE
This appendix provides a sample standard component data table as well
as a table of the ISO-related components.
•Table B-1, Example Standard Component Data Table
•Table B-2, ISO Component Data Table
All values depend on a base pressure of 14.73 PSIA and a base
temperature of 60 oF (15.56 oC).
BTU components that are listed in Table B-1 reference GPA Standard
2145-09. The ISO component data table references ISO Standard 6976:
1995(E).
NOTE: An asterisk (*) denotes components that are assigned
temporary I.D. codes, starting with 150, as they are used.
B-2
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Component Data Table JULY 2010
Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table
Component
Name
Mol
Wt
Reid
Vapor
Rel Dens
Gas
Rel Dens
Liquid Lb/Gal
GPM
Factor
Gross Dry
BTU
Net Dry
BTU
AGA 8
Component
Daniel
Sim 2251
I.D. No.
Acetylene 26.04 0 0.899 0.615 0 0 1476.9 1426.5 Ethane 22
Air 28.9625 0 1 0.87586 7.3022 0.104759 0 0 Airmix1 26
Argon 39.95 0 1.3792 0 0 0 0 0 Argon 46
Ammonia 17.03 212 0.588 0.6173 5.15 0.0874 435.4 359.8 None *
Benzene 78.11 3.224 2.6969 0.8844 7.373 0.2798 3750.5 3599.2 n-Hexane *
Butanes 58.1222 62.1055 2.0068 0.573515 4.78155 0.32117 3264.64 3012.45 n-Butane 33
Butene-1 56.11 63.05 1.9372 0.6013 5.013 0.2956 3087 2885.4 n-Butane 28
Butenes 56.11 55.448 1.9372 0.6097 5.0833 0.2916 3077.4 2875.73 n-Butane 32
1,2-Butadiene 54.09 20 1.8676 0.658 5.486 0.2604 2946.7 2795.5 n-Butane 35
1,3-Butadiene 54.09 60 1.8676 0.6272 5.229 0.2732 2886.6 2735.3 n-Butane 34
C3+ 44.0956 188.62 1.5225 0.50719 4.2285 0.275429 2521.92 2320.36 Propane 47
C4+ 58.1222 51.567 2.0068 0.5842 4.8706 0.315183 3269.85 3017.97 n-Butane 48
C4=1 56.11 63.05 1.9372 0.6013 5.013 0.2956 3087 2885.4 n-Butane 29
C5+ 72.1488 15.576 2.4911 0.63071 5.2584 0.362396 4017.97 3715.58 n-Pentane 49
C6+ 47/35/17 95.9558 3.01891 3.31309 0.679907 5.66853 0.446214 5288.71 4900.62 C6mix1 08
C6+ 50/50/00 93.1887 3.29 3.21755 0.676145 5.63715 0.43619 5141.12 4762.99 C6mix2 09
C6+ Gpa 2261-99 93.1887 3.51579 3.21755 0.67556 5.63228 0.436267 5141.09 4762.99 C6mix3 10
B-3
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
JULY 2010 Component Data Table
C6+ 57/28/14 94.1904 3.37386 3.25214 0.677036 5.64458 0.439881 5194.53 4812.82 C6mix4 11
Carbon Monoxide 28.01 0 0.9671 0.801 6.68 0 321.2 321.2 CO 15
Carbon Dioxide 44.0095 0 1.5195 0.81716 6.8129 0.170618 0 0 CO2 17
Cis-2-Butene 56.11 45.54 1.9372 0.6271 5.228 0.2835 3079.3 2877.6 n-Butane 31
COS 60.08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 42
CS2 76.14 0 2.6298 0 0 0 1267 1267 None 41
Cyclohexane 84.16 3.264 2.9057 0.7834 6.531 0.3403 4492.1 4189.4 n-Hexane *
Cyclopentane 70.14 9.914 2.4215 0.7504 6.256 0.2961 3772.4 3520.2 n-Pentane *
Diisobutyl 114.23 1.101 3.9439 0.6979 5.819 0.5185 6247.9 5793.9 n-Octane *
2,3-Dimethbutan 86.18 7.404 2.9753 0.6664 5.556 0.4096 4756 4403.1 n-Hexane *
2,2-Dimethpenta 100.21 3.492 3.4596 0.6782 5.654 0.4682 5494.6 5091.4 n-Heptane *
2,4-Dimethpenta 100.21 3.292 3.4596 0.6773 5.647 0.4686 5499.4 5096 n-Heptane *
3,3-Dimethpenta 100.2 2.773 3.4596 0.6976 5.816 0.455 5501.5 5098.2 n-Heptane *
Ethane 30.069 800 1.0382 0.35628 2.9704 0.267369 1773.79 1622.75 Ethane 01
Ethyl Alcohol 46.07 2.3 1.5906 0.794 6.62 0.1839 1602.8 1451.5 None *
Ethylbenzene 106.17 0.371 3.6655 0.8718 7.268 0.3858 5234.3 4982 n-Octane *
Ethylene 28.0532 0 0.9686 0 0 0 1603.4 1502.47 Ethane 21
Ethylene Oxide 44.05 0 1.49 0 0 0 1459.4 1410.2 None 36
3-Ethylpentane 100.21 2.012 3.4596 0.7028 5.859 0.4517 5513.4 5110.1 n-Heptane *
Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)
Component
Name
Mol
Wt
Reid
Vapor
Rel Dens
Gas
Rel Dens
Liquid Lb/Gal
GPM
Factor
Gross Dry
BTU
Net Dry
BTU
AGA 8
Component
Daniel
Sim 2251
I.D. No.
B-4
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Component Data Table JULY 2010
H2S 34.0809 395 1.1767 0.79886 6.6602 0.135156 638.57 588.15 H2S 40
HCL 36.46 925 1.2588 0.8558 7.135 0.1349 0 0 None *
Helium 4.0026 0 0.1382 0.12486 1.041 0.101559 0 0 Helium 13
Hydrogen 2.02 0 0.0696 0.07 0 0 325 274.4 Hydrogen 12
i-Butane 58.1222 72.644 2.0068 0.56283 4.6925 0.327158 3259.42 3006.94 i-Butane 03
i-Butene 56.11 63.4 1.9372 0.6004 5.006 0.296 3068.2 2866.5 n-Butane 27
i-Pentane 72.1488 20.474 2.4911 0.62514 5.212 0.365621 4010.16 3707.56 i-Pentane 05
i-Propylbenzene 120.19 0.188 4.1498 0.8663 7.223 0.4396 5976.6 5674 n-Nonane *
i-Octane 114.23 1.708 3.9439 0.6962 5.804 0.5199 6246.1 5792.2 n-Octane *
Methane 16.0425 5000 0.5539 0.3 2.5 0.169487 1012.34 911.5 Methane 00
Methyl Alcohol 32.04 4.63 1.1063 0.796 6.64 0.1275 868.7 767.9 None *
Methylcyclo C5 84.16 4.503 2.9057 0.7536 6.283 0.3538 4511.6 4209.1 n-Hexane *
Methylcyclo C6 98.19 1.609 3.39 0.774 6.453 0.4019 5228 4874.9 n-Heptane *
2-Methylhexane 100.21 2.271 3.4596 0.683 5.694 0.4647 5507.3 5104 n-Heptane *
3-Methylhexane 100.21 2.13 3.4596 0.6917 5.767 0.4589 5511.3 5107.8 n-Heptane *
m-Xylene 106.17 0.326 3.6655 0.8687 7.243 0.3871 5219.9 4967.8 n-Octane *
n-Butane 58.1222 51.567 2.0068 0.5842 4.8706 0.315183 3269.85 3017.97 n-Butane 04
n-Decane 142.2817 0.06148 4.9126 0.73458 6.1244 0.613636 7760.81 7206.63 n-Decane *
n-Heptane 100.2019 1.619 3.4597 0.68823 5.7379 0.461258 5515.33 5111.8 n-Heptane 45
Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)
Component
Name
Mol
Wt
Reid
Vapor
Rel Dens
Gas
Rel Dens
Liquid Lb/Gal
GPM
Factor
Gross Dry
BTU
Net Dry
BTU
AGA 8
Component
Daniel
Sim 2251
I.D. No.
B-5
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
JULY 2010 Component Data Table
n-Hexane 86.1754 4.961 2.9754 0.66406 5.5364 0.411121 4766.9 4414.19 n-Hexane 39
n-Nonane 128.2551 0.1809 4.4283 0.72224 6.0215 0.562592 7012.49 6508.02 n-Nonane 38
n-Octane 114.2285 0.5349 3.944 0.70655 5.8907 0.512168 6263.46 5809.41 n-Octane 20
n-Pentane 72.1488 15.576 2.4911 0.63071 5.2584 0.362396 4017.97 3715.58 n-Pentane 06
Neohexane 86.18 9.856 2.9753 0.654 5.453 0.4175 4747.2 4394.1 n-Hexane *
Neopentane 72.15 35.9 2.4911 0.5967 4.975 0.383 3993.9 3691.4 i-Pentane 07
Nitrogen 28.0134 0 0.9672 0.80687 6.7271 0.10999 0 0 Nitrogen 14
NO2 46 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 19
NO 30.01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None *
N2O 44.02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 None 18
o-Xylene 106.2 0.264 3.6655 0.8848 7.377 0.3801 5222 4969.7 n-Octane *
Oxygen 31.9988 0 1.1048 1.1423 9.5238 0.088739 0 0 Oxygen 16
1-Pentene 70.14 19.115 2.4215 0.6457 5.383 0.3441 3835.4 3583.3 n-Pentane 37
Propane 44.0956 188.62 1.5225 0.50719 4.2285 0.275429 2521.92 2320.36 Propane 02
Propadiene 40.07 0 1.411 0 0 0 2254.2 2254.2 Propane 24
Propylene 42.0797 227.3 1.4529 0.5226 4.3571 0.255087 2338.4 2187.05 Propane 23
Propyne 40.07 0 1.411 0 0 0 2246.2 2246.2 Propane 25
p-Xylene 106.17 0.342 3.6655 0.8657 7.218 0.3885 5220.8 4968.6 n-Octane *
Sulfur Dioxide 64.06 88 2.2117 1.397 11.65 0.1453 0 0 CO2 43
Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)
Component
Name
Mol
Wt
Reid
Vapor
Rel Dens
Gas
Rel Dens
Liquid Lb/Gal
GPM
Factor
Gross Dry
BTU
Net Dry
BTU
AGA 8
Component
Daniel
Sim 2251
I.D. No.
B-6
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Component Data Table JULY 2010
Styrene 104.15 0.24 3.5959 0.911 7.595 0.3622 5042.7 4841 n-Octane *
Toluene 92.14 1.032 3.1812 0.8718 7.268 0.3348 4485.4 4283.5 n-Heptane *
Trans-2-Butene 56.11 49.8 1.9372 0.61 5.086 0.2914 3075.1 2873.4 n-Butane 30
Triptane 100.21 3.374 3.4596 0.6946 5.791 0.4571 5496.2 5093 n-Heptane *
Water 18.0153 0.9505 0.62202 1 8.3372 0.057072 50.43 0 Water 44
Table B-1 Example Standard Component Data Table (Continued)
Component
Name
Mol
Wt
Reid
Vapor
Rel Dens
Gas
Rel Dens
Liquid Lb/Gal
GPM
Factor
Gross Dry
BTU
Net Dry
BTU
AGA 8
Component
Daniel
Sim 2251
I.D. No.
B-7
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
JULY 2010 Component Data Table
Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table
Component
Name
Molar
Mass
Sum
Factor
(0°C)
Sum
Factor
(15°C)
Sum
Factor
(20°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)
CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)
Acetylene 26.038 0.0949 0.0837 0.0837 1301.86 1301.37 1301.21 1301.05 1256.79 1256.94 1256.98 1257.03
Air 28.9625 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Argon 39.948 0.0316 0.0283 0.0265 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ammonia 17.0306 0.1225 0.1095 0.1049 384.57 383.51 383.16 382.81 316.96 316.86 316.82 316.79
Benzene 78.114 0.3017 0.272 0.253 3305.03 3302.86 3302.15 3301.43 3169.81 3169.56 3169.48 3169.38
Butanes 58.1222 0.2059 0.183 0.1743 2879.01 2875.17 2873.98 2872.8 2653.64 2653.01 2652.86 2652.72
Butene-1 56.108 0.1871 0.1732 0.1673 2721.55 2718.7 2717.75 2716.82 2541.25 2540.97 2540.86 2540.76
Butenes 56.108 0.1923 0.176 0.1717 2713.09 2710.23 2709.31 2708.36 2532.79 2532.49 2532.42 2532.27
1,2-Butadiene 54.092 0.2121 0.1924 0.1871 2597.13 2595.12 2594.45 2593.79 2461.91 2461.82 2461.78 2461.74
1,3-Butadiene 54.092 0.1844 0.1703 0.1643 2544.13 2542.1 2541.43 2540.77 2408.91 2408.8 2408.76 2408.72
C3+ 44.0956 0.1682 0.1534 0.147 2461.51 2458.25 2457.23 2456.16 2264.71 2264.52 2264.38 2264.25
C4+ 58.1222 0.2281 0.2049 0.1947 3081.63 3077.47 3076.32 3074.97 2841.63 2841.98 2841.83 2841.68
C4=1 56.108 0.1871 0.1732 0.1673 2721.55 2718.7 2717.75 2716.82 2541.25 2540.97 2540.86 2540.76
C5+ 72.1488 0.2999 0.2651 0.2505 3754.2 3749.68 3748.71 3746.71 3464.63 3468.87 3468.75 3468.52
C6+ 47/35/17 95.9558 0.389 0.3459 0.3331 4663.16 4657.69 4655.86 4654.08 4316.22 4315.67 4315.46 4315.27
C6+ 50/50/00 93.1887 0.3704 0.3305 0.3183 4533.05 4527.71 4525.93 4524.19 4194.99 4194.46 4194.25 4194.07
C6+ GPA 2261-99 93.1887 0.3943 0.3503 0.3373 4697.93 4692.42 4690.58 4688.78 4348.61 4348.06 4347.84 4347.66
B-8
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Component Data Table JULY 2010
C6+ 57/28/14 94.1904 0.3781 0.3367 0.3243 4580.15 4574.76 4572.96 4571.2 4238.87 4238.34 4238.12 4237.94
Carbon Monoxide 28.01 0.0265 0.0224 0.02 282.8 282.91 282.95 282.98 282.8 282.91 282.95 282.98
Carbon Dioxide 44.0095 0.0819 0.0748 0.0728 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Cis-2-Butene 56.108 0.1975 0.1817 0.1761 2714.9 2711.9 2711 2710 2534.6 2534.2 2534.1 2533.9
COS 60.076 0.1225 0.114 0.1095 548.01 548.15 548.19 548.23 548.01 548.15 548.19 548.23
CS2 76.143 0.2145 0.1949 0.1871 1104.06 1104.32 1104.41 1104.49 1104.06 1104.32 1104.41 1104.49
Cyclohexane 84.161 0.3209 0.2864 0.2757 3960.67 3956.02 3954.47 3952.96 3690.23 3689.42 3689.13 3688.86
Cyclopentane 70.14 0.255 0.2302 0.2236 3326.14 3322.19 3320.88 3319.59 3100.77 3100.03 3099.76 3099.51
Diisobutyl 114.23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2,3-Dimethbutan 86.177 0.3 0.2739 0.2569 4193.63 4188.6 4186.93 4185.28 3878.11 3877.57 3877.36 3877.17
2,2-Dimethpenta 100.21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2,4-Dimethpenta 100.21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3,3-Dimethpenta 100.2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ethane 30.069 0.1 0.0922 0.0894 1564.34 1562.14 1561.41 1560.69 1429.12 1428.84 1428.74 1428.64
Ethyl Alcohol 46.07 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Ethylbenzene 106.167 0.4858 0.4207 0.4037 4613.14 4609.53 4608.32 4607.15 4387.77 4387.37 4387.2 4387.07
Ethylene 28.0532 0.0866 0.08 0.0775 1413.51 1412.11 1411.65 1411.18 1323.36 1323.24 1323.2 1323.15
Ethylene Oxide 44.05 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table
Component
Name
Molar
Mass
Sum
Factor
(0°C)
Sum
Factor
(15°C)
Sum
Factor
(20°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)
CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)
B-9
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
JULY 2010 Component Data Table
3-Ethylpentane 100.21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
H2S 34.0809 0.1 0.1 0.1 562.94 562.38 562.19 562.01 517.87 517.95 517.97 517.99
HCL 36.46 925 1.2588 0.8558 7.135 0.1349 0 0 0 0 0 0
Helium 4.0026 0.0006 0.0002 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Hydrogen 2.0159 -0.004 -0.0048 -0.0051 286.63 286.15 285.99 285.83 241.56 241.72 241.76 241.81
i-Butane 58.1222 0.2049 0.1789 0.1703 2874.2 2870.58 2869.38 2868.2 2648.83 2648.42 2648.26 2648.12
i-Butene 56.108 0.1871 0.1703 0.1673 2704.8 2702 2701.1 2700.2 2524.5 2524.3 2524.2 2524.1
i-Pentane 72.1488 0.251 0.228 0.2168 3535.98 3531.68 3530.24 3528.83 3265.54 3265.08 3264.89 3264.73
i-Propylbenzene 120.19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
i-Octane 114.23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Methane 16.0425 0.049 0.0447 0.0436 892.97 891.56 891.09 890.63 802.82 802.69 802.65 802.6
Methyl Alcohol 32.042 0.4764 0.3578 0.3286 766.59 765.09 764.59 764.09 676.44 676.22 676.14 676.06
Methylcyclo C5 84.161 0.313 0.2811 0.2702 3977.04 3972.46 3970.93 3969.44 3705.34 3705.59 3705.86 3706.6
Methylcyclo C6 98.188 0.3808 0.3376 0.3256 4600.64 4602.35 4604.09 4609.34 4292.53 4292.78 4293.06 4293.82
2-Methylhexane 100.21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
3-Methylhexane 100.21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
m-Xylene 106.167 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
n-Butane 58.1222 0.2069 0.1871 0.1783 2883.82 2879.76 2878.57 2877.4 2658.45 2657.6 2657.45 2657.32
Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table
Component
Name
Molar
Mass
Sum
Factor
(0°C)
Sum
Factor
(15°C)
Sum
Factor
(20°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)
CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)
B-10
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Component Data Table JULY 2010
n-Decane 142.2817 0.7523 0.645 0.614 6842.69 6834.9 6832.31 6829.77 6346.88 6346.14 6345.85 6345.59
n-Heptane 100.2019 0.4123 0.3661 0.3521 4862.87 4857.18 4855.29 4853.43 4502.28 4501.72 4501.49 4501.3
n-Hexane 86.1754 0.3286 0.295 0.2846 4203.23 4198.24 4196.58 4194.95 3887.71 3887.21 3887.01 3886.84
n-Nonane 128.2551 0.6221 0.5385 0.5148 6182.91 6175.82 6173.46 6171.15 5732.17 5731.49 5731.22 5730.99
n-Octane 114.2285 0.5079 0.445 0.4278 5522.4 5516.01 5513.88 5511.8 5116.73 5116.11 5115.87 5115.66
n-Pentane 72.1488 0.2864 0.251 0.2345 3542.89 3538.6 3537.17 3535.77 3272.45 3272 3271.83 3271.67
Neohexane 86.177 0.2898 0.2627 0.255 4185.84 4180.83 4179.15 4177.52 3870.32 3869.8 3869.59 3869.41
Neopentane 72.15 0.2387 0.2121 0.2025 3521.72 3517.43 3516.01 3514.61 3251.28 3250.83 3250.67 3250.51
Nitrogen 28.0134 0.0224 0.0173 0.0173 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NO2 46.0006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
NO 30.006 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
N2O 44.02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
o-Xylene 106.167 0.5128 0.4427 0.4231 4602.17 4598.64 4597.48 4596.31 4376.8 4376.48 4376.34 4376.23
Oxygen 31.9988 0.0316 0.0283 0.0265 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1-Pentene 70.14 0.249 0.2258 0.2191 3381.29 3377.75 3376.57 3375.42 3155.92 3155.59 3155.45 3155.34
Propane 44.0956 0.1453 0.1338 0.1288 2224.01 2221.1 2220.13 2219.17 2043.71 2043.37 2043.23 2043.11
Propadiene 40.065 0.1414 0.1304 0.1265 1945.25 1943.96 1943.53 1943.11 1855.1 1855.09 1855.08 1855.08
Propylene 42.0797 0.1378 0.1265 0.1225 2061.57 2059.43 2058.72 2058.02 1926.35 1926.13 1926.05 1925.97
Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table
Component
Name
Molar
Mass
Sum
Factor
(0°C)
Sum
Factor
(15°C)
Sum
Factor
(20°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)
CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)
B-11
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
JULY 2010 Component Data Table
Propyne 40.065 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
p-Xylene 106.167 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Sulfur Dioxide 64.065 0.1549 0.1449 0.1414 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Styrene 104.15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Toluene 92.141 0.3886 0.3421 0.3286 3952.72 3949.81 3948.84 3947.89 3772.42 3772.08 3771.95 3771.83
Trans-2-Butene 56.108 0.1975 0.1789 0.1761 2711.1 2708.3 2707.4 2706.4 2530.8 2530.5 2530.5 2530.3
Triptane 100.21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Water 18.0153 0.2646 0.2345 0.2191 45.074 44.433 44.224 44.016 0 0 0 0
Table B-2 ISO Component Data Table
Component
Name
Molar
Mass
Sum
Factor
(0°C)
Sum
Factor
(15°C)
Sum
Factor
(20°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Sup
kJ/Mol
(20°C)
CV
Sup
kJ/Mol
(25°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(0°C)
CV Inf
kJ/Mol
(15°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(20°C)
CV Inf
kJ/
Mol
(25°C)
B-12
MON 2000 Software for Gas Chromatographs
Component Data Table JULY 2010
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Data Acquisition
CA
APPENDIX C, DATA COMPUTATIONS
C.1 DATA ACQUISITION
The 2350A GC Controller performs a 12-bit
analog to digital (A/D) conversion every 25
milliseconds on channel 0 during an analysis
period. This is the period when the left side of
the display is counting the elapsed time of the
analysis. The fixed number on the right side of
the display is the total cycle time.
Exactly 40 equi-spaced data samples are taken
every second for analysis by the controller. A
sampling frequency of 40 Hertz (Hz) was
chosen to reduce 60 Hz normal mode noise.
After each point on the chromatograph signal is
sampled, the resulting number is stored in a
buffer area in the controller memory for
processing. During the analysis, only the last
256 data points are available for processing.
Because the data analysis is done as the signal
is sampled (in real-time), only a limited
number of past data samples is required to
analyze any signal.
As a part of the data acquisition process,
groups of incoming data samples are averaged
together before storing to the controller
memory for processing. Non-overlapping
groups of N samples are averaged and stored
and thus reduce the effective incoming data
rate to 40/N samples/second. For example, if
N = 5, then a total of 40/5 or 6 (averaged) data
samples are stored every second. The value for
the variable N is determined by the selection of
a Peak Width parameter (PW). The
relationship is:
NPW=
C-2 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Peak Detection JULY 2010
where PW is given in seconds. All the various
details in the analysis process are independent
of the value of N. Allowable values of N are one
to 63 which corresponds to values of PW from 2
to 63 seconds.
The variable N is known as the integration
factor. This term is used because N determines
how many points are averaged or integrated to
form a single value. The integration of data
upon input before storing serves two purposes.
First, the statistical noise on the input signal is
reduced by the square root of N. In the case of
N = 4, a noise reduction of two would be
realized. Secondly, the integration factor
controls the bandwidth of the chromatograph
signal. It is necessary to match the bandwidth
of the input signal to that of the analysis
algorithms in the 2350A. This prevents small,
short duration perturbations from being
recognized as true peaks by the program. It is
therefore important to choose a Peak Width
corresponding to the narrowest peak in a group
under consideration.
C.2 PEAK DETECTION
For normal area or peak height concentration
evaluation, the determination of a peak's start,
peak point, and end is automatic. The manual
determination of start and end points is used
only for area calculations in the Forced
Integration mode. Automatic determination of
peak onset or start is initiated whenever
Integrate Inhibit is turned off. Analysis is
started in a region of signal quiescence and
stability such that the signal level and activity
can be considered as baseline values. It is
important that this be the case because the
assumption is made by the 2350A software.
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Peak Detection
Having initiated a peak search by turning
Inhibit off, the 2350A Controller performs a
point by point examination of the signal slope.
This is achieved by using a digital slope
detection filter which is a combination low pass
filter and differentiator. The output of this
detector is constantly compared to a system
constant entered by the operator called Slope
Sensitivity. A default value of eight is assumed
if no entry is made. Lower values make peak
onset detection more sensitive and higher
values make detection less sensitive. Higher
values (20 to 100) would be appropriate for
noisy signals, e.g. high amplifier gain. Peak
termination is determined by the same
application of this detector to the signal, but in
the reverse sense. Onset is defined where the
detector output exceeds the baseline constant,
but termination is defined subsequently where
the detector output is less than the same
constant.
Sequences of fused peaks are also
automatically handled. This is done by testing
each termination point to see if the region
immediately following it satisfies the criteria of
a baseline. A baseline region must have a slope
detector value less than the magnitude of the
baseline constant for a number of sequential
points. When a baseline region is found, this
terminates a sequence of peaks. A zero
reference line for peak height and area
determination is established by extending a
line from the point of the onset of the peak
sequence to the point of the termination. The
values of these two points are found by
averaging the four integrated points just prior
to the onset point and just after the
termination points respectively.
C-4 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Peak Detection JULY 2010
The zero reference line will, in general, be non-
horizontal and thus compensates for any linear
drift in the system from the time the peak
sequence starts until it ends. In a single peak
situation, peak area is the area of the
component peak between the curve and the
zero reference line. The peak height is the
distance from the zero reference line to the
maximum point on the component curve. The
value and location of the maximum point is
determined from quadratic interpolation
through the three highest points at the peak of
the discrete valued curve stored in 2350A. This
interpolation technique is used both for peaks
as well as valleys (minimum points) in fused
peak sequences. In the latter case, lines are
dropped from the interpolated valley points to
the zero reference line to partition the fused
peak areas into individual peaks. The use of
quadratic interpolation improves both area and
height calculation accuracy and eliminates the
effects of variations in the integration factor on
these calculations.
While calibrating, the controller may run
several analyses of the calibration stream.
Using entries from an example program, five
analyses would be run. Since only the last three
are to be averaged, data from runs one and two
are not saved. Results are stored on the third
run. Data from runs four and five are added to
that stored for run three.
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Analysis Computations
C.3 ANALYSIS COMPUTATIONS
There are two basic analysis algorithms
included in the controller:
• Area Analysis – calculates area under
component peak
• Peak Height Analysis – measures height of
component peak
C.3.1 CONC. ANALYSIS WITH RESPONSE FACTOR
Calibration
The concentration calculations discussed as
follows require a unique response factor for
each component in an analysis. These factors
may be manually entered by an operator or
automatically calculated by calibrating the
system.
where
Equation C-1 Response Factor Calculation
or
ARFnarea response factor for component “n” in
area per mole percent (%)
HRFnheight response factor for component “n”
Areanarea associated with component “n” in cal-
ibration gas
Htnheight associated with component “n” in
mole percent in calibration gas
Calnamount of component “n” in mole percent
of calibration gas
Equation C-1 uses an external
standard.
ARFn
Arean
Caln
---------------
=HRFn
Htn
Caln
-----------
=
C-6 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Conc. Analysis with Response Factor JULY 2010
Calculated response factors are stored by the
controller for use in the concentration
calculations, and are printed out in the
configuration and calibration reports.
where
The percent deviation of new RF average from
old RF average is calculated in the following
manner:
where the absolute value of percent deviation
for alarm has been previously entered by the
operator.
Equation C-2 Average Response Factor
RFAVGnarea or height average response factor for
component “n”
RFiarea or height response factor for
component “n” from the calibration run
k number of calibration runs actually used
to calculate the response factors
Equation C-3 Percent Deviation
RFAVGn
RFi
i1=
k
∑
k
------------------
=
deviation RFnew RFold–
Rfold
---------------------------------------- 100×=
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Conc. Analysis with Response Factor
Calc. in Mole Percent w/o Normalization
Once response factors have been determined by
the controller or entered by the operator,
component concentrations are determined for
each analysis using the following equations:
where
Note that the average concentration of each
component will also be calculated when data
averaging is requested.
Equation C-4 Response Factor Calculation
or
CONCnconcentration of component “n” in mole percent
AREAnarea of component “n” in unknown sample
ARFnresponse factor of component “n” calculated
from area of calibration sample. Units are area
per mole percent
Htnpeak height of component “n” in unknown
sample
HRFnresponse factor of component “n” calculated
from peak height of calibration sample. Units
are height per mole percent
CONCn
Arean
ARFn
---------------
=CONCn
Htn
HRFn
--------------
=
C-8 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Conc. Analysis with Response Factor JULY 2010
Component concentrations may be input
through analog inputs 1 to 4 or may be fixed. If
a fixed value is used, the calibration for that
component is the mole percent that will be used
for all analyses:.
where
Equation C-5 Concentration Calculations with Normalization
CONCNnnormalized concentration of component
“n” in percent of total gas concentration
CONCnnon-normalized concentration of
component “n” in mole percent
CONCinon-normalized concentration (in mole
percent) from each of the “k” components
to be grouped into this normalization
k number of components to be included in
the normalization
CONCNn
CONCn
CONCi
i1=
k
∑
---------------------------- 100×=
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Post Analysis Computations
C.4 POST ANALYSIS COMPUTATIONS
C.4.1 Liquid Equivalent Computations
The equivalent liquid volume, in gallons per
1000 standard cubic feet (GPM) is given by:
where
C.4.2 Heating Value Calculations
(a) Dry Gross BTU of Total Gas
where
Equation C-6 Equivalent Liquid Volume (GPM)
GPMnCONCNnLCFn
×BASEPRS
14.73
--------------------------
×BASETEMP 459.67+
60 459.67+
-------------------------------------------------------
×=
GPMngallons/1000 standard cubic feet of component “n”
CONCNnnormalized (if selected) concentration of
component “n”
LCFnliquid equivalent conversion factor for component
“n” at 14.73 PSIA and 60 degrees F
BASE PRS base (contact) Pressure specified; defaults to
14.73
Equation C-7 Dry Gross BTU Value of Total Gas
DRYBTU/
CF
uncorrected dry BTU content per cubic foot of
total gas sample
CONCNnnormalized (if selected) concentration of
component “n”, calculated from peak analysis
BTU/CFnenergy content per cubic foot of component “n”,
stored in permanent memory
DRYBTU CF
CONCN()
nBTU CF()
n
[]
n1=
P
∑
100
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
=
C-10 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010
(b) Ideal Relative Density
where
(c) Real (corrected) Relative Density
The ideal gas relative density, DI is
corrected to the real gas relative
Density, Dr, by dividing by the com-
pressibility factor, Z, for gas mixture at
60 oF and one atmosphere pressure and
multiplying by the compressibility factor
of air at the same conditions:
P total number of components to be used in calcula-
tion of total BTU/CF
“100” removed the “100” factored into the calculation of
the concentration earlier in the analysis
Equation C-8 Ideal Relative Density of Total Gas Sample
RDnrelative Density of component “n”
TOTAL RD relative Density of total gas sample
CONCNn, P, 100 are defined in “1.” preceding
Equation C-9 Real Gas Relative Density
TOTALRD
CONCnRDn
()
n1=
P
∑
100
----------------------------------------------
=
DR
DIZbair()
Zbgas()
---------------------
=
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Heating Value Calculations
where
(d) Compressibility Factor Dry BTU
Compressibility uses calculations from
AGA Report No. 8 (1992) errata (1993)
“Compressibility Factors of Natural Gas
and other related Hydro-Carbon Gases”.
where
(e) Corrected Saturated BTU
DIideal gas relative density ()
Zb(air) compressibility factor of air, or 0.99959
Zb(gas) compressibility factor of gas mixture
Equation C-10 Corrected Dry BTU Value
DRYBTU value from Equation C-7
Z compressibility factor (see Equation C-9)
BASE PRS base (contract) pressure specified; defaults to
14.73 PSIA
Equation C-11 Corrected Saturated BTU Value of Total Gas
CORRDRYBTU DRYBTU
Z
------------------------
=
CORRSATBTU DRYBTU()0.9826()
Z
---------------------------------------------------
=
C-12 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010
where
(f) Compressibility and Base Pressure
Compressibility and base pressure
corrections for Dry BTU are:
where
(g) BTU Calculations
Note that the BTU calculations apply to
Gross dry, saturated, actual BTU and
Net dry, saturated, and actual BTU
DRYBTU value from Equation C-7
CORRSATBTU corrected saturated BTU content per cubic
foot of total gas sample at base conditions of
BASE PRS and 60 °F
Z compressibility of total gas as calculated in
Equation C-10
BASEPRS base (contract) pressure specified; defaults to
14.73 PSIA
Equation C-12 Dry BTU at Base Pressure
CorrDryBTU DryBTUatBasePressure
Z
-----------------------------------------------------------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
=ContractPressure
BasePressure
------------------------------------------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
CORRDRYBTU value from Equation C-7
Z compressibility factor (see Equation C-10)
BASE PRESSURE base (contract) pressure specified;
defaults to 14.73 PSIA
Equation C-13 BTU Calculations
GrossActualBTU corr()GrossDryBTU corr()100 WVC()
100
------------------
–
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
×=
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Heating Value Calculations
where
where
where
WVC Water volume content (provided by a “live analog input”
Equation C-14 Wobbe Index Calculation
W.I. Wobbe index value
CORRGROSSBTU Corrected Dry BTU for total gas Sample
as calculated in Equation C-10
RD real Relative Density as calculated in
Equation C-9
Equation C-15 Weight Percent Calculation
WTpercentnweight percent of component “n”
CONCnconcentration in mole percent of
component “n”
Mwnmolecular weight of component “n”
sum of weights of all components in
sample
WI CORR GROSS()BTU
RD
------------------------------------------------------
=
All components in the
sample must be measured in
order to calculate weight
percent.
WTpercentn
CONCn
()MWn
()
CONCi
()
i1=
k
∑MWi
()
--------------------------------------------------100×=
i1=
k
∑
C-14 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010
where
where
Equation C-16 Average Molecular Weight
AVGMW average molecular weight
sum of weights of all components in
sample
Equation C-17 Liquid Volume Percent
LV percent liquid volume
WT percent weight percent
Ddensity
sum of all components in sample
AVGMW CONCi
()MWi
()
i1=
k
∑
=
i1=
k
∑
All components in the
sample must be measured in
order to calculate liquid
volume percent from mole
percent.
LVpercent WTpercentn
()Dn
()÷
WTpercenti
()Di
()÷
i1=
k
∑
--------------------------------------------------------------100×=
i1=
k
∑
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Heating Value Calculations
where
where
Equation C-18 Reid Vapor Pressure
RVP reid vapor pressure
CONCinormalized concentration of component “i”
in mole percent
VPivapor pressure at 100 F of component “i”
(GPA2145 = 94)
Equation C-19 Liquid Relative Density
LRDTliquid relative density of sample, relative
to water at 60 °F
LRDiliquid relative density of component “i”
(GPA2145-94)
LVpercent liquid volume percent from Equation C-18
RVP
CONCi
()VPi
()
i1=
k
∑
100
-----------------------------------------------
=
All components in the
sample must be measured
to calculate LRDT.
LRDT
LVpercenti
()LRDi
()
i1=
k
∑
100
--------------------------------------------------------------
=
C-16 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Heating Value Calculations JULY 2010
where
where
Equation C-20 Liquid Density
LDTliquid density of total sample in pounds per gallon
LDiliquid density of component “i”. (GPA 2145-94)
LViliquid volume percent
Equation C-21 Gas Density
GD gas density in lb/1000 ft3
RD relative density (relative to air)
76.4976 density of air at 14.73 PSIA and 60 °F, in
lb/1000 ft3
All components on sample
must be measured to
calculate Liquid Density.
LDT
LVi
()LDi
()
i1=
k
∑
100
--------------------------------------
=
GD RD()76.4976()=
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 Multi-Level Calibration
C.4.3 Multi-Level Calibration
The properties of each gas component can be
viewed using the Component Data menu.
Included with the component properties in the
Component Data Table are four coefficients
labeled Multi-Level Calib 'a', 'b', 'c', and 'd' for
each component. If these parameters are all
zero, then linear calibration is used. See
Section C.3.1 for the response factor
calculations.
If any of these parameters have a value other
than zero, then multi-level, or polynomial
calibration is used for that component.
The response factors are then calculated as:
where
Equation C-22 Multi-Level Calibration
P peak size (Area or Height as selected by the
O p e r a t o r ) ; f r o m a v e r a g e c a l i b r a t i o n r u n s
Coefficients:
A,B,C, and D
Calculated Offline.
Entered after Multi-Level Calibration using
several calibration gases (typically seven gases)
1. Note: If the coefficient values are correct
values, the response factor will be close to
one.
ResponseFactor aP3bP2cP d+++
CalibrationConcentration
----------------------------------------------------------------------
=(mol %)
C-18 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Indirect Calibration JULY 2010
The mole% value in the sample gas is then
calculated as
where
C.4.4 Indirect Calibration
Component gases which are NOT found in the
calibration gas, but may be found in the sample
gas, can be assigned a response factor which is
a fixed multiple (the Relative Response Factor
to a Reference Component) that IS found in the
calibration gas.
The Relative Response Factors and Reference
Component Values are included in the
Component Data Table (following the
Multi-Level Calibration coefficients) see
Appendix B.
If the Reference Component is None, then
normal (direct) calibration is used.
If the Reference Component is defined, (e.g.
Propane) then the mole% value for the indirect
component (e.g. neoC5), is calculated as:
Equation C-23 Mole% Value
P peak size measured in Sample Gas
Mole % = aP3bP2cP d+++
responsefactor
-----------------------------------------------
Equation C-24 Mole% Value Indirect Component
mole% (neoC5) = mole% (Propane)
PneoC5()
P Propane()
-------------------------------
⎝⎠
⎛⎞
RRFneoC5()
DATA COMPUTATIONS C-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Indirect Calibration
where
P peak size
RRF Relative Response Factor
C-20 DATA COMPUTATIONS
MON2000
Indirect Calibration JULY 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A D-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Calibrating by Volts
DA ALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
APPENDIX D, ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
The initial analog output adjustment will be set
at the factory before shipment at standard
values (4-20 mA or 1-5 V). It may be necessary
to check and/or adjust these values, depending
on output cabling or impedance. The
adjustment may require two persons if the
units are some distance apart. It will require a
good digital meter to check the zero and full
scale values at the receiving end. The scale or
span value can be adjusted by a PC with
MON2000 software when the values are known
at the receiving end.
It is possible to calibrate the analog outputs
using different engineering units. Two
examples are described below using both volts
and percentages.
D.1 CALIBRATING BY VOLTS
This example assumes that an analog output
channel needs to calibrated to a span of 1-5 V.
To calibrate an analog output by adjusting the
voltage,
1. Use the Application > Analog Outputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Analog Outputs dialog appears.
The 4-20 mA outputs are
calibrated similarly except
the current is measured
instead of the voltage.
D-2 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
MON2000
Calibrating by Volts JULY 2010
3. Select the channel to be calibrated.
Output channels 1 and 2 can be scaled from
either 4-20 mA or 1-5 V. Channels 3 to 10
are scaled from 4-20 mA.
Although output channels for direct voltage measurement
exist for analog output channels 1 and 2, it is recommended
that they not be used for calibration purposes. Instead, use
the current-out terminals and the 250-ohm resistor as
described.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A D-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Calibrating by Volts
4. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.
5. For voltage values, set Zero Scale to “1.0”
and Full Scale to “5.0”.
If the channel is calibrated in milliamperes,
set Zero Scale to “4” and Full Scale to “20”.
6. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Fixed”.
7. Set the Fixed Value to “0.0”.
8. Set Zero Scale Adjustment and the Full
Scale Adjustment to “0.0”.
9. Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
10.Connect a 250-ohm resistor across the
signal at the input of the device where this
analog output is used. Connect a Voltmeter
across the resistor and measure the result.
11.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
12.Set the Fixed Value to the Full Scale value
entered in Step 5.
Your Voltmeter reading
should be close to 1.0 V
but does not have to be
exactly 1.0 V. If the
reading is negative,
reverse the leads.
D-4 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
MON2000
Calibrating by Volts JULY 2010
13.Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
14.Look at the voltmeter again and record the
full scale reading.
15.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
16.Change the Zero Scale Adjustment to the
Zero Scale voltage reading and the Full
Scale Adjustment to the Full Scale voltage
reading.
17.Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
18.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
19.To quickly verify your changes, enter the
midpoint of your range (e.g., 3) for the Fixed
Value. Click the button to accept
your change. The resulting voltage output
should be close to span midpoint (e.g., 3).
20. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
21.Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Var” and
the Fixed Value to “0.0”.
22.Click the button to accept your
changes.
The voltage output could change slightly from
time to time and the MON2000 software will
now maintain the correct span.
Your voltmeter reading
should be very close to
5.0 Volts. MON2000 will
adjust the scale so the
span will be 4 Volts and
scale accordingly.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A D-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Calibrating by Percentages
D.2 CALIBRATING BY PERCENTAGES
This second example, shown below,
demonstrates that it is also possible to
calibrate your outputs as a percentage. For
instance, you may wish to read directly values
that may be scaled from 0 to 1200. Your voltage
span is scaled from 1 to 5 volts so the range is
approximately 4 Volts. Thus, 1200 divided by 4
equals 300 units per volt. If you equate the
difference as a percentage, the midpoint in
units equals 600, or approximately 3 volts.
With this information in mind, you want to set
zero units equal to 1.00 V and 1200 units to
5.00 V and let the software adjust the span as
you calibrate.
This example assumes that an analog output
channel needs to calibrated to a span of 0 to
1200.
D-6 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
MON2000
Calibrating by Percentages JULY 2010
To calibrate by percentages,
1. Use the Application > Analog Outputs menu
to access this function.
2. The Analog Outputs dialog appears.
3. Select the channel to be calibrated.
Output channels 1 and 2 can be scaled from
either 4-20 mA or 1-5 V. Channels 3 to 10
are scaled from 4-20 mA.
All can be scaled with a percentage.
Although output channels for direct voltage
measurement exist for analog output channels 1 and 2,
it is recommended that they not be used for calibration
purposes. Instead, use the current-out terminals and
the 250-ohm resistor as described.
ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A D-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Calibrating by Percentages
4. To change a variable assignment, click the
appropriate Variable cell. Use the provided
pull-down menu and click the desired
variable to select it.
5. Set Zero Scale to “0” and Full Scale to
“1200”.
6. Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Fixed”.
7. Set Fixed Value to “0.0”.
8. Set Zero Scale Adjustment and Full Scale
Adjustment to “0.0”.
9. Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
10.Connect a 250-ohm resistor across the
signal at the input of the device where this
analog output is used. Connect a Voltmeter
across the resistor and measure the result.
11.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
12.Set the Fixed Value to the Full Scale value
entered in Step 5.
Your Voltmeter reading
should be close to 1.0 V
but does not have to be
exactly 1.0 V. If the
reading is negative,
reverse the leads.
D-8 ANALOG OUTPUT CAL. FOR 2350A
MON2000
Calibrating by Percentages JULY 2010
13.Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
14.Look at the voltmeter again and record the
full scale reading.
15.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
16.Change the Zero Scale Adjustment to the
zero scale voltage reading and the Full
Scale Adjustment to the full scale voltage
reading.
17.Click the button to accept your
changes and exit from the Analog Outputs
dialog.
18.Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
19.To quickly verify your changes, enter the
midpoint of your range (e.g., 600) for the
Fixed Value. Click the button to
accept your change. The resulting voltage
output should be close to span midpoint
(e.g., 3).
20. Return to the Analog Outputs dialog and
reselect the channel being calibrated.
21.Set the Fixed/Var parameter to “Var” and
the Fixed Value to “0.0”.
22.Click the button to accept your
changes.
The voltage output could change slightly from
time to time and the MON2000 software will
now maintain the correct span.
Your voltmeter reading
should be very close to
5.0 Volts. MON2000 will
adjust the scale so the
span will be 4 Volts and
scale accordingly.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-1
MON2000
JULY 2010 Connect to GC and Halt Analysis
EA
APPENDIX E, UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND
2350 EPROMS
E.1 CONNECT TO GC AND HALT ANALYSIS
1. Ensure that the MON2000 software is
running and you are connected to the GC
that is to be upgraded.
Use the File > Connect menu to access this
function. See Section 2.10.1 for more
information.
2. Use MON2000 to halt any ongoing analysis
or calibration runs.
Use the Control > Halt menu to access this
function. See Section 4.3 for more
information.
E.2 OFFLINE EDIT TO UPLOAD APP. & RENAME
1. Use MON2000 to upload (from the GC unit)
to the PC the most current parameters that
are in use at the GC.
Use the File > Offline Edit > Upload
Application menu to access this function.
2. A menu of stored application files appears.
Double-click the desired file.
To upgrade the Model 500 2350A (GC) software and the
2350 EPROMs, perform all steps in the order they appear
in this appendix.
Before beginning the upgrade procedure, ensure that you
have identified which standard (i.e., factory-released)
application file was used to form the current user
application for this GC. See Section E.10 for more
information on standard applications.
When halted GC runs
have finished, the
status for Detector 1
mode will indicate Idle
(see GC Status bar; see
Section 3.3).
E-2 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Offline Edit to Upload App. & Rename JULY 2010
3. The Save Uploaded GC Application File
dialog appears.
Use this dialog to assign a new file name to
the GC Application file that is the target for
uploading.
For clarity, you could name this file
“OLD.bin” to distinguish it from the
upgraded application file.
Press the ENTER key or click the
button to continue.
4. The Upload Application process begins. This
process usually takes about 15 minutes to
complete.
MON2000 automatically disconnects from
the GC after the Upload Application process
has finished.
5. Use the File > Exit menu to close MON2000.
Or, you can exit MON2000 by pressing the
ALT-F X keys, or click the button on the
main window.
The existing file
name of the GC
application file for
the connected GC
displays in the File
name field.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-3
MON2000
JULY 2010 Upgrade User-Defined Applications
E.3 UPGRADE USER-DEFINED APPLICATIONS
Follow the installation instructions provided in
Section 2.2 to upgrade the MON2000 software
and/or a standard application file.
Use the Update BIN utility that is installed
with the MON2000 software to upgrade a GC
application that contains user-defined data
(such as components). The Update BIN
program allows you to upgrade an application
that is either on disk or “live” at the GC
Controller. See the following sections for
details.
E.4 UPGRADE FROM DISK
To upgrade a user-defined application file
(*.BIN) located on your PC hard drive or on a
floppy disk,
Do not delete any existing MON2000 program
or GC application files from the PC hard drive.
The upgrade process uses information from
these files and automatically overwrites any
outdated program file.
It is recommended that you save a copy of
your application file before performing the
upgrade.
E-4 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Upgrade from Disk JULY 2010
1. Launch the Update BIN software by either:
• clicking the button and using
the Programs >MON2000 > Update BIN
menu
• double-clicking the Update BIN icon on
your PC desktop
2. The Update BIN software program launches
inside a DOS window.
3. Press the TAB key to access the
Communication menu.
4. Use the ARROW keys to select the File
Selection option, and then press ENTER.
5. The File Selection screen displays.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-5
MON2000
JULY 2010 Upgrade from Disk
Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the
desired application file from disk. This file
is the file you will be upgrading.
6. Press the TAB key to access the Upgrade
Config menu.
7. Use the ARROW keys to select the Merge
option, and then press ENTER.
8. The File Selection screen displays.
Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the
desired application file from disk. This file
is the new application file you wish to merge
into the existing file (see Step 5).
9. The Merge screen displays.
E-6 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Upgrade from GC Controller JULY 2010
10.Use the ARROW+ENTER keys to select the
desired application settings to upgrade.
Press the SHIFT + ENTER keys to select
multiple settings.
Press the F2 key to select all the available
settings.
Press the F3 key to clear your selected
settings.
11.Press the F4 key to begin the upgrade.
12.When the upgrade is done, press the ESC
key or use the Communication > Exit menu
to close the Update BIN program.
Ensure that you inspect the upgraded
application file for any errors.
E.4.1 Upgrade from GC Controller
To upgrade a user-defined application file
(*.BIN) currently being used by the GC
Controller,
1. Launch the Update BIN software by either:
• clicking the button and using
the Programs >MON2000 > Update BIN
menu
• double-click the Update BIN icon on
your PC desktop
It is recommended that you upload a copy of
your application file before performing the
upgrade.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-7
MON2000
JULY 2010 Upgrade from GC Controller
2. The Update BIN software program launches
inside a DOS window.
3. Use the ARROW keys to select the Connect
option, and then press ENTER.
4. The Connect screen displays, listing the
available GC units.
Use the ARROW keys to select the
appropriate GC, and then press ENTER.
5. Update BIN attempts to connect to the GC
Controller.
If the attempt fails, see Section E.4.2 for
information on configuring the
communications parameters for Update
BIN.
E-8 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Upgrade from GC Controller JULY 2010
6. The File Selection screen displays.
Use the TAB and ARROW keys to select the
desired application file from disk. This file
is the new application file you wish to merge
into the existing file (see Step 5).
7. The Merge screen displays.
8. Use the ARROW+ENTER keys to select the
desired application settings to upgrade.
Press the SHIFT + ENTER keys to select
multiple settings.
Press the F2 key to select all the available
settings.
Press the F3 key to clear your selected
settings.
9. Press the F4 key to begin the upgrade.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-9
MON2000
JULY 2010 Configure GC Connection
10.When the upgrade is done, use the
Communications > Disconnect menu to
cease communications with the GC unit.
11.Press the ESC key or use the
Communication > Exit menu to close the
Update BIN program.
Ensure that you inspect the upgraded
application file for any errors.
E.4.2 Configure GC Connection
To configure the GC communications
parameters for the Update BIN software,
1. Use the Communication > Directory menu
to access a list of communication settings for
each GC unit.
2. The Directory screen displays.
3. Use the ARROW keys to select the desired
GC unit and then press the F2 key to edit its
communications parameters.
You can also press F3 to edit the modem
initialization string.
E-10 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Disconnect Power and Disassemble JULY 2010
4. The Parameters screen displays.
5. Use the ARROW keys and space bar to select
the desired parameter and toggle between
its options.
6. Press the ENTER key to accept your changes
or press the ESC key to cancel.
E.5 DISCONNECT POWER AND DISASSEMBLE
PERSONELL AND EQUIPMENT
Failure to follow the instructions below, may cause injury to personnel or damage equipment.
Before you remove the cover from the GC Controller or access its internal electronics, switch
OFF the AC power source to the GC Controller, either at the breaker box or the controlling
power source switch.
Also, disconnect the AC power cord from J21 before continuing working on the unit.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-11
MON2000
JULY 2010 Disconnect Power and Disassemble
1. Disconnect AC power from the
GC Controller.
When you have access to the GC Controller
Terminal Board (TB) for field wiring
(accessed from the rear on rack-mount
versions and behind the front cover of
explosion-proof models) disconnect the AC
power cord from J21 before continuing
working on the unit.
2. For newer model 19-inch rack mount and
retrofit GC Controllers, proceed as follows:
(a) Remove the (right) side access panel that
is secured to the chassis with four
thumbscrews.
(b) Unplug all cables connected to the
boards in slots 2 through 6 of the Card
Cage Assembly in order to access the
SBC53 CPU Board.
(c) Proceed to Step 3 below.
For the explosion-proof GC Controller or
older rack mount GC Controllers, proceed as
follows:
(a) Access the GC Controller Terminal
Board for field wiring.
On the explosion-proof GC Controller,
remove outer housing bolts and lower
the cover on its bottom hinge. The TB
faces the front.
On rack mount GC Controllers, the TB is
exposed and faces the rear.
(b) Loosen the six thumbscrews that secure
the TB. Then gently unplug the TB from
its mating DIN connectors at the back,
top of the board.
(c) Lower the TB down (held in place by its
ground straps at the bottom of the board)
in order to expose the Card Cage
Assembly.
E-12 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Replace EPROMS/Reset CPU JULY 2010
(d) Unplug the TB power supply cord from
its connection at the Card Cage
Assembly power supply.
(e) Loosen the four thumbscrews that
secure the Card Cage Assembly to the
chassis. Then remove the Card Cage
Assembly away from its chassis mount
so that it is easy to work on.
(f) Unplug all cables connected to the
boards in slots 2 through 6 of the Card
Cage Assembly in order to access the
SBC53 CPU Board.
3. Remove the SBC53 CPU Board from slot
number 2 (second from the top) of the Card
Cage Assembly.
E.6 REPLACE EPROMS/RESET CPU
1. For 2350 GC Controllers, locate the
EPROMs that will be replaced: U18 and
U19. They are near the card-connector edge
of the SBC53 CPU Board.
2. Remove, one at a time, each of the old
EPROMs, and replace each with its upgrade
EPROM.
3. Locate Jumper Pin Set J14. It is near the
two EPROMs you have just replaced.
Note that Jumper Pin Set J14 has a single
jumper shorting pins 1 and 2.
Carefully note which EPROMs are labeled ODD and
EVEN and which sockets hold them:
socket U18 EVEN EPROM P/N 8-2350-001
socket U19 ODD EPROM P/N 8-2350-002
1.
2.
3.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-13
MON2000
JULY 2010 Reassembly Procedures
4. To reset the CPU registers, remove the
jumper from J14 pins 1 and 2, and place it
to short J14 pins 2 and 3.
5. After briefly shorting J14 pins 2 and 3,
remove the jumper again. Place it back in
its original position, shorting J14
pins 1 and 2.
E.7 REASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
1. Place and securely plug the SBC53 CPU
Board into slot number 2 of the Card Cage
Assembly.
2. Reconnect all ribbon cables that were
unplugged (see Section E.5).
Because the ribbon cables are arranged in
layers, it important to reconnect them in the
order listed below:
Table E-1 2350 GC Ribbon Cables to Connect
Part
Number
System Interface
Board connection
Cable Originating
from Board
3-2350-063 J12 SBC53
3-2350-052 J9 SBC53
3-2350-062 J11 SBC53
3-2350-051 J4 SBC53
3-2350-064 J8 DSPI/O
3-2350-053 J10 DSPI/O
3-2350-054 J6 RTI1281
3-2350-055 J5 RTI1281
E-14 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Set-Up and Programming JULY 2010
3. Return and secure the Card Cage Assembly
its original position in the chassis mounting.
Tighten the four screws.
4. Return and secure the field wiring TB in its
original position. Tighten the six screws.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord to J21 on the
TB, and restore AC power to the 2350A GC
Controller.
E.8 SET-UP AND PROGRAMMING
The purpose of this procedure is to define the
CMOS table set-up and programming
requirements for the CPU assembly and
DiskOnChip.
E.8.1 Procedure
1. Install the blank DiskOnChip into socket
U1 on the CPU assembly, noting the
orientation of pin 1.
2. Plug the floppy drive cable into J10 on the
CPU assembly and plug the board into the
card cage.
3. Plug the keyboard cable into J1 on the CPU
assembly.
4. Turn on the power. When the video displays
on the monitor, press the DELETE button to
access the CMOS setup window.
(a) The Standard CMOS Setup window
displays. Press the ENTER button.
(b) Set time and date by either PAGE UP,
PAGE DOWN, or by entering the
appropriate number value. After making
the desired change, press ENTER.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-15
MON2000
JULY 2010 Procedure
(c) Change Drive C:\ to NONE by pressing
PAGE DOWN. Verify that Drive A:\ is the
only selected drive. Press ESCAPE, F10 (to
save changes), Y (to verify that you want
the changes to be made), then ENTER.
5. The CPU assembly will reboot and displays
the Systems Configuration window. The
speaker on the CPU will chirp and the
monitor will prompt:
“ENTER NEW DATE (mm-dd-yy)". Press
ENTER.
"ENTER NEW TIME:". Press ENTER.
The A:\> prompt is displayed. Verify that
the programming disk is the current
revision specified on the work order package
and it insert into the floppy drive. Type
INSTALL.
6. As the DiskOnChip is being programmed,
the following information is displayed:
A:\> SYS C:
SYSTEM TRANSFERRED
A:\>CD IMAGE
A:\IMAGE>COPY *.*C:\
BOS.EXE
PME16.EXE
SCANDISK.EXE
SCANDISK.INI
AUTOEXEC.BAT
BOSCHECK.EXE
6 FILE(S) COPIED
A:\IMAGE>CD\
A:\>
A:\>
7. At the A:\> prompt, type C:, then ENTER.
8. Type PME16, then ENTER.
E-16 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Reprogramming the DiskOnChip JULY 2010
9. The Protected Mode Program screen
displays. Verify that a "cold start - initial"
message is displayed in the middle of the
screen and LED D2 is blinking on the CPU
assembly.
10.Press ESC to exit the program and power
down.
11.Carefully remove the cable from J1 and J10
to prevent cracking the connector housing.
Install the program label on the end of
DiskOnChip opposite the serial number.
E.8.2 Reprogramming the DiskOnChip
Reprogram the DiskOnChip using the
following instructions.
1. Install either the programmed DiskOnChip
into socket U1 on the CPU assembly (noting
the orientation of pin 1) or install the
complete CPU assembly into card cage.
2. Plug the floppy drive cable into J10 on the
CPU assembly and the keyboard cable into
J1 on the CPU assembly.
3. Turn on the power. The CPU assembly
reboots and displays the Systems
Configuration window. The speaker on the
CPU will chirp and the monitor will prompt
"ENTER NEW DATE (mm-dd-yy)". Press
ENTER
"ENTER NEW TIME:". Press ENTER.
The A:\> prompt displays. Verify that the
programming disk is the current revision
specified on the work order package and
insert into the floppy drive. Type C:, then
ENTER to change to the ‘C’ drive.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-17
MON2000
JULY 2010 GC Reassembly
4. After the C:\> prompt is displayed, type
ERASE *.*, then press ENTER. When
prompted “ARE YOU SURE?” Type Y, then
press ENTER.
5. At the C:\> prompt, type DIR, then press
ENTER. Verify that only the Command.com
file remains on the ‘C:’ drive, that the file
size is 54,645 bytes, and that there are
16,105,472 bytes free.
6. Type A:, then ENTER to change back to the
A:\ drive. Type INSTALL, then follow Steps
6 through 11 (see Section E.8.1).
E.8.3 GC Reassembly
Use the following instructions to reassemble
the GC Controller (CPU, PC/104 Bus and the
Modem).
Figure E-1 CPU, PC/104 and Modem
1. Place and securely plug the WinSystems
CPU Board into slot number 2 of the Card
Cage Assembly.
2. Reconnect all ribbon cables that were
unplugged.
E-18 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Connect to GC for Upgraded App. JULY 2010
3. Return and secure the Card Cage Assembly
back into the chassis mounting. Tighten the
four screws.
4. Return and secure the field wiring TB to the
original position. Tighten the six screws.
5. Reconnect the AC power cord to J21 on the
TB, and restore AC power to the GC
Controller.
E.9 CONNECT TO GC FOR UPGRADED APP.
1. Use MON2000 software to connect with the
GC unit.
Use the File > Connect menu to access this
function. See Section 2.10.1 for more
information.
2. Use MON2000 to download the newly
upgraded GC application to the connected
GC Controller.
(a) Use the File > Download menu to access
the Download CG Application File
dialog.
(b) Click the desired .bin file. The file name
appears in the File name data field.
(c) Click the button or press the
ENTER key to download the selected
application file to the connected GC unit.
A progress bar displays, indicating the
completion status.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-19
MON2000
JULY 2010 Guide to Standard Application Files
E.10 GUIDE TO STANDARD APPLICATION FILES
This section of the appendix lists the various
standard application, or BIN files that have
been released by for the GC Controller.
E.10.1 Importance of Standard Application Files
After a new GC Controller has been loaded
with a standard application, the standard
application is customized by the entry of timed
events, component table entries, and other
operator entered information consistent with
the performance characteristics of the
chromatograph hardware to which the
Controller is connected and the needs of the
user. Thus the standard application becomes a
user application and differs from the factory-
released, standard application from which it
originated.
At the time when software is upgraded,
including application files, it becomes
important to know which factory-released
standard application formed the basis of the
user application, so the user application can be
upgraded, too, with newer version of the
standard application file.
You can determine which standard application
formed the basis of the current user application
by inspecting various MON2000 screens while
connected to the GC (in most cases, you need
only inspect the System dialog).
E-20 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Standard Applications v1.50 and Later JULY 2010
E.10.2 Standard Applications v1.50 and Later
If you are using a GC Application that is
version 1.50 or later, you can quickly determine
the original standard application name by
viewing the variables listed in the System
dialog.
Use the Application > System menu to access
this dialog. In the System dialog, (see Table E-
2) find the value for the variable named CFG
Base Name, and locate it in the column labeled
“CFG Base Name”, then read the “Analyzer
Name (BIN file)” to determine the application
BIN file name.
UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS E-21
MON2000
JULY 2010 Standard Applications v1.50 and Later
Table E-2 System Variables for Standard Application Files
Analyzer
Name
(BIN file)
Unit
Type
CFG Base
Name
System
Description
Max.
Archive
Averages
Stream
Sequence
2350_001 2350 USASTD1 2350 Standard 1,
64 avgs
64 8
2350_002 2350 USASTD2 2350 Standard 2,
32 avgs
32 8
2350_003 2350 USASTD3 2350 Standard 3,
128 avgs
128 5
2350_006 2350 USASTD6 2350 Std 6, 32
avgs, 10 strs
32 10
2350_007 2350 USASTD7 2350-7 12Str, 128
Avg, 260Mbus
128 12
2350ISO1 2350 ISOSTD1 2350 ISO Std 1,
64 avgs
64 8
2350ISO2 2350 ISOSTD2 2350 ISO Std 2,
32 avgs
32 8
2350ISO3 2350 ISOSTD3 2350 ISO Std 3,
128 avgs
128 8
2350FI02 2350 USSTDFILE02 12 stream with
files
204 12
2360_001 2360 USADUAL1 2360 test applica-
tion
64 8
2350EXMB 2350 USSTDFILE01 Extended Modbus
4 strm plus cal
150 5
2360ISO1 2360 ISODUALSTD1 2360 ISO Std 1,
64 avgs
64 8
• Standard BTU applications use the BIN files 2350_001, 2350_002, and 2350_003
for 64, 32, and 128 averages respectively.
• The Extended Modbus application uses BIN file 2350EXMB.
• The standard dual application uses BIN file 2360_001.
E-22 UPGRADE 2350A GC S/W AND 2350 EPROMS
MON2000
Standard Applications Prior to v1.50 JULY 2010
E.10.3 Standard Applications Prior to v1.50
For versions of GC Applications prior to version
1.50, the CFG Base Name variable did not
exist. Therefore, a combination of other
variables must be inspected to determine the
standard application that was used to
formulate the current user application.
To determine the standard application used to
create a user application prior to version 1.50,
compare the values of three variables from the
System dialog - Unit Type, Max Archive
Averages, and System Description — with the
values found in Table E-2. You will also need to
compare the maximum number of streams,
which can be determined from the Streams
option under the Application menu.
There is one more possible complication. If the
variable System Description was edited, it may
not be the same value as described earlier in
Table E-2. In such an instance, it would be
impossible to distinguish between the
2350_00n (i.e., USASTD1, USASTD2, and
USASTD3) and 2350ISOn (i.e., ISOSTD1,
ISOSTD2, and ISOSTD3) applications.
To overcome this complication, you can inspect
one more variable:
1. Use the Application> User Defined>
Selection menu to access the Selection
dialog.
2. In the Selection dialog, CVTABLE_pri will
be the first variable listed if the application
is one of the ISO applications.
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-1
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 Introduction – SIM_2251 & User_Modbus
FA
APPENDIX F, MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
F.1 INTRODUCTION – SIM_2251 & USER_MODBUS
GC Controller Modbus registers that may be of interest to the developer
are of two varieties, SIM_2251 and User_Modbus. Differences are
summarized in the following table.
F.1.1 NOTES ON USER_MODBUS
Section F.2 lists only variables included in the User_Modbus Boolean
Modbus registers. These registers are not user-defined and primarily
contain alarm flags, possibly useful for debugging purposes. To use the
Modbus Test software to view the contents of these registers, you will
need to set the Function parameter to “1 (Read Coil)”. See Section 10.2
through Section 10.4 for details on using the Modbus Test software.
Table F-1 Comparison of SIM_2251 and User_Modbus
SIM_2251 User_Modbus
Serial slave port. Serial slave port.
Modified protocol that allows floating point
numbers to be transmitted over Modbus via
2251 emulation slave type.
The standard Gould Modbus protocol that
accommodates PLC Emulation LO-HI.
Nearly all register contents are predefined;
a few 9000-series registers can be user-
defined (i.e., read-write).
Boolean (coils) are predefined. Numeric
(registers) are user-defined.
Variables assigned to registers can be listed
in contents of a PC-Config Report (for
instructions, see Section 2.16.3; for an
example report, see Appendix A,). For more
detail about register contents, see
Section F.2.1.
Variables assigned to registers can be listed
in contents of a PC-Config Report (for
instructions, see Section 2.16.3; for an
example report, see Appendix A,). Boolean
(coils) contents also listed in Section F.2.
When using the Modbus Test software, set
Register Mode to “DANIEL” to view register
contents (see Section 10.2.3).
When using the Modbus Test software, set
Register Mode to “PLC LH” to view register
contents (see Section 10.2.3).
F-2 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
Introduction – SIM_2251 & User_Modbus JULY 2010
All other User_Modbus registers can be defined by the user. To define
User_Modbus register contents (through assignment of variables), see
Section 5.18.4.
To obtain a complete list of register assignments, both SIM_2251 and
User_Modbus, use Model 700 to produce a PC-Config Report.
F.1.2 NOTES ON SIM_2251 MODBUS
To use the Modbus Test software and view the contents of SIM_2251
registers, you will need to set Register Mode to “Daniel”, as noted in Table
F-1.
To obtain a complete list of register assignments, both SIM_2251 and
User_Modbus, use MON2000 to produce a PC-Config Report.
To print a PC-Config Report, see Section 2.16.3; for an example
report, see Appendix A, Section F.2 and Section F.2.1.
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-3
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F.2 USER_MODBUS REGISTER LIST
F-4 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-5
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F-6 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
F.2.1 SIM_2251 MODBUS REGISTER LIST
The information in the following tables is derived from engineering specification number
ES-17128-005, “Model 2251 Enhanced Specification Chromatograph Controller Modbus
Communication Indices” and has been updated for the 2350A GC Controllers.
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-7
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F-8 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-9
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F-10 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-11
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F-12 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-13
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F-14 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC F-15
MON2000________________________________________________________________________________
JULY 2010 User_Modbus Register List
F-16 MODBUS REG. LIST FOR 2350A GC
________________________________________________________________________________MON2000
User_Modbus Register List JULY 2010
This page is intentionally left blank.
WARRANTY CLAIM PROCEDURES
To make a warranty claim, you, the Purchaser, must:
1. Provide Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc. or Rosemount
Analytical, Inc. with proof of the Date of Purchase and proof of the
Date of Shipment of the product in question.
2. Return the product to Daniel Measurement Services (DMS) within 12
months of the date of original shipment of the product, or within 18
months of the date of original shipment of the product to destinations
outside of the United States. The Purchaser must prepay any shipping
charges. In addition, the Purchaser is responsible for insuring any
product shipped for return, and assumes the risk of loss of the product
during shipment.
3. To obtain warranty service or to locate the nearest DMS office, sales
office, or service center, call (713) 827-6314, fax a request to (713) 827-
6312, or write to:
Daniel Measurement Services
11100 Brittmore Park Drive
Houston, Texas 77041
You can also contact DMS via www.emersonprocess.com/daniel.
4. When contacting DMS for product service, the Purchaser is asked to
provide information as indicated on the following page entitled
"Customer Repair Report".
5. For product returns from locations outside the United States, it will be
necessary for you to obtain the import consignment address so that
DMS's customs broker can handle the importation with the U.S.
Customs Service.
6. DMS offers both on call and contract maintenance service designed to
afford single source responsibility for all its products.
7. DMS reserves the right to make changes at any time to any product to
improve its design and to insure the best available product.
This page is intentionally left blank.
CUSTOMER REPAIR REPORT
FOR SERVICE, COMPLETE THIS FORM, AND RETURN IT ALONG WITH THE AFFECTED EQUIPMENT
TO CUSTOMER SERVICE AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW.
COMPANY NAME: ___________________________________________________________________________
TECHNICAL CONTACT:_____________________________________ PHONE: _________________________
REPAIR P. O. #:________________________ IF WARRANTY, UNIT S/N:_____________________________
INVOICE ADDRESS: __________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
SHIPPING ADDRESS: _________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
RETURN SHIPPING METHOD: _________________________________________________________________
EQUIPMENT MODEL #:____________________ S/N:__________________FAILURE DATE: _____________
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: __________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
WHAT WAS HAPPENING AT TIME OF FAILURE? _______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
ADDITIONAL COMMENTS: ____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
REPORT PREPARED BY:__________________________________ TITLE: _____________________________
IF YOU REQUIRE TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE, PLEASE FAX OR WRITE THE CUSTOMER SERVICE
DEPARTMENT AT:
DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES
DIVISION OF EMERSON PROCESS MANAGEMENT PHONE: (713) 827-6314
ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE FAX: (713) 827-6312
11100 BRITTMOORE PARK DRIVE
HOUSTON, TEXAS 77041
FOR FASTEST SERVICE CONTACT DANIEL MEASUREMENT SERVICES VIA OUR WEBSITE:
www.emersonprocess.com/daniel
This page is intentionally left blank.
Daniel Measurement and Control, Inc., Daniel Measurement Services, Inc., and
Rosemount Analytical Inc., Divisions of Emerson Process Management, reserves the
right to make changes to any of its products or services at any time without prior
notification in order to improve that product or service and to supply the best product
or service possible.
www.emersonprocess.com

Navigation menu